CADWorx Plant User Guide PDF

CADWorx
Plant User's Guide
Version 2013 R2 (13.2)

November 2012
DICAS-PE-200007B
Copyright
Copyright 2003-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, CADWorx, and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or
its subsidiaries in the United States, and other countries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates.
AutoCAD, ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands,
and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Autodesk, Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to
the extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensees use of
the Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable
by Autodesk in addition to Intergraph.
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 15
Conventions .......................................................................................................................................... 15
Technical Support ................................................................................................................................. 16
What's New in Plant .............................................................................................................................. 18
Obsolete Commands ...................................................................................................................... 20
Online Help ........................................................................................................................................... 21
Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
Startup Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 23
Support Directory .................................................................................................................................. 23
MVSetup ............................................................................................................................................... 24
Setup Size/Spec Panel .............................................................................................................................. 25
Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 26
Configuration Settings .................................................................................................................... 28
Set Specification and Size .............................................................................................................. 43
Configuration Layers ...................................................................................................................... 44
Piping Rules ................................................................................................................................... 46
Convert Legacy Drawing ................................................................................................................ 51
Specification and Size ........................................................................................................................... 55
Optional Items ....................................................................................................................................... 55
Optional Component Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 55
Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 56
Spec ...................................................................................................................................................... 56
Size-Spec .............................................................................................................................................. 57
All .......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Editor ..................................................................................................................................................... 57
Change Size.......................................................................................................................................... 57
Change the size automatically ....................................................................................................... 58
Change the size manually .............................................................................................................. 58
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically ............................................................ 59
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually ................................................................... 59
Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically .............................................. 60
Change Specification ............................................................................................................................ 60
Change the specification automatically .......................................................................................... 61
Change the specification manually ................................................................................................. 61
Change the specification of a model with branches automatically ................................................. 61
Local Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 62
Modify a component ....................................................................................................................... 63
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 64
Global Edit............................................................................................................................................. 68
Modify multiple components ........................................................................................................... 69
Mode Convert........................................................................................................................................ 70
Convert a component to a different mode ...................................................................................... 71
3D Solids ........................................................................................................................................ 71
Convert Isometric ........................................................................................................................... 71
2D Double Line ............................................................................................................................... 71
CADWorx Plant User's Guide
Contents
2D Single Line ................................................................................................................................ 71
Convert Existing ............................................................................................................................. 72
Convert to 3D enhanced................................................................................................................. 72
Convert from project data ............................................................................................................... 72
CWexplode ..................................................................................................................................... 72
Socket Weld .......................................................................................................................................... 73
Threaded ............................................................................................................................................... 73
Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 73
XREF Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 73
Palette Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 75
Spec View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 76
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ............................................................................. 76
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette).................................................................................. 78
Line View Palette .................................................................................................................................. 79
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ............................................................................. 79
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ......................................................................................... 80
Support Modeler Palette ....................................................................................................................... 81
Insert a pipe support ....................................................................................................................... 83
Insert an elbow support .................................................................................................................. 84
Insert multiple pipe supports .......................................................................................................... 84
Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) .......................................................................................... 84
Insulation View Palette .......................................................................................................................... 88
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .......................................................................... 89
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .............................................................................. 90
Discontinuity View Palette ..................................................................................................................... 92
Pipe Support Report ............................................................................................................................. 93
P&ID View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 94
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)................................................................................. 94
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) ............................................................................ 96
Insert a drawing into the project ..................................................................................................... 97
Clash View Palette ................................................................................................................................ 97
Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 98
Layers Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 99
Assembly View Palette ......................................................................................................................... 99
Create an assembly...................................................................................................................... 100
Edit an assembly .......................................................................................................................... 100
Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager ........................................................................ 101
Insert an assembly into the drawing ............................................................................................. 101
Edit an assembly path .................................................................................................................. 101
ISOGEN Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 103
ISOGEN Out ....................................................................................................................................... 104
Extract ISOGEN files .................................................................................................................... 105
ISOGEN Batch .................................................................................................................................... 106
Extract batch ISOGEN files .......................................................................................................... 106
ISOGEN Supplemental ....................................................................................................................... 107
Stop Sign ............................................................................................................................................. 108
ISOGEN Start Point ............................................................................................................................ 108
Offset Tap ........................................................................................................................................... 108
Place an offset tap ........................................................................................................................ 111
PCF Out .............................................................................................................................................. 112
Contents
Extract piping component files ..................................................................................................... 112
PCF In ................................................................................................................................................. 112
Tap ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
Place a tap .................................................................................................................................... 113
ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure .............................................................................................. 113
ISOGEN Information ........................................................................................................................... 113
Material List Definition .................................................................................................................. 113
SKEY Information ......................................................................................................................... 114
End Type Information ................................................................................................................... 121
LNum Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 123
Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 124
Line Numbering System Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 124
Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
Set line numbers based on a P&ID project .................................................................................. 126
Set line numbers based on the current drawing ........................................................................... 126
Set line numbers based on a component ..................................................................................... 126
Count ................................................................................................................................................... 126
Set the line count value ................................................................................................................ 127
Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 127
Decrement........................................................................................................................................... 127
Assign ................................................................................................................................................. 127
Assign line numbers ..................................................................................................................... 128
Annotate .............................................................................................................................................. 128
Label components with line numbers ........................................................................................... 128
Line ..................................................................................................................................................... 129
Set the current line number to that of a component ..................................................................... 129
Line Isolate .......................................................................................................................................... 129
Pipe BOM / DB Panel ............................................................................................................................... 131
Bill of Material Setup ........................................................................................................................... 132
Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 133
Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 133
Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 133
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 134
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ................................................................................ 134
Cut Pipe Bill of Material ....................................................................................................................... 134
Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 135
Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 136
Total Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 136
Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 137
Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 137
Single Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 138
Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 139
Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 139
Export Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 139
Import Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 141
Delete Bill of Material .......................................................................................................................... 141
Tag Toggle Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 141
Tag Location ....................................................................................................................................... 141
Insert Tag ............................................................................................................................................ 142
Setup Live Database ........................................................................................................................... 142
Contents
Export Pipe.......................................................................................................................................... 143
Select Item Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 144
Import Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... 145
Audit Pipe Database ........................................................................................................................... 145
Synchronize Pipe Database ................................................................................................................ 146
C.G. Generator.................................................................................................................................... 147
Misc Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 149
Auto Connect ...................................................................................................................................... 150
Group On/Off....................................................................................................................................... 150
Weld Size ............................................................................................................................................ 151
Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe ............................................................................. 151
Top Works Add ................................................................................................................................... 151
Top Works Change ............................................................................................................................. 151
System Out ......................................................................................................................................... 152
Generate a CAESAR II input file .................................................................................................. 152
User Shapes ....................................................................................................................................... 153
Create a user shape file ............................................................................................................... 157
Edit an existing user shape .......................................................................................................... 158
Create a user shape from points .................................................................................................. 162
Create a user shape from a polyline ............................................................................................ 164
Create a user shape from a block ................................................................................................ 165
Create a 3D user shape ............................................................................................................... 167
Create a 2D user shape ............................................................................................................... 168
Create a 2D single line user shape .............................................................................................. 170
Add a user shape to a specification ............................................................................................. 171
Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing ........................................................................... 172
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing ..................................................................... 172
Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 173
Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 173
System In ............................................................................................................................................ 174
Read a CAESAR II input file ......................................................................................................... 175
Elbow Centerline ................................................................................................................................. 175
ISO Flag .............................................................................................................................................. 175
Dim Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... 175
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe ............................................................................................. 176
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension .................................................................................. 176
System Visibility .................................................................................................................................. 177
2D Panel.................................................................................................................................................... 179
2D Representation .............................................................................................................................. 179
Create a 2D representation .......................................................................................................... 180
2D Representation Hidden .................................................................................................................. 180
Create a 2D representation with hidden lines .............................................................................. 180
Box ...................................................................................................................................................... 180
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181
Zoom Lock .......................................................................................................................................... 181
Turn on the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 182
Turn off the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 182
Zoom Factors ...................................................................................................................................... 182
Contents
Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................ 183
Auto Gasket ........................................................................................................................................ 183
Place a gasket automatically ........................................................................................................ 183
Place a gasket manually............................................................................................................... 184
Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 184
Place stud bolts automatically ...................................................................................................... 184
Place stud bolts manually ............................................................................................................. 184
Auto Weld............................................................................................................................................ 185
Place weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 185
Place weld gaps manually ............................................................................................................ 186
Weld Total ........................................................................................................................................... 186
Count weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 186
Standard .............................................................................................................................................. 187
Place standard stud bolts ............................................................................................................. 187
Non Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 187
Place nonstandard stud bolts ....................................................................................................... 187
RT Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 189
Auto Route .......................................................................................................................................... 189
Start a new route .......................................................................................................................... 190
Continue Routing .......................................................................................................................... 191
Router ................................................................................................................................................. 191
Router commands ............................................................................................................................... 192
Buttweld LR .................................................................................................................................. 192
Buttweld SR .................................................................................................................................. 193
Threaded ...................................................................................................................................... 193
Socket Weld ................................................................................................................................. 194
Dimension Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 195
Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 196
Place automatic dimensions ......................................................................................................... 196
Horizontal ............................................................................................................................................ 196
Place horizontal dimensions ......................................................................................................... 196
Vertical ................................................................................................................................................ 197
Place vertical dimensions ............................................................................................................. 197
Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 197
Set the Elevation .......................................................................................................................... 197
Rotated ................................................................................................................................................ 198
Place rotated dimensions ............................................................................................................. 198
Horizontal with Tail .............................................................................................................................. 198
Place horizontal tailed dimensions ............................................................................................... 198
Vertical with Tail .................................................................................................................................. 198
Place vertical tailed dimensions ................................................................................................... 199
Change ................................................................................................................................................ 199
Change the Elevation ................................................................................................................... 199
Component.......................................................................................................................................... 199
Place component annotation ........................................................................................................ 200
Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 200
Place component elevation annotation ........................................................................................ 200
Coordinates ......................................................................................................................................... 200
Place coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 201
Tick Mark ............................................................................................................................................. 201
Contents
Place tick marks ........................................................................................................................... 202
ISO Text .............................................................................................................................................. 202
Height .................................................................................................................................................. 202
Graphics / Pipe Ends............................................................................................................................... 203
System Prompts .................................................................................................................................. 204
Section ................................................................................................................................................ 206
Place a section graphic ................................................................................................................ 206
Detail ................................................................................................................................................... 207
Place a detail graphic ................................................................................................................... 207
Plan ..................................................................................................................................................... 208
Place a plan graphic ..................................................................................................................... 208
Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 209
Place an elevation graphic ........................................................................................................... 209
Arrow ................................................................................................................................................... 210
Place an arrow head graphic ........................................................................................................ 210
Weld .................................................................................................................................................... 211
Place a weld symbol graphic ........................................................................................................ 211
ISO ...................................................................................................................................................... 211
Place an isometric symbol graphic ............................................................................................... 213
Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 213
Place a miscellaneous graphic ..................................................................................................... 214
Instrument ........................................................................................................................................... 214
Place an instrument graphic ......................................................................................................... 215
Dots ..................................................................................................................................................... 215
Place a weld dot graphic .............................................................................................................. 216
Layers Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 217
Change Layer...................................................................................................................................... 218
Change the layer associated with an object ................................................................................. 218
Set Layer ............................................................................................................................................. 218
Set the active layer ....................................................................................................................... 218
Delete Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 218
Delete a layer ............................................................................................................................... 219
Layer Off ............................................................................................................................................. 219
Turn off a layer ............................................................................................................................. 219
Layer On ............................................................................................................................................. 219
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command .............................................................. 219
Match Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 219
Match an object's layer ................................................................................................................. 220
Isolate Layer........................................................................................................................................ 220
Display only the layer associated with an object .......................................................................... 220
Un-Isolate Layer .................................................................................................................................. 220
Turn on all layers .......................................................................................................................... 220
Previous .............................................................................................................................................. 220
Restraints Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 221
Reinforcing Pad................................................................................................................................... 222
Insert a reinforcement pad ........................................................................................................... 222
Reinforcing Saddle .............................................................................................................................. 222
Insert a reinforcement saddle ....................................................................................................... 223
Contents
Translational........................................................................................................................................ 223
Place a translational restraint ....................................................................................................... 223
Anchor ................................................................................................................................................. 224
Place an anchor ............................................................................................................................ 224
Spring Hanger ..................................................................................................................................... 224
Place a spring hanger................................................................................................................... 225
Rotational ............................................................................................................................................ 225
Place a rotational restraint ............................................................................................................ 225
Snubber ............................................................................................................................................... 226
Place a snubber ............................................................................................................................ 226
Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 226
Place a guide ................................................................................................................................ 226
UCS Panel................................................................................................................................................. 227
Point and Shoot UCS .......................................................................................................................... 227
Flat ...................................................................................................................................................... 229
UCS Next ............................................................................................................................................ 230
Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 230
North ................................................................................................................................................... 230
South ................................................................................................................................................... 231
West .................................................................................................................................................... 231
East ..................................................................................................................................................... 232
UCS Object ......................................................................................................................................... 232
Steel Shapes Panel .................................................................................................................................. 233
Shapes ................................................................................................................................................ 233
Wide Flange Shapes .................................................................................................................... 236
Channel Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 237
Angle Shapes ............................................................................................................................... 238
Tee Shapes .................................................................................................................................. 239
Pipe Shapes ................................................................................................................................. 240
Tube Shapes ................................................................................................................................ 241
Flat Bar Shapes ............................................................................................................................ 242
Round Bar Shapes ....................................................................................................................... 243
Channel Shape with Lip................................................................................................................ 244
Angle Shape with Lip .................................................................................................................... 245
Z Shapes ...................................................................................................................................... 246
Angle Double Shape..................................................................................................................... 247
Steel Draw Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 249
Plate .................................................................................................................................................... 250
Place plate by points .................................................................................................................... 251
Place plate by closed polyline ...................................................................................................... 251
Place plate by curves ................................................................................................................... 252
Base Plate ........................................................................................................................................... 252
Place a base plate ........................................................................................................................ 254
Place a base plate with holes ....................................................................................................... 254
Steel Bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 255
Set Size by Component ...................................................................................................................... 257
Generic Attachment ............................................................................................................................ 257
User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 258
Contents
Loft ...................................................................................................................................................... 260
Single Line Steel ................................................................................................................................. 261
Frame Creation ................................................................................................................................... 268
Create a new frame configuration ................................................................................................ 269
Edit a frame configuration ............................................................................................................ 270
Place a frame in the drawing ........................................................................................................ 270
Frame Annotation................................................................................................................................ 270
Ladder ................................................................................................................................................. 271
Place a ladder interactively .......................................................................................................... 272
Place a ladder using key-ins ........................................................................................................ 273
Place a ladder with a cage ........................................................................................................... 273
Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 273
Place hand rail by points .............................................................................................................. 274
Place hand rail by polyline ............................................................................................................ 275
Stair ..................................................................................................................................................... 275
Steel Edit Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 279
Cope .................................................................................................................................................... 280
Miter .................................................................................................................................................... 280
Cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 281
Cut members by line..................................................................................................................... 281
Cut members by three-point plane ............................................................................................... 281
Union ................................................................................................................................................... 282
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 282
Global Edit........................................................................................................................................... 286
Global Edit All...................................................................................................................................... 287
Annotate Component .......................................................................................................................... 289
Convert Solid....................................................................................................................................... 289
Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 290
Select Control...................................................................................................................................... 290
Auto Cope ........................................................................................................................................... 290
Steel BOM / DB Panel .............................................................................................................................. 291
Steel BOM Setup ................................................................................................................................ 292
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ....................................................................... 294
Cut Steel Bill of Material ...................................................................................................................... 294
Total Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................... 296
Single Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 297
Export Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 299
Setup Live Database Steel ................................................................................................................. 300
Export Steel......................................................................................................................................... 301
Import Steel ......................................................................................................................................... 301
10
Contents
Audit Steel Database .......................................................................................................................... 302
Synchronize Steel Database ............................................................................................................... 302
Export Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 303
Import Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 303
CG Generator...................................................................................................................................... 304
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel ................................................................................................................ 305
HVAC .................................................................................................................................................. 306
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing............................................................................................. 308
Modify an HVAC shape ................................................................................................................ 308
HVAC Shapes Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 308
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog ....................................................................................... 310
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog ..................................................................................... 310
User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 310
Place a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................... 313
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................. 313
Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 313
Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 314
Modify a generic attachment ........................................................................................................ 314
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 314
GC Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 315
Edit HVAC components globally .................................................................................................. 315
HVAC BOM Setup............................................................................................................................... 315
Cut HVAC Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 318
Total HVAC Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 319
Single HVAC Bill of Material ............................................................................................................... 321
Data Remove ...................................................................................................................................... 322
Remove CADWorx data from components .................................................................................. 322
Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 322
Change the layers associated with HVAC components ............................................................... 323
Export HVAC ....................................................................................................................................... 323
Export CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 323
Import HVAC ....................................................................................................................................... 324
Import CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 324
Audit HVAC Database ........................................................................................................................ 324
Audit the HVAC database ............................................................................................................ 324
Synchronize HVAC Database ............................................................................................................. 325
Synchronize the HVAC database ................................................................................................. 325
Toolbars.................................................................................................................................................... 327
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars.................................................................................................. 327
Aliases and Command Names ........................................................................................................... 328
11
Contents
Connecting to components ................................................................................................................. 328
Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 328
Plane versus Isometrics view modes .................................................................................................. 328
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling ....................................................................................................... 329
Buttweld .............................................................................................................................................. 329
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 333
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 349
Flanges ............................................................................................................................................... 361
Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................................ 362
Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................................. 364
Blind Flange .................................................................................................................................. 365
Socket Type Flange...................................................................................................................... 366
Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................................... 367
Lap Joint Flange ........................................................................................................................... 369
Stub End ....................................................................................................................................... 369
Long Weld Neck ........................................................................................................................... 370
Reducing Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................. 370
Reducing Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................... 372
Reducing Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................ 373
Flgd/BW Valves................................................................................................................................... 375
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 376
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 386
Lined ................................................................................................................................................... 389
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 391
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 393
Fiberglass ............................................................................................................................................ 394
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 397
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 405
Sanitary ............................................................................................................................................... 412
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 419
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 435
Victaulic ............................................................................................................................................... 447
Threaded/Socket ................................................................................................................................. 450
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 455
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 470
Thrd/SW Valves .................................................................................................................................. 481
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 484
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 493
Gaskets, Etc. ....................................................................................................................................... 495
Gasket .......................................................................................................................................... 496
Weld Gap ...................................................................................................................................... 497
Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 497
Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 498
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 500
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 503
Operators ............................................................................................................................................ 504
Line Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 504
UCS ..................................................................................................................................................... 505
Steel .................................................................................................................................................... 505
Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 507
Palettes ............................................................................................................................................... 509
12
Contents
Specification and Data Files ................................................................................................................... 511
Editing Component Data Files ............................................................................................................ 511
AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant ................................................................................................... 513
Modifying a User Profile ...................................................................................................................... 513
Creating a Base Profile ....................................................................................................................... 514
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant .............................................. 514
Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database ............................................................... 516
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 517
13
Contents
14
Preface
This document provides command reference information and workflows for CADWorx Plant.
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer
https://crmweb.intergraph.com.
Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as needed for
non-commercial use at your company. You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution
outside your company.
Conventions
Before reviewing this guide, it is important to understand the terms and conventions used in the
documentation.
Use the information below to identify the convention and the type of information.
Convention
Type of Information
[Product Folder]
The CADWorx installation folder on your computer, for example,

C:\CADWorx. Substitute your installation folder anywhere this
notation is used.
[AutoCAD Folder]
The AutoCAD installation folder on your computer, for example,

C:\AutoCAD 2000i. Substitute your installation folder anywhere
this notation is used.
[CD-DRIVE]
The CD-ROM drive on your computer. Substitute your CD-ROM

drive letter anywhere this notation is used.
Command Line
Items that need to be typed in or appear at the AutoCAD

command line.
User Responses
User responses to command prompts.
Commands
CADWorx and AutoCAD commands.
Options
Command line options.
CAPITALS
AutoCAD system variables or keywords.
Key + Key
Key combinations for which you must press and hold down one
key and then press another, for example, CTRL+P or ALT+F4.
15
Preface
Technical Support
For the latest information on CADWorx Plant, visit Intergraph CADWorx and Analysis Solutions
(http://www.coade.com/).
For current on-line support information, including knowledge base, technical tips, and
downloads, visit eCustomer (https://crmweb.intergraph.com/ecustomer_enu).
In order to provide technical support, Intergraph CAS needs to know what version of CADWorx,
AutoCAD, and Windows you are using. To determine this information, follow the steps outlined
for the product you are using:
CADWorx Product
Steps
Plant, P&ID, fieldPipe, or Steel
Equipment or PV Fabricator
Run the CADWORXABOUT command. A dialog

box opens and displays the version information.
Close the dialog box to send the required
information to the AutoCAD command line.
Copy the information from the command line, and
email it to Intergraph CAS.
Run the EQUIPABOUT command. A dialog box
opens and displays the version information.
Close the dialog box to send the required
information to the AutoCAD command line.
Copy the information from the command line, and
email it to Intergraph CAS.
Internet Publisher
Version information is displayed at the AutoCAD

command line when you start the software.
Datasheets
Click Help > About to display a dialog box that contains

the required information.
In addition to the information above, the table below lists the additional files that are usually
required to assist Intergraph CAS in resolving your technical issues:
CADWorx Product
Additional Files Required by Intergraph CAS

Support
CADWorx Plant (Piping, Steel, HVAC)
Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.
CADWorx Plant (component data file

creation)
16
If the model consists of several line numbers,

indicate in the email which line numbers you are
having issues with.
If the model consists of many drawing files with
dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the
AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP
file of all the drawings used in the master model.
Email information about the part's dimension from the

manufacturer's catalog.
Preface
CADWorx ISOGEN
Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files, any

isometrics generated by ISOGEN, and the ISOGEN
style files.

having issues with.
The ISOGEN.FLS file located in the ISOGEN style
folder lists all the files used (*.OPL, *.MLS, *.FLS,
*.DDF, *.POS, *.ALT, *.DWG*.DXF, *.FDF, *.ATT).
Email all files listed in the ISOGEN.FLS file,
including the ISOGEN.FLS file.
CADWorx Equipment
CADWorx Equipment to PV Elite

interface
Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and PV

Elite input file (*.PVI).
PV Fabricator
Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and PV

Elite input file (*.PVI).
CADWorx P&ID or CADWorx IP
Email the complete P&ID project, which includes

Project.CFG, Database.TBL, Map.TBL, and all the
DWG, and MDB files. Usually, all of these files are
located in one folder.
CADWorx Steel
CADWorx Datasheets
If the model consists of many components, indicate

in the model which components or location you are
having issues with.
Email the datasheets MDB file and any datasheet file

generated (XLS).
If the project has many P&ID drawing files, indicate

which P&ID drawings and components you are
having issues with.
If you are experiencing database errors, include the
file [Product
Folder]\P&ID\System\Sql_Error_Log.TXT.
If you are emailing MDB files, use a compression
utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have
restrictions on transmitting MDB attachments.
If emailing MDB / XLS files, use a compression

utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have
restrictions on transmitting MDB / XLS attachments.
17
Preface
CADWorx Plant to CAESAR II
interface
Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and

CAESAR II input file (*._A, *.C2).
Run the CADWorx GETALLSPECDATAFILES

command to copy all specifications and data files
used in the model into sub-folders under where the
model drawing file is located.
Zip the contents of these folders and email the ZIP
file to Intergraph CAS Support.
having issues with.
CADWorx Design Review or CADWorx Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.
Design Create
having issues with.
If the model consists of many drawing files with
dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the
AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP
file of all drawings used in the master model.
CADWorx Design Viewer
Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and the

*.CDR file.
If you are attaching large or multiple files to your eCustomer log, use a compression utility
such as WinZIP.
If you cannot attach your drawing files, then try to duplicate the issue in a new drawing with
as few components as possible. If the issue can be duplicated in a new drawing, attach the
duplicate drawing to Intergraph CAS.
For hardware lock issues, first verify that you have an Intergraph CAS hardware lock.
CADWorx Plant Professional, CADWorx P&ID, CADWorx P&ID Professional, CADWorx
Plant Ductile Iron, and CADWorx Plant Sanitary use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for
licensing. CADWorx Steel, CADWorx Steel Professional Plus do not use the Intergraph CAS
hardware lock for licensing. For more information about hardware locks, see CADWorx
Hardware Lock Identification in the CADWorx Installation Guide.
What's New in Plant

Version 2013 R2 (13.2)
This user's guide has had the following changes for this release.
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R2 - November 2012:
Program
18
You can now convert CADWorx legacy drawings using

CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing
(on page 51) and CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box (on page
52).
Preface
You can now review drawings for legacy components using

REVIEWLEGACYCOMPONENTS. For more information, see Find Legacy Components
Dialog Box (on page 54).
You can now have CADWorx automatically add couplings between components with the
Apply Auto Coupling Rule. For more information, see Apply Auto Coupling Rule (on page
49) in Piping Rules (on page 46).
You can now have CADWorx automatically check the line number when inserting
components in a line with the Apply Line Number Rule. For more information, see Apply
Line Number Rule (on page 50) in Piping Rules (on page 46).
You can now decide which items CADWorx automatically updates when using the Change
Size, Change Spec, or automatic update of data options with the Apply Change Data
Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule (on page 51).
You can now have CADWorx audit your data on startup to check for removed XDATA using
AuditDataOnStartup variable. For more information, see AuditDataOnStartup (on page 30).
You can now see which components have had XDATA removed by using the
CWSHOWNOXD command. For more information, see Show Removed XDATA (on page
30).
You can now restore XDATA to components that have had XDATA removed by using the
CWADDXD command. For more information, see Restore XDATA (on page 31).
Manual
A new topic was added detailing connection points and SKEY for ISOGEN export when
dealing with user shapes. For more information, see ISOGEN Export Options (on page 159).
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R1 - July 2012:
You can display help by typing MANUAL on the command line. For more information, see
Online Help (on page 21).
You can now select your drawing environment type by the Drawing Prototype variable. For
more information, see Drawing Prototype (on page 30).
You can now convert components into 3D Enhanced mode. For more information, see
Convert to 3D enhanced (on page 72).
You can now update the project data of components in your drawing by using the
CONVERTFROMPRJDATA command. For more information, see Convert from project data
(on page 72).
You can now change CADWorx Components to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata by using the
CWEXPLODE command. For more information, see CWexplode. (on page 72).
You can now edit the assembly path of an assembly using the ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS
command. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 101).
You can now redefine connection points for a user shape by using the EDITUSERSHAPE
command. For more information, see Edit by redefining connection points (on page 159).
You can now use the PIPW1 (Buttweld pipe), PIPF1 (Socket Weld or Threaded pipe), and
PIPFL1 (Flanged pipe) commands to draw single pipe components. For more information,
see Pipe (on page 333).
ElbowCenterLines are only available in 2D and Isometric modes. For more information,
see ElbowCenterLine (on page 34).
Detail information has been added to LayerByLineNumber. For more information, see
LayerByLineNumber (on page 35).
You can now reload a project file after changes have been made by clicking Reload File.
For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).
19
Preface
You can now stop xdata from appearing in the bill of materials or components by using the
CONVERTEXISTING command. This command was previously known as the EXIST
command. For more information, see Convert Existing (on page 72).
You can now refresh your project from changes made to your selected specification by
clicking Reload*.prj File. For more information, see Spec View Tab (on page 76).
You can now reload the global file by right clicking and selecting Reload Global File. For
more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 - March 2012:
You can now change the size of components by using the CHANGESIZE command. For
more information, see Change Size (on page 57).
You can now change the specification of components by using the CHANGESPEC
command. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 60).
You can now create assemblies using the CADWorx Assembly Manager. For more
information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).
You can now auto route all components using the ROUTE command. For more information,
see Auto Route (on page 189).
You can now set Piping Rules for CADWorx. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 46) in Setup (on page 26).
Toolbars (on page 327) contain more information on how to model in 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 329), Plane versus Isometrics view modes (on page 328), the
Compass (on page 328), and on Connecting to components (on page 328) for the new
features in CADWorx.
You can now change the variable setting in the Configuration Settings in CADWorx Plant
Setup. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28).
You can now set your specification and size in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more
information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).
You can now update your configuration layers in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more
information, see Configuration Layers (on page 44).
CADWorx now incorporates a new Spec Editor program. For more information see Editor
(on page 57) or the Spec Editor Users Guide.
Updated all panels and toolbars to reflect changes throughout the software.
Obsolete Commands
These commands are no longer available in CADWorx Plant.
20
AUTOISO
BREAKDIST
CLASSICCLASH
C2ISO
C2MULTI
C2TEXT
CONVERTCL
ELEV2PLAN
ENDBREAK
ENDFLG
ENDHIDDEN
ENDPIPE
ENDPLAIN
EXIST
GEARELEV
HEAD
INSERTMODE
INSULATION
ISOCFG
ISOOUT
LEVERELEV
LINEPIPE
NODEPLACE
NORHTELEV
OFFSETCL
OPERPLAN
OSYELEV
Preface
PIPEIN
PIPEOUT
PUMP
RECT
ROLLEDFLG
ROLLEDPLAIN
SETANGLE
SOUTHELEV
SPECCHG
SPECCHGTOGGLE
TANK
VESSEL
VESSELOD
WESTELEV
3DFOLLOW
Online Help
To access the CADWorx Plant Help, type MANUAL on the command line, and then press
ENTER. This help file includes the Plant book, the Spec Editor book, and the CADWorx Plant
Tutorial.
21
Preface
22
SECTION 1
Setup
Before you begin using CADWorx Plant, you need to set options and some basic configuration
tasks.
Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and
project (.prj) file in the Spec Editor before modeling begins.
In This Section
Startup Defaults ............................................................................. 23
Support Directory ........................................................................... 23
MVSetup ........................................................................................ 24
Startup Defaults
When starting CADWorx Plant for the first time, you are prompted for the system of
measurement to use in the drawing. This dialog box only displays the first time you start
CADWorx. After that, the configuration file name and location is stored in the registry. The
following options are available:
Imperial Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product
Folder]\Plant\System\Imperial.cfg file.
Metric Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product
Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.
Metric Measurements - Metric Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product
Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.
Support Directory
Drawings in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder should not be opened with CADWorx
Plant. If a drawing is started in this folder, an error displays indicating that the software should
not be run from this location. This stops CADWorx from initializing or preparing the support
drawings. Directly open AutoCAD to modify these drawings.
To create a base profile, see Creating a Base Profile (on page 514).
23
Setup
MVSetup
Plant menu: Utility > MVSetup
Plant uses the MVSETUP.LSP file supplied by AutoCAD. The software also supplies a simplified
version of the MVSETUP.DFS file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder. If this file is
deleted, the software recreates it.
The MVSETUP.DFS file can be modified to include additional title blocks. Plant uses these title
blocks with the Setup (on page 26) function. The MVSetup routine has options that allow you to
add and delete title blocks. Plant supplies its own title blocks for your convenience. Plant title
blocks have attributes attached for ease of labeling.
24
SECTION 2
Setup Size/Spec Panel

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec
Command Name
Command Line
Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current

drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).
SETUP
Main Size - Specifies the specification, and the main and

reduction sizes. For more information, see Set Specification
and Size (on page 43).
SETSIZE, SETSPEC
Optional Items - Places a component when the component

type in the specification has an optional component. For more
information, see Optional Items (on page 55).
SPECOPTION
Size - Sets the main and reduction size by selecting a

component. For more information, see Size (on page 56).
COMP2SIZE
Spec - Sets the current specification by selecting a

component. For more information, see Spec (on page 56).
COMP2SPEC
Size-Spec - Sets the main size, reduction size, and

specification by selecting a component. For more information,
see Size-Spec (on page 57).
COMP2SIZESPEC
Editor - Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new SPECEDIT

specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page
77).
Change Size - Modifies the size of the components selected.
For more information, see Change Size (on page 57).
CHANGESIZE
Change Specification - Modifies the specification of the

components selected. For more information, see Change
Specification (on page 60).
CHANGESPEC
Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. CEDIT

For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62).
Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components.
For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68).
GCEDIT
3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. CONVERTSOLID

For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 3D
Solids (on page 71).
Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to
isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on
page 70) and Convert Isometric (on page 71).
CONVERTISO
25

2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D
double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 70) and 2D Double Line (on page 71).
CONVERTDOUBLE
2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single

line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page
70) and 2D Single Line (on page 71).
CONVERTSINGLE
Socket Weld - Sets the socket welded fitting mode for

hub-based components. For more information, see Socket
Weld (on page 73).
Threaded - Sets the threaded fitting mode for hub-based

components. For more information, see Threaded (on page
73).
Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more

information, see Settings (on page 73).
CURRENT
Xref Edit - Views sizes or information within the component

XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on page 73).
XCEDIT
Spec Change Toggle - Turns the TAG value update on or off. SPECCHGTOGGLE
Setup
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup
Setting toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Setup
Command line: SETUP
Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing. This command displays the CADWorx
Plant Setup dialog box.
26

CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box
Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing.
Current Drawing - Displays the current default values for Specification / Size. Sets the Colors,
Drawing Mode, and Fitting Mode.
Specification / Size - Displays the current settings for the specification and size:
Main Size - Displays the main size set for the drawing.
Reduction Size - Displays the reduction size set for the drawing.
Specification - Displays the specification set for the drawing.
Colors - Sets the default colors in the drawing:
Compass - Sets the compass color. The compass can also be turned off here.
Dimension - Sets the dimensions color. The dimensions can also be turned off here.
Highlight - Sets the highlight color.
Drawing Mode - Sets the default drawing mode:
3D Solids - Draws components in 3D mode.
2D Double Line - Draws components in 2D with double lines mode.
27
2D Single Line - Draws components in 2D with a single line mode.

3D Enhanced - Draws components in 3D enhanced mode.
You can convert the drawing to another mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 70).
Fitting Mode - Specifies the fitting mode for hub-based components. Select one of the
following:
Socket - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded
section of the specification.
Threaded - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section
of the specification.
Configuration Settings - Sets the values for the configuration. For more information, see
Startup Variables (on page 28).
Specification / Size - Sets the specification and sizes of the drawing. Specification must be set
before sizes can be set. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).
Configuration Layers - Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors
of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers.
Piping Rules - Sets the piping rules in the drawing. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 46).
Save As - Saves the current configuration.
Load - Loads a saved configuration.
Apply & Close - Accepts the settings and closes the dialog box. Settings are immediately
applied to the current drawing.
Cancel - Cancels the operation.
Help - Displays the CADWorx Plant Users Guide help file.
Configuration Settings
Specifies values for the selected configuration setting.
The default drawing template, Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt for metric) is also stored in the
registry. Each time the software is started, the default template is used.
The drawing parameters are setup during installation for imperial or metric in the setup
profile. If you want to change the configuration setting to the drawing parameters, use the
SystemMeasure (on page 41) variable to change the drawing settings.
Configuration Settings - Displays variables to change. Change variable values in the text box
list. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 28).
If the configuration settings permission is set to read-only, only the Cancel button is
available.
Startup Variables
Provides default drawing and component values. You can modify the variables in the
configuration setting as needed. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28).
The most recent configuration settings are stored in the registry and are used the next time you
start Plant.
28

Topics
Drawing Prototype ......................................................................... 30
AlphaSizeControl ........................................................................... 30
AuditDataOnStartup ....................................................................... 30
AutoDimensionBox ........................................................................ 31
BomBoltControl .............................................................................. 31
BomScheduleDirection .................................................................. 32
BomScheduleSpacing ................................................................... 32
BomTagGridFactor ........................................................................ 32
BomTagOptimize ........................................................................... 32
BomTagRadiusFactor .................................................................... 32
BomTagSpacingFactor .................................................................. 32
BoltRoundControl .......................................................................... 33
CADWorxMaterial .......................................................................... 33
CAESARMaterial ........................................................................... 33
CAESARMemory ........................................................................... 33
CAESARTolerance ........................................................................ 33
CAESARVersion ............................................................................ 34
DataBaseCodesISOGEN ............................................................... 34
DimensionsExcludedSlope ............................................................ 34
DimensionsExistingISOGEN ......................................................... 34
ElbowCenterLine ........................................................................... 34
FittingWidth .................................................................................... 35
HVACLibraryDirectory ................................................................... 35
ISOGENDefaultStyle ..................................................................... 35
LanguageFile ................................................................................. 35
LayerByLineNumber ...................................................................... 35
LibraryDirectory ............................................................................. 37
LineNumberSystem ....................................................................... 37
PipeDescriptionCat ........................................................................ 38
PipeSupportDirectory..................................................................... 38
PipeSupportSetting ........................................................................ 38
SaveLastProfileUsed ..................................................................... 39
SingleLineWidth ............................................................................. 39
SpecificationDirectory .................................................................... 39
SpecificationDefaultProject ............................................................ 39
SpecSizeOverride .......................................................................... 39
SteelCopeBoltDistance .................................................................. 39
SteelCopeWeldDistance ................................................................ 40
SteelLibraryDirectory ..................................................................... 40
SteelNeutralAxis ............................................................................ 40
SteelPartNumberFile ..................................................................... 40
SteelRoundControl ........................................................................ 40
SteelRoundUnit .............................................................................. 41
SteelToolTipSetting ....................................................................... 41
SyncOnStartUp .............................................................................. 41
SystemMeasure ............................................................................. 41
TemplateDatabaseFile ................................................................... 41
ToolTipSetting ................................................................................ 41
TopWorksSetting ........................................................................... 42
UseObjectsFromXrefs ................................................................... 42
WeldDotSize .................................................................................. 42
WeldGapToDB ............................................................................... 42
29

Drawing Prototype
Default value: English/Inch
Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric
Enables you to select a drawing environment type:
Metric/Metric - Uses the Metric dimensions with Metric pipe sizes.
English/Inch - Uses the Imperial dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.
Metric/Inch - Uses the Metric dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.
AlphaSizeControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10
Controls the number of decimal places used in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to zero places
no decimals in Alpha Size. Setting the variable to a value from 1 to 9 places 1 to 9 decimal
places in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to 10 suppresses trailing zeros in Alpha Size.
Example with a value of 0:
For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4 1/2" or 6" would be 6"
For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60
For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.500" or 6" would be 6.000"
For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50.000 or 60.3 would be 60.300
For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.5" or 6" would be 6"
For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60.3
If you want decimals to display in Alpha Size in Imperial or Metric, the recommended
setting is 10.
AuditDataOnStartup
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1
Controls when CADWorx checks components for removed XDATA when opening a drawing.
0 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned off.
1 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned on.
Show Removed XDATA
Command line: CWSHOWNOXD
Highlights components where XDATA has been removed.
1. Type CWSHOWNOXD on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the component that you want to change, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2.
The components with XDATA removed highlight in the drawing.
30

Restore XDATA
Command line: CWADDXD
Restores removed XDATA from a selected specification to a CADWorx component.
1. Type CWADDXD on the command line, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2.
The XDATA is added to the component(s).
To restore the xdata of a component, you must use the original specification from that
component.
AutoDimensionBox
Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Yes
Controls boxes around rolling offset automatic dimensions when using Automatic
to Yes, a box is drawn for the rolling offset.
For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).
. When set
BomBoltControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Specifies bolt placement in the Plant ISOGEN bill of material schedules.
0 - Places the quantity for a set in the pre-CADWorx 2002 format, such as:
QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = (8) Studs with nuts
1 - Places the quantity for total bolts, and strips the set number from the long description,
such as:
QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = Studs with nuts
2 - Places the quantity for a set, the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the
bolt diameter to the long description, such as:
QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = (8) 3/4" Studs with nuts.
3 - Places the quantity for total bolts, strips the set number from the long description, places
the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long
description, such as:
QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = 3/4" Studs with nuts
When this option is set to 1 or 3, the long description of the bolt must contain the number
of bolts in the set enclosed by parenthesis. The software uses the value in parenthesis as the
new quantity. The number is then automatically removed from the long description when
displayed in the material list.
31

BomScheduleDirection
Default value: Yes
Allowed values: No or Yes
Specifies the direction of the bill of materials schedule.
No - Places the bill of materials schedule in the upward direction, with the column headings
at the bottom.
Yes - Places the bill of materials schedule in the downward direction, with the column
headings at the top.
BomScheduleSpacing
Default value: 0.25
Allowed values: Positive real
Controls the spacing on the bill of material schedule.
BomTagGridFactor
Default value: 1.0
Controls the bill of material tag grid density on the drawing.
When BomTagOptimize (on page 32) is set to 2, set this variable to 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0.
BomTagOptimize
Default value: 2
Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2
Specifies the tagging algorithm used for the bill of material.
0 - The tagging algorithm is off.
1 - The algorithm is on, but does not stack any tags.
2 - The algorithm is on. Flange, bolt, and gasket tags are stacked.
BomTagRadiusFactor
Default value: 1.25
Controls the radius of tag bubbles. Bubbles are sized using this factor multiplied by the
AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE.
BomTagSpacingFactor
Default value: 1.25
Controls how far bill of materials bubbles are spaced from the model or components within the
drawing.
32

BoltRoundControl
Default value: 0
Specifies the rounding for bolt length calculations.
0 - No rounding is performed.
1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
CADWorxMaterial
Default value: No
Controls CADWorx material generation when using System In
. For more information, see
System In (on page 174).
No - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the material types in
CAESAR II. The CADWorx component name is combined with the CAESAR II material type.
Yes - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the specifications.
Material types from CAESAR II are ignored.
The component name is defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Prgm.tbl file.
CAESARMaterial
Default value: 0
Controls CAESAR II material generation when using System Out
. For more information, see
System Out (on page 152).
0 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the pipe
material defined in Spec Editor
. This does not apply if the component was originally
created in CAESAR II.
1 - Provides basic material types in CAESAR II (1-17) corresponding to the component
material long description in the specification.
2 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the actual
component material long description in the specification.
When using CAESAR II version 3.23, only option 1 can be used.
CAESARMemory
Default value: 12.0
Specifies the amount of computer RAM used when importing a large CAESAR II input model.
This variable is not required, but is helpful if the import is failing. The value is multiplied by
megabytes.
CAESARTolerance
Default value: 0.001
Specifies the tolerance for items that are not transferring correctly to CAESAR II. For example,
hangers placed on a skewed line sometimes fail and require a larger tolerance factor.
33

CAESARVersion
Default value: 5.20
Allowed values: 5.20 or 2011
Specifies the format of the CAESAR II .c2 input file created by CADWorx. The value should
match the version of CAESAR II that you are using.
DataBaseCodesISOGEN
Default value: No
Specifies how CADWorx ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.
No - The DataBaseCodes system is not used. CADWorx Plant creates generic item code
combinations for each run of ISOGEN, starting at 1 for each run. Components with identical
long annotation and specification file names are given the same item-code combination.
Yes - ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.
If this option is set to Yes and a valid DataBaseCodes system is not established, bill
of material generation within ISOGEN is not correct.
DimensionsExcludedSlope
Default value: 10.0
Specifies the minimum percentage slope (rise/run) for automatic dimensioning of the vertical leg
of sloped pipe when using Automatic
. If the pipe slope is under the specified value, then the
vertical leg dimension and the associated hatched graphics for the rise are not placed. The
horizontal dimension is still placed.
For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).
DimensionsExistingISOGEN
Default value: 0
Controls ISOGEN isometric representation of existing components.
0 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are dimensioned.
1 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are not dimensioned.
2 - Existing components are exported with solid lines and are dimensioned.
Individual ISOGEN dimension settings override this setting. For more information, see
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64).
ElbowCenterLine
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Controls square elbow centerlines on elbow-type components. When set to 1, an additional
square centerline is drawn without drawing square elbow graphics. These lines appear in 2D
double line and Isometric modes only.
You can also control this variable by setting the Elbow Centerline in CADWorx Plant
menu: Utilities > Drawing Control > Elbow Centerline.
34

FittingWidth
Default value: 1.0
Specifies the appearance of all flanged, socket welded, and threaded fittings. When set to 1.0,
the software draws fitting hubs or flange ODs at 100% of the width specified in their data file.
This variable is useful at a value of 0.7 when drawing socket weld and threaded type hub fittings
where the hubs overlap.
HVACLibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\HVAC
Allowed values: Valid directory name
Defines the location of the data files folder used for HVAC components.
ISOGENDefaultStyle
Default value: <none>
Allowed values: Full path to an Isogen.fls file
Specifies the ISOGEN style used by ISOGEN Out
and ISOGEN Batch
.
For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104) and ISOGEN Batch (on page 106).
When this variable is defined, ISOGEN Out
Style dialog box.
does not display the Select ISOGEN
LanguageFile
Default value: English.dic
Allowed values: A valid and properly formatted language file
Specifies the language of all Plant dialog boxes and prompts. The specified file must be present
in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder for proper operation of Plant.
LayerByLineNumber
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4
Specifies the layers for component placement.
0
a. Solid:
i. the layer name of the solid is based on PRJ layer entry.
ii. "_" is placed in front of the layer name: For example: 150 spec is on layer _150.
iii. The color of the solid is set according to the table below:
Component level
color PRJ
Spec level color

PRJ
Spec layer color in

model DWG file
Entity Color Set to By

Layer
Same Color
Same Color
Same Color
Entity Color Set to

component level PRJ
Same Color
Same Color
Different Color
Entity Color Set to By

Layer
Same Color
Different Color
Same Color
Entity Color Set to

component level PRJ
Same Color
Different Color
Different Color
35
36
b. Center line
i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration
Layers > Cl setting.
ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl
setting.
iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers >
Cl setting.
iv. Any changes to Setup > Layers > Centerline Settings changes the existing
centerlines in the DWG file.
1
a. Solid
i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer
of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.
b. Centerline: Same implementation as Solid.
2
a. Solid:
i. The layer name of the solid is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing
solid in the DWG file.
b. Centerline:
i. he layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers
> Cl setting.
setting.
Cl setting.
centerline in the DWG File.
3
a. Solid
i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid and center line has the same implementation for solid color as
LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in the table above.
iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer
of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.
b. Centerline: Same implementation as the Solid.
4
a. Solid:
i. The layer name for solid is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid has the same implementation for solid color as
LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in table above.
iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
solid in the DWG file.
b. Centerline:
i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration
Layers > Cl setting.
setting.
Cl setting.
centerline in the DWG file.
LibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant
Allowed values: Valid folder name
Defines the location of the component data files folder used with a specification. Each
component type has a separate sub-folder. For more information, see Specification and Data
Files (on page 511).
This folder can be set as read-only.
LineNumberSystem
Default value: 1
Allowed values: 0 (off), 1 (on), or 2 (static)
Specifies the line number system.
0 - Line numbers are manually entered.
1 - Size, spec, and count number are used for the line number
2 - Count number is used for the line number.
37

PipeDescriptionCat
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0 through 6
Specifies the addition of end types to the long description and DataBaseCodes variable for:
Small-bore threaded or socket-welded pipe when using Thrd/SW Pipe
. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 455).
Nipple components when using Nipple
. For more information, see Nipple (on page 456).
Small-bore pipe that is broken by an inserted component when using Router

. For more
information, see Router (on page 191).
The following end descriptions are provided:
BBE - Bevel x bevel
BOE-TOE - Bevel x threaded
BOE-POE - Bevel x plain
PBE - Plain x plain
POE-TOE - Plain x threaded
TBE - Threaded x threaded
0 - End types are not added to any components.
1 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe and nipples.
2 - End types are added to long descriptions for pipe and nipples.
3 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe only.
4 - End types are added to long descriptions for pipe only.
5 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for nipple only.
6 - End types are added to long descriptions for nipples only.
This setting works in conjunction with Apply Pipe End Prep Rule. Both must be set to
display, (Automatic for Apply Pipe End Prep Rule and 1 through 6 for PipeDescriptionCat) or
the PipeDescriptionCat does not display on the Long annotation of the Component Edit
dialog box. For more information, see Apply Pipe End Prep Rule (on page 49).
PipeSupportDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\PipeSupport
Allowed values: Valid directory name
Defines the location of the pipe support parametric data files used with the current configuration
settings.
PipeSupportSetting
Default value: 1
Specifies the layer for pipe support component placement.
0 - The pipe support is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
1 - The pipe support is placed on the same layer as the connecting pipe or elbow
component.
2 - The pipe support is placed on a new layer. The layer name is derived by appending the
component layer name and the pipe support layer name. For example, if the pipe solid is on
layer _150, and the pipe support layer name is SUPT, then the pipe support is on new layer
_150SUPT.
38

SaveLastProfileUsed
Default value: No
Specifies whether CADWorx saves the last profile used on exit.
When a drawing file is double-clicked in Windows Explorer, or if AutoCAD is started using an
icon without specifying any profile, AutoCAD always loads the last profile used.
No - Prevents CADWorx from saving the last profile used.
Yes - Allows CADWorx to save the last profile used.
SingleLineWidth
Default value: 0.02
Specifies the default width for a single line pipe.
SpecificationDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec
Allowed values: Valid folder
Provides the location of the specifications folder.
SpecificationDefaultProject
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec
Allowed values: Valid folder
Specifies the spec default project file name.
This is the data file where all the specification information for all components is stored. This file
can be opened using the Spec Editor. When modeling the information is accessed using this file
to create the components. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).
SpecSizeOverride
Default value: Yes
Controls the ability to override component specification and size. If override is turned off, you are
not able to draw out of spec or out of size.
Yes - Overrides the specification and size limits.
No - Limits drawing to values within specification and size limits.
SteelCopeBoltDistance
Default value: 0.5 (Imperial) 15 (Metric)
Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the bolted method of Cope
. For more information, see Cope (on page 280).
39

SteelCopeWeldDistance
Default value: 0.0
Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the welded method of Cope
. For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 280).
SteelLibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_I ([Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_M for metric)
Allowed values: Valid folder name
Locates the data file used for drawing Steel. The data files can be located anywhere on the
computer, local network, or wide area network.
SteelNeutralAxis
Default value: 0
Specifies the location of centerlines for steel channels and angles.
0 - The centerline is drawn at the X--column value specified in the channel or angle data
files.
1 - The centerline is drawn at the midpoint of the flange.
2 - The centerline is drawn on the inside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles
are coped with other members.
3 - The centerline is drawn on the outside of the flange. Use this value if channels and
angles are mitered with other members.
SteelPartNumberFile
Default value: SamplePartNumbers.dat
Allowed values: Valid and properly formatted part number file
Specifies the file containing part numbers that can be automatically entered for a steel member
component. When a steel member is drawn, the software searches the data file for a matching
member type and member name. If found, the software then retrieves the part number and
saves it with the member component.
SteelRoundControl
Default value: 0
Specifies the rounding of values read from the steel data files.
0 - No rounding is performed.
1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on
page 41).
2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit
(on page 41).
3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in
SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).
40

SteelRoundUnit
Default value: 0.125
Specifies the rounding multiple of values read from the steel data files. This variable is used with
SteelRoundControl (on page 40).
SteelToolTipSetting
Default value: 4235
Allowed values: Positive integer
Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a steel component. Click
the ellipsis in the value box next to SteelToolTipSetting to open the Tool Tip Data Selection
dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then
displayed for those settings.
SyncOnStartUp
Default value: 1
Controls the synchronize option on opening a drawing with an external database:
0 - Turns off the synchronize option when a drawing is loaded into AutoCAD.
1 - Asks if the software should synchronize the drawing with the external database.
2 - Synchronizes the drawing with the external database without prompting.
When you click Synchronize
without any prompts.
, values 0 and 1 provide a prompt. Value 2 synchronizes
SystemMeasure
Default value: English/Inch
Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric
Specifies the unit system:
Metric/Metric - Uses the metric system with metric input.
English/Inch - Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input.
Metric/Inch - Uses the metric system with nominal inch input.
TemplateDatabaseFile
Default value: Pipe.mdb
Allowed values: Valid Microsoft Access database file name
Specifies the database file that is used with a bill of material.
ToolTipSetting
Default value: 8405
Allowed values: Positive integer
Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a component. Click the
ellipsis next to ToolTipSetting in Configuration Settings to open the Tool Tip Data Selection
dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then
displayed for those settings.
41

TopWorksSetting
Default value: 1
Allowed values: 0 through 4
Specifies the layers for top works component placement.
0 - Top works are not added to the valve even if a top works file is set in the specification
file.
1 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is combined with the valve solid to
create one solid.
2 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid
and center line. The top works solid is placed on the same layer as the valve solid.
and center line. The top works solid is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer
settings.
and center line. The top works solid id placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer
settings. The layer name is derived by appending the valve layer name and the top works
layer name. For example, when the valve is on layer _150, and the top works layer name is
TOP, the top works solid is on layer _150TOP.
UseObjectsFromXrefs
Default value: Yes
Allows objects from Xrefs (external references) to be used during the selection process.
No - Objects from Xrefs are not used.
Yes - Objects from Xrefs are used for the current command.
WeldDotSize
Default value: 1.0
Specifies the default weld dot size on single-line, butt-welded piping components.
WeldGapToDB
Default value: Yes
Sets automatic weld gaps to database on or off.
Yes - Weld gaps are shown in the Bill of Material schedule.
No - Weld gaps are not shown in the Bill of Material schedule
42
Set Specification and Size

> Specification / Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Main Size

Setting toolbar: Main Size
Setting toolbar: Specification
Command line: SETSIZE, SETSPEC
Displays the Set Specification and Size dialog box in which you specify a .spc drawing
specification file, a main size and a reduction size.
Browse - Enables you to open the project specification needed for your drawing.
Reload File - Reloads the project (.prj) selected for any changes made in the specification
editor. Alternatively, type RELOADPROJECTFILE on the command line and press ENTER.
M - Sets the selected row as the main size.
R - Sets the selected row as the reduction size.
OK - Accepts the selected main and reduction sizes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Cancels the operation.
CADWorx Plant specifications are delivered to the [Product Folder]\<sSubProduct>\Spec

folder. CADWorx P&ID also provides specifications delivered to the [Product
Folder]\P&ID\Spec folder. If Plant and P&ID are used together, you should select
specifications from a single folder. For more information, see SpecificationDirectory (on page
39).
The list of available sizes is controlled by [Product Folder]\Plant\System\SetSize.Tbl
(English/inches), SetSizeA.tbl (Metric/inches), and SetSizeM.tbl (Metric/mm).
Set Specification & Size Dialog Box

1. Click Setup
> Specification / Size. Alternatively, click Main Size
or type SETSPEC
or SETSIZE, and press ENTER.
The Set Specification & Size dialog box displays.
2. Click Browse.
The Open window displays.
3. Navigate to the proper specification, and click Open.
The Specification list populates.
4. Select a specification from the list. This must be done before sizes can be selected.
The Main / Reduction size populates.
5. Select a main size and a reduction size from the list. They can be selected in any order.
6. Click OK.
The specification and main and reduction sizes are set.
43
Configuration Layers
Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default
layers are provided. You can add and delete layers.
The default layers are mandatory for use with Plant and cannot be deleted. See the tables
below.
Layer changes made in this dialog box affect the current drawing session similar to the
AutoCAD LAYER command.
The commands in this dialog box are inactive if the configuration settings permission is set
to read-only.
Layer Name - Specifies the layer name. The layer name can be anything that is allowed by
AutoCAD. Wild card characters and spaces are not allowed. Click Update to change the name.
New - Adds a new layer with a default name. New layers are created when the drawing is
initialized with Plant. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column.
Delete - Removes the selected layer from the list. You cannot delete default layers. Access this
option by right-clicking in the layer name column.
Linetype - Specifies the line type for the selected layer. Select a value in the Select Linetype
dialog box.
Line types are defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Cfm.lin and [AutoCAD
Product Folder]\UserDataCache\Support\acad.lin files.
Color - Displays the Select Color dialog box for selecting the color of the layer.
CADWorx Plant, Plant, PV Fabricator Layers
44
Layer#
Default Name
Layer is used for
Layer1
System
Non-graphical components
Layer2
Border
Border drawing
Layer3
BOM
BOM graphics
Layer4
Cl
Centerline of piping components
Layer5
Dim1
Dimensions
Layer6
Dim2
Dimensions
Layer7
Equip
Plant components
Layer8
Exist
Existing components
Layer9
Graph
Graphics annotations (Arrows, Section, Plan, Detail Labels)
Layer10
Steel
Steel components
Layer11
Text
Text annotations
Layer12
Viewl
Viewports
Layer13
Cl_Steel
Centerline of steel components
Layer14
HVAC
HVAC components
Layer15
Cl_HVAC
Centerline of HVAC components

Layer#
Default Name
Layer is used for
Layer16
TopWorks
Valve TopWorks solid
Layer17
Clash
Clash entity
Layer18
Supports
Pipe Support
Layer19
CADWorx1
Future use
Layer20
CADWorx2
Future use
Layer21 to (User Defined)

Layer100
(User Defined)
CADWorx P&ID Layers

Layer#
Default Name
Layer is used for
Layer1
System
Non-graphical components
Layer2
Border
Border drawing
Layer3
Major-1
Major Process Lines 1
Layer4
Major-2
Major Process Lines 2
Layer5
Minor-1
Minor Process Lines 1
Layer6
Minor-2
Minor Process Lines 2
Layer7
Inst-1
Instrument Lines 1
Layer8
Inst-2
Instrument Lines 2
Layer9
Elec1
Electrical Lines 1
Layer10
Elec-2
Electrical Lines 2
Layer11
Equip
Plant
Layer12
Text
Text
Layer13
Graph
Graphics
Layer14
Exist
Existing
Layer15 to (User Defined)

Layer100
(User Defined)
If the Cl and Cl_Steel layers are frozen or turned off, some CADWorx commands might
not function because data is stored on the centerline that is on these layers.
45
Piping Rules
Sets the piping rules for the drawing. These rules govern how the drawing is affected for each
piece of pipe or component drawn. The options you select affect the responses you receive from
the system.
Topics
Apply Size Rule ............................................................................. 46
Apply Specification Rule ................................................................ 46
Apply End Type Rule ..................................................................... 47
Apply Pipe Length Rule ................................................................. 47
Apply Weld Insertion Rule ............................................................. 47
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule .......................................................... 47
Apply Bolt Insertion Rule ............................................................... 47
Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule ........................................................... 48
Apply Pipe Healing Rule ................................................................ 48
Apply Branch Table Rule ............................................................... 48
Apply Flange Insertion Rule........................................................... 48
Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule ................................................... 48
Apply Pipe End Prep Rule ............................................................. 49
Center Line .................................................................................... 49
Apply Auto Coupling Rule .............................................................. 49
Apply Line Number Rule ................................................................ 50
Apply Change Data Rule ............................................................... 51
Apply Size Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options
Sets the system to check the size of components when components are inserted.
No - Does not check the size of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the size of components when components are inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component
being connected to.
Apply Specification Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the specification of components when components are inserted.
No - Does not check the specification of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the specification of components when components are inserted.
being connected to.
46
Apply End Type Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the connection between two components.
No - Does not check the connection of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the connection of components when components are inserted.
being connected to.
Apply Pipe Length Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the pipe length when pipe is inserted.
No - Does not check the pipe length of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the pipe length of components when components are inserted.
being connected to.
Apply Weld Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic - Buttweld Only, Automatic - Socket Weld Only, Automatic Buttweld and Socket Weld
Specifies auto insert of weld gap to components.
No - Does not insert weld gaps.
Automatic - Buttweld Only - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld connections only.
Automatic - Socket Weld Only - Inserts weld gaps on socket weld connections only.
Automatic - Buttweld and Socket Weld - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld and socket weld
connections.
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No or Automatic
Inserts a gasket to a component automatically when needed.
No - Does not insert gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.
Automatic - Inserts gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.
Apply Bolt Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Inserts bolts to flanges automatically.
No - Does not insert bolts automatically to valves or flanges.
Automatic - Inserts bolts automatically to valves or flanges.
47
Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule

Default value: No
Places trimmed buttweld elbows in the drawing when using ROUTE.
No - Does not allow for trimmed buttweld elbows.
Automatic - Router allows for trimmed buttweld elbows.
Apply Pipe Healing Rule

Default value: No
Heals buttweld pipe when in-line components are erased.
No - Does not heal buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased.
Automatic - Heals buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased..
Apply Branch Table Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the branch table when branch components are inserted.
No - Does not check the branch table.
Automatic - Checks the branch table when branch components are inserted.
Apply Flange Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic - Use Spec Setting, Automatic - Flange Socket Weld, Automatic
- Flange Threaded, Automatic - Long Weld Neck, Automatic - Flange Weld Neck, Automatic Flange Slip On, Show Options
Controls the rule of automatically inserting a flange. Sets the system for automatic type and
insertion of flanges.
No - Does not allow for automatic insertion of a flange.
Automatic - Inserts selected flange type automatically.
being connected to.
Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule

Default value: Automatic - 2 Holes
Allowed values: Automatic - 1 Hole, Automatic - 2 Holes, Show Options - Specify Input Angle
Specifies the bolt hole orientation of a flange.
48
Apply Pipe End Prep Rule

Default value: No
Sets the end preparation of connections in conjunction with PipeDescriptionCat. The
description displays in the Long annotation of the Component Edit dialog box.
No - Does not set the end prep of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Sets the pipe end prep of components when components are inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts to set or not set the pipe end prep.
The PipeDescriptionCat must be set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule
must be set to Automatic for the pipe end preparation descriptions to appear.
If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
Automatic the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.
If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
No the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.
If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
Show Options you are prompted to set the pipe end preparation. Selecting No does not set
the pipe end preparation and does not display a description. This is the case even with the
PipeDescriptionCat set to 1 through 6. Selecting Yes displays the description unless the
PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0.
For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat (on page 38).
Center Line
Default value: On
Allowed values: On, Off
Indicates whether the centerline of the components displays.
Apply Auto Coupling Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only, Automatic - All Connections, Show Options
Sets the system to insert a coupling when routing components.
No - Does not add a coupling when routing components.
Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only - Adds a coupling when routing components with socket weld or
threaded piping, when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must set the Apply Pipe
Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.
Automatic - All Connections - Adds a coupling at all connections while routing.
Show Options - Displays option prompts, when routing, to inset a coupling. This happens when
using socket weld or threaded piping or when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must
set the Apply Pipe Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.
49
Apply Line Number Rule

Default value: Always Inherit
Allowed values: Always Inherit, Show Options
Sets the system to check the line number of in-line components when a component is inserted
based on the setting in line number Setup and according to the table below.
Always Inherit - Automatically inherits the line number of in-line components when a
component is inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts for inheriting the line number on in-line components
when components are inserted.
Line Number System Setup Apply Line Number Rule Setting Effect
System Off
System On (Dynamic
Size/Spec)
Always Inherit
No Line Number Rule is applied
Show Options
No Line Number Rule is applied
Always Inherit
Inherit all header/parent line

number parameters except the
dynamic one such as Size and
Spec
Show Options
Show 3 different options:
System On (Static Size

/Spec)
1. Exact copy of parent line

number.
2. Dynamic parent line
number (the same parent line
number except for the size
and spec).
3. Current line number setup
as listed in the Line Number
setup.
Always Inherit
Inherit exact copy of

header/parent line number
Show Options
Show 2 options:
1. Exact copy of
header/parent line number.
2. Current line number as
shown in the Line Number
setup.
For more information about Line Number System setup, see Line Numbering System Dialog
Box (on page 124).
50
Apply Change Data Rule

Default value: Automatic
Allowed values: Automatic, Show setting
Sets the system for items that do not update when using Change Size, Change Spec, or
automatic updating of new data.
Automatic - Automatically updates the component with the information from the specification.
Show setting - Updates only the items not selected in the Apply Change Data Rule dialog
box. Show setting only displays in the Apply Change Data Rule box after selecting the items
from the Apply Change Data Rule dialog box. For more information, see Apply Change Data
Rule Dialog Box (on page 51).
Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box

Enables you to select the items that you want to update from the specification when using
Change Spec, Change Size, or automatic updating of new data.
Automatic - Automatically updates all new data when using one of the above options.
Select data items that will NOT update with Change Size/Spec
Alpha size - Turns the alpha size update off.
Short Description - Turns the short description update off.
Tag - Turns the tag update off.
Long description - Turns the long description update off.
Database Codes - Turns the database codes update off.
Change the Data Rule update

1. Select the Apply Change Data Rule ellipsis.
2. Clear Automatic.
3. Select the items that you do not want updated, and then click OK.
Convert Legacy Drawing

Default value: Off
Allowed values: Off, Automatic, Show Options
Enables you to convert a 2012 drawing to 2013 components.
Convert Mode - Sets the software to recognize whether the drawing is a legacy drawing and
convert it. There are three options:
Off - Indicates the software does not convert the legacy drawing when it is opened.
Automatic - Specifies that the software automatically converts the drawing to 2013
components when you open the drawing.
Show Options - Indicates that the software prompts you to convert the drawing to 2013
components when you open the drawing.
Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the
2012 components when a conversion is completed.
Yes - Indicates the software pulls data from the project file during the conversion.
No - Indicates the software pulls data from the legacy component during conversion.
Refresh all open palettes to update contents after running the
CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command.
51
CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box

> Convert Legacy Drawing and then set
Convert Mode to Show Options
Command line: CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS
Converts the components of a legacy drawing to 2013 components.
Available specifications in project - Specifies if there are any available specifications in the
selected project for conversion.
Legacy specification used in model - Specifies the specifications that the software uses in the
legacy model.
Match - Matches the selected specification in Available specifications in project to the
specification listed in Legacy specification used in model.
Auto Match - Automatically matches the specification used in the legacy model without
selecting a specification from the Available specifications in project box.
Backup current drawing - Creates a backup of the legacy drawing in the folder where the
legacy drawing resides.
Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the
legacy components when a conversion is completed. When Use new spec data is selected,
data is pulled from the selected specification in Current Project.
Current Project - Specifies the current project from which the software converts the legacy
drawings.
Browse - Enables you to select a current project.
OK - Accepts the settings and converts the model.
Cancel - Cancels the legacy conversion.
Help - Accesses the online help file.
Convert Legacy using Automatic option
Set Convert Mode to Automatic.

The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components when a legacy drawing is
opened.
Convert Legacy using Show Options option

1. Set Convert Mode to Show Options. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing
(on page 51).
The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays.
2. Click Browse.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select a PRJ file, and click Open.
The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box.
4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box.
5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match.
Clicking Auto Match automatically selects the matching specification for the drawing
based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you want to use a different
specification for the 2013 drawing, such as 300, you must click Match instead of Auto
Match.
52

6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option.
OR
Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created.
7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default
option.
OR
Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing.
8. Click OK.
The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.
Convert Legacy using the CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command

1. Type CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS on the command line, and press ENTER.
The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays.
2. Click Browse.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select a .prj file, and click Open.
The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box.
4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box.
5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match.
Clicking Auto Match indicates that the software automatically selects the matching
specification for the drawing based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you
want to use a different specification for the 2013 drawing, such as 300, you must click
Match instead of Auto Match.
6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option.
OR
Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created.
7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default
option.
OR
Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing.
8. Click OK.
The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.
If you notice that a component does not convert to a 2013 component then the component
may not be listed in the 2013 specification that you have chosen.
The software alerts you with a message if you do not have any legacy data in the drawing.
You must convert an inch drawing to an inch specification and a metric drawing to a metric
specification.
53
Find Legacy Components Dialog Box

Command line: REVIEWLEGCAYCOMPONENTS
Enables you to search the drawing for legacy components and display the information based on
the Search Options.
Search Options
Tag - Finds the legacy components based on the tag. Click in the Tag box to display
components filtered by tag in the Components filtered by: Tag box. You can type data in this
box to filter for specific tags.
Code - Finds the legacy components based on the code. Click in the Code box to display
components filtered by code in the Components filtered by: Code box. You can type data in
this box to filter for specific codes.
Line number - Finds the legacy components based on the line number. Click in the Line
Number box to display components filtered by line number in the Components filtered by:
Line number box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific line numbers.
Short annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the short annotation. Click in the
Short annotation box to display components filtered by short annotation in the Components
filtered by: Short annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific short
annotations.
Long annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the long annotation. Click in the
Long annotation box to display components filtered by long annotation in the Components
filtered by: Long annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific long
annotations.
Components filtered by: <Search Options type> - Displays the findings of the Search
Options. When the software detects a legacy component the information based on the search
option selected, displays in the box. The heading of the Components filtered by box is
dynamic and changes depending on the Search Options item you have selected. The heading
also displays the number of records for each item selected. Selecting a record displays a red
arrow indication the component containing the selected information in the drawing.
OK - Closes the Find Legacy Components dialog box.
54

Cancel - Cancels the Find Legacy Components dialog box.
View Log File - Displays a log file of the conversions you made when using
CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS.
Specification and Size

Sets the specification and size using the Set Specification and Size dialog box. For more
Optional Items
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Optional Items
Setting toolbar: Specification Option Toggle
Plant menu: Accessory > Specifications > Optional Items
Command line: SPECOPTION
Places a component on the drawing when the component type in the specification has an
optional component (such as when a 300 lb. orifice flange is in the 150 lb. specification).
Click the command to toggle between two methods:
1. The command line message is:
All components will be dialoged...
When a component type is selected, all components of that component type appear in the
Optional component dialog box. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog
Box (on page 55).
2. The command line message is:
Specification dialog turned off...
When a component type is selected, the default component is selected for placement on the
drawing. The Optional component dialog box does not appear unless the component size
is out of the specification range or the component is not allowed by the specification. You
can then select a component in the range. For more information, see Optional Component
Optional Component Dialog Box

Specifies components for placement. Status, start size, end size, tag, long description, and short
description are displayed for each component.
OK - Places the selected component on the drawing.
Default - Changes the selected component to the default component.
Using SpecSizeOverride
When the SpecSizeOverride (on page 39) variable is off, sizes are restricted to the specification
range. If the selected size is not within the range, OK and Default are not available.
If SpecSizeOverride is on, the dialog box appears if the component size is not in the range. You
can then select the needed component even when it is out of range.
55

The following table summarizes the dialog box behavior.
Component in
specification?
Size in
specification?
Dialog box
appears?
SpecSizeOverride
variable status
Dialog box
behavior
Yes
Yes
No
Off = 0
Normal operation.
Yes
No
No
Off = 0
Error message.
Yes
No
No
On = 1
Error message, but you can

override.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Off = 0
Dialog box shows all

components including
optional components, but
does not allow override.
Yes
No
Yes
Off = 0

components but OK is not
available for components
not in size range.
Yes
No
Yes
On = 1

components and allows
override.
No
n/a
No
Off = 0
Error message.
You can use the Spec Editor

to change components to optional components. For
more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).
Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size
Setting toolbar: Size
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size
Command line: COMP2SIZE
Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component with the needed sizes.
Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally
reverse the main and reduction sizes.
Spec
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Spec
Setting toolbar: Spec
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Spec
Command line: COMP2SPEC
Specifies the current specification by selecting a component using the needed specification.
56
Size-Spec
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size-Spec
Setting toolbar: Size-Spec
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size-Spec
Command line: COMP2SIZESPEC
Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component with the
needed values. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You
can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.
All
Setting toolbar: All
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > All
Command line: COMP2ALL
Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and line number by selecting a component
with the needed values.
This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 2. This is the
same as having the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System
dialog box selected. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page
124).
Editor
Creates, views, and modifies specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page
77).
Change Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Size
Command Line: CHANGESIZE
Changes the size of the selected components based on available sizes. Sizes are based on the
specification that you choose when initially setting up the drawing. This command has two
functions Automatic or Manual.
Automatic - Automatically changes the entire component to the chosen size.
The Change Size command only changes the size of the line until it reaches a
reducer. The software provides two options to replace a reducer to match the size change. The
pipeline on the other side of the reducer maintains its size. The only way to change the size of
the pipeline on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself.
Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen size.
When using the manual option, the software forces you to select reducers for
adjacent components that are not the same size. The manual option does not stop size changes
at any point based on another component. However, unless the line on the other side of a
reducer is selected it is not changed.
57

Large - Changes the large side of the component and anything attached to that side.
Small - Changes the small side of the component and anything attached to that side.
Both - Changes both sides of the component and anything attached to those sides.
Change current component - Changes the component to match the size change.
add Reducing component - Displays a list of reducing components.
caNcel - Does not change the size and cancels out.
What do you want to do?
Change the size automatically (on page 58)

Change the size manually (on page 58)
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically (on page 59)
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually (on page 59)
Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically (on page 60)
Change the size automatically

1. Click Change Size
. Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Press ENTER for automatic.
3. Select a component.
4. Select a size from the list that appears.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish.
Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of
a component.
The entire drawing changes its size.
Change the size manually

When using the manual option, you must select similar components with like sizes, or the
process does not work.
ENTER.
2. Type M for manual.
3. Select the components whose size you want to change, and press ENTER when finished.
58

4. Select a size from the list that appears.
The next prompt only displays if you have selected pipe lines that do not connect to
each other but have a component in-between. If you do not receive the following prompt
skip step 6 and continue.
5. Select the reducers as needed.

The specific components change size and add the reducers if needed.
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically

ENTER.
3. Select a reducer.
4. Type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and press ENTER.
5. Select a size from the list that displays. This is based on the choice you make in step 4.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
a component.
The entire drawing changes its size.
If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the
pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the
component. If you do not change the component the process fails.
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually

Use this option when you want to change the size of more than one reducer and the pipe
lines to multiple sizes.
ENTER.
3. Select one or more reducers and press ENTER.
If you select more then one you might not be prompted for the sides of the reducer.
This depends on the location of the chosen reducers.
4. If applicable, type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and then press ENTER.
59

5. Select a size from the list. This list continues to show up for as many components as you
selected.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
a component.
The selected components change size.
If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the
pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the
component. If you do not change the component the process fails.
Change the size of a model with branch connections

automatically
ENTER.
3. Select a component.
4. Select a size from the list that displays.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
5. Select all the branches in the model.
If you do not select all the branches the software prompts you to change the
component. If you select No, the process fails. You may also be prompted if the size does
not exist.
6. Select a component, or press ENTER to finish.
7. If prompted to fix the pipe by BOP, TOP, or Current, type an option, and press ENTER.
a component.
The selected system changes size.
Change Specification
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Spec
Command Line: CHANGESPEC
Changes the specification of the selected components. This command is based on two modes
either Automatic or Manual.
Automatic - Changes all the components on the selected line to the chosen specification
automatically.
The Change Specification command only changes the specification assigned to
the system until it reaches a reducer. The software changes the assigned specification of the
reducer, but the pipeline on the other side of the reducer keeps its original specification. The
only way to change the pipe on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself. Depending
60

on the arrangement, this action may only change the specification of the components adjacent
to the reducer but not the specification of the entire model.
Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen specification.
Change the specification automatically (on page 61)

Change the specification manually (on page 61)
Change the specification of a model with branches automatically (on page 61)
Change the specification automatically

1. Click Change Spec
. Alternatively, type CHANGESPEC on the command line, and press
ENTER.
3. Select a pipeline.
4. Select a specification.
a component.
The entire drawing changes its specification.
Change the specification manually

ENTER.
3. Select the components whose specification you want to change, and press ENTER when
finished.
a component.
The specification assigned to the selected components is changed.
Change the specification of a model with branches

automatically
ENTER.
3. Select a pipeline.
If you do not select the branches in step 5, the specification changes only for the
branching components. It does not change for the branch piping.
5. Select the branches.
61

7.
a component.
The specification assignment for the selected system is changed. If there is a reducer in the
system, the new specification assignment only applies up to and including the reducer, not
the pipeline on the other side of the reducer.
Local Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Local Edit
Setting toolbar: Component Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Local Edit
Command line: CEDIT
Modifies the properties of an existing component on the drawing. This command displays the
Component Edit dialog box.
Component Edit Dialog Box

Specifies properties for a component.
Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component.
Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component.
Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component.
Line number - Specifies the line number of the component.
Tag - Specifies a tag for the component.
Code - Specifies a code for the component.
Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component.
Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material.
Length - Specifies a length for the component.
Component type - Displays the type of the component.
Specification - Displays the specification used by the component.
If Setup
is used to create an external database, Synchronize
can be used to
change the specification in the database. For more information, see Setup Live Database (on
page 142) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 146).
Coordinates
World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects
pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such
as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the
components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.
Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing
graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175).
Miscellaneous
Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component
symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is
shown as dotted and dimensioned.
Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress
analysis information or insulation attached.
62

BOM Item Type
Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.
Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.
Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item.
Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item.
The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added
using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup
. For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to
group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132) and BOM Sort
Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 134).
If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit
weld. Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit
welds.
OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box.
ISOGEN - Specifies data for the component in an ISOGEN drawing. Opens the ISOGEN Data
dialog box.
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64)
Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from a component, converting it to generic
AutoCAD geometry.
Many commands in CADWorx use xdata in the components and do not function if the
data is removed.
You can double-click a component to open the Component Edit dialog box.
Modify a component
1. Click Local Edit
.
2. In the drawing, select a component.
The Component Edit dialog box appears.
3. Modify properties as needed.
4. Click OK.
63
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box

Specifies ISOGEN properties for a component.
Symbol Information
Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for the component. For more
information, see SKEY Information.
Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN Identifier used by CADWorx and uses
the value specified in Identifier.
SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see
SKEY Information.
Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN SKEY used by CADWorx and uses the
value specified in SKEY.
64

Message - Specifies the message displayed with the component on the isometric drawing.
Type - Specifies the type of graphic enclosing the message.
Message Types
Type
Graphic
None
No text or graphic
Unboxed
Text only
Square
Pointed
Round
Circle
Triangle
Diamond
Double Circle
Ellipse
Text - Specifies the message text.

Spindle / Flat / Support Direction - Specifies a valve spindle direction, an eccentric reducer flat
direction, or support direction.
Direction - Specifies the direction. Select North, South, East, West, Up, or Down.
Text - Specifies a text message with details on the direction.
ISOGEN option switch 80 (dimension to valve centers) is only available if the valve has a
spindle direction set.
Flow Arrow - Specifies how flow arrows are displayed for valves.
As drawn - Displays the flow arrow in the direction that the pipe was drawn.
Opposite - Displays the flow arrow in the opposite direction.
View - Displays a preview of the flow arrow on the drawing.
ISOGEN option switch 17 controls the display of flow arrows.
65

Miter Pipe Export Options - Specifies how miter pipe is exported to ISOGEN.
Pipe with Welds - Exports each straight pipe run in the component as a linear pipe piece
with mitered ends and welded connections.
Pipe with Welds Example
Type
Graphic
None
No text or graphic
Unboxed
Text only
Square
Pointed
Round
Circle
Triangle
Diamond
Double Circle
Ellipse
66
Bend - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.
Bend with Length - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.
The length of the component is also added to the Long Annotation of the component,
allowing two bends with different lengths to have separate marks in the bill of material.
Bend with Length Example
Other
Spool - Specifies the spool identification. This value overrides the default spool value
created by ISOGEN.
Sketch - Specifies a .dwg detailed sketch to display with the isometric drawing. For more
information on detailed sketches, see the Information Notes,pdf and Detailed Sketches.pdf
files in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.
Dim Status - Specifies the dimensioning of individual components. Select Default,
Dimensioned, Dotted Dimensioned, or Dotted Undimensioned.
Mark - Specifies the mark number for a component.
End Connections and Conditions - Specifies a set of conditions for up to four ends (End 1,
End 2, End 3, and End 4).
Connection Type - Specifies the type of connection on the end
Connection Types
Connection Types
Description
Default Condition
BS
Ball and Socket
Male
BW
Butt Weld
Unspecified
CL
Clamped
Male
CP
Compression
Female
FA
Flared
Male
FL
Flanged
Unspecified
Default
67

Connection Types
Description
Default Condition
GF
Gland
Female
GL
Glued
Female
LC
Liner (Clamped)
Male
LR
Liner (Reducing )
Male
LN
Liner (Nut)
Male
MP
Male Part Hygienic
Male
PF
Push Fit
Female
PL
Plain End
Male
SC
Screwed
Female
SW
Socket Weld
Female
View - Displays a red arrow at the selected end on the drawing.

Male, Female, Unspecified, or None - Specifies the end condition of the selected condition
type. These options are only available when the end condition of the connection type can be
changed. For example, SC, SW, CP, GL, and PF allow either male or female end conditions.
Unspecified is used for welded and flanged end conditions.
Reference Dimensions - Specifies dimension to use as reference for the component.
On - Turns on reference dimensions.
Primary - Defines reference dimensions relative to the primary axes of the model.
Skewed - Defines reference dimension relative to the defined reference points.
Pick points - Allows you to select reference points in the drawing.
View - Displays the reference points in the drawing.
Message - Specifies text for the reference dimensions.
SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the reference dimensions. For more
information, see SKEY Information.
Start Point - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the start point.
Reference Point 1 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the first reference point.
Reference Point 2 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the second reference point.
Global Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Global Edit
Setting toolbar: Global Component Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Global Edit
Command line: GCEDIT
Modifies the properties of multiple components. This command displays the Global CEdit dialog
box.
Global CEdit Dialog Box

Specifies properties for multiple components.
68

Each property initially shows no value. Any value modified for a property is changed for all
selected components. Properties that are not modified are not changed in the selected
components.
Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component.
Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component.
Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component.
Line number - Specifies the line number of the component.
Tag - Specifies a tag for the component.
Code - Specifies a code for the component.
Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component.
Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material.
Coordinates
World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects
pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such
as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the
components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.
Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing
graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175).
Miscellaneous
Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component
symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is
shown as dotted and dimensioned.
Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress
analysis information or insulation attached.
BOM Item Type
Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.
Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.
Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item.
Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item.
OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box.
Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from the selected components, converting
them to generic AutoCAD geometry.
Modify multiple components

1. Click Global Edit
.
2. In the drawing, select two or more components.
The Global CEdit dialog box appears.
3. Define properties as needed.
4. Click OK.
The command line prompt indicates the number of updated components.
69
Mode Convert
Mode convert commands change a piping component from one mode to another mode. The
existing component is deleted and replaced with a component in the new mode.
Many possibilities exist, such as:
2D double line to 3D solids
3D solids to 2D double line
2D single line to 2D double line
2D double line, flat to 2D double line, north
Converting to different planes
Rebuilding an existing component in the same mode or plane
The specification layer name determines the layer to delete and replace. This layer name is
prepended with an underscore, such as _150. Objects on other layers (without an underscore in
their names) are not changed.
You can convert from one plane to another by changing planes and converting the component
mode.
Example
The following tee was drawn once, copied to three other locations, then converted to different
planes.
70

Topics
Convert a component to a different mode ..................................... 71
3D Solids........................................................................................ 71
Convert Isometric ........................................................................... 71
2D Double Line .............................................................................. 71
2D Single Line ............................................................................... 71
Convert Existing ............................................................................. 72
Convert to 3D enhanced ................................................................ 72
Convert from project data .............................................................. 72
CWexplode .................................................................................... 72
Convert a component to a different mode

1. Select 3D Solids
, Convert Isometric
2. Select the piping components to convert.
3. Press ENTER.
, 2D Double Line
, or 2D Single Line
3D Solids
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 3D Solids
Setting toolbar: Solids
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 3D Solids
Command line: CONVERTSOLID
Converts selected components to 3D solid mode.
Convert Isometric
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Convert Isometric
Setting toolbar: Isometric
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > Isometric
Command line: CONVERTISO
Converts selected components to isometric mode.
2D Double Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Double Line
Setting toolbar: Double Line
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Double Line
Command line: CONVERTDOUBLE
Converts selected components to 2D double line mode.
2D Single Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Single Line
Setting toolbar: Single Line
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Single Line
Command line: CONVERTSINGLE
Converts selected components to 2D single line mode.
71
Convert Existing
Command line: CONVERTEXISTING
Stops external data (xdata) from appearing in the bill of material or removes xdata from the
components. After xdata is prevented or removed, the component is moved to the EXIST layer.
You can also execute this command in Global Edit
or Local Edit
information, see Global Edit (on page 68) and Local Edit (on page 62).
. For more
If you use the CONVERTEXISTING command and you select Yes, you cannot change
the components back. To change components in the existing layer, back and forth, you must
select No when using this command.
1. Type CONVERTEXISTING on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select Yes to remove all data from the components.
OR
Select No to not remove all data.
You can also do this in the Global Edit
or Local Edit
3. To convert all objects on the drawings,select All objects.
OR
To convert a specific component, select Components only.
4. Press ENTER to finish.
The components selected are converted.
dialog boxes.
Convert to 3D enhanced
Command line: CONVERTENHANCED
Converts the selected components to 3D enhanced mode.
1. Type CONVERTENHANCED on the command line, and the press ENTER.
2. Select the components you want to convert to 3D enhanced mode, and then press ENTER.
The components convert to 3D enhanced.
Convert from project data

Command line: CONVERTFROMPRJDATA
Converts the selected components to the project data changes made to the specification in the
Spec Editor.
1. Type CONVERTFROMPRJDATA on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select the objects you want to convert from previous data to the new project data, and then
press ENTER.
The project data of the selected components is updated.
CWexplode
Command line: CWEXPLODE
Changes the CADWorx component to an AutoCAD 3D solid with xdata included.
1. Type CWEXPLODE on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the component you want to change, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option.
The components are converted to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata included.
72
Socket Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Socket Weld
Setting toolbar: Socket Weld
Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and
engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification.
You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more
information, see Setup (on page 26).
Threaded
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Threaded
Setting toolbar: Threaded
Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement
properties are based on the threaded section of the specification.
You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more
Settings
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Settings
Setting toolbar: Current Settings
Plant menu: Utility > Settings
Command line: CURRENT
Displays the current drawing settings, such as main and reduction sizes, text and dimension
sizes, line and drawing modes, and specifications. This command displays the Current
Settings dialog box.
Most of these settings are changed using Setup
page 26).
. For more information, see Setup (on
XREF Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Xref Edit
Command line: XCEDIT
Settings toolbar: Xref Edit
Views sizes or information within the component Xref. This command works in a similar fashion
to the CADWorx CEDIT functionality. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62). This
function uses the same dialog box as Local Edit, but it does not allow you to modify any of the
values. If a modification to a component is required from within an Xref, use the AutoCAD
REFEDIT command to open that part of the Xref. Then use the Local Edit command to make
any modifications necessary. After the required modification is completed, close the Xref with
the REFCLOSE command.
73
74
SECTION 3
Palette Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette
Command Name
Command Line
Spec View - Filters the available components based on the SPECVIEW

size and specification settings. For more information, see
Spec View Palette (on page 76).
Line View - Isolates components based on their line
number or their specification. For more information, see
Line View Palette (on page 79).
LINEVIEW
Pipe Support Modeler - Inserts pipe and elbow support

components. For more information, see Support Modeler
Palette (on page 81).
PIPESUPPORTVIEW
Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, INSULATIONVIEW
modify, and remove insulation configurations that can be
applied to CADWorx components. For more information,
see Insulation View Palette (on page 88).
Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of
modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity
View Palette (on page 92).
DISCONTINUITYVIEW
Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all

pipe supports found in the selection or in the entire model.
For more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page
93).
PIPESUPPORTREPORT
P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table PIDVIEW
in a project database. For more information, see P&ID View
Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD CLASHVIEW
3D solids in the current drawing as well as any attached
XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View
Assembly View - Creates an assembly for use in a
drawing. For more information, see Assembly View Palette
(on page 99).
ASSEMBLYVIEW
75
Palette Panel
Spec View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Spec View
Palettes toolbar: Spec View
Plant menu: Palettes > Spec View
Command line: SPECVIEW
Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. SpecView also
provides a quick way to change the line number settings. Plant components are typically drawn
using toolbars, or by typing the command name at the AutoCAD command prompt. The
CADWorx SpecView palette provides an alternate method of inserting CADWorx components.
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 76)
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 78)
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)

Sets up the filter for the available components.
Main - Specifies the main size of the component.
Reduction - Specifies the reduction size of the component.
Specification - Specifies the specification associated with the component. The list is based on
the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39) in the current configuration settings.
Set Spec and Size - Displays the Set Specification & Size dialog box. For more
Start Spec Editor - Displays the Spec Editor software. For more information, see Spec
Editor (on page 77) or the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide book.
Line Numbering Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more
information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).
Line Number Drop Down Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup
dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box (on
page 78).
Set size, spec, and line number by component - Sets the main size, reduction size,
current specification, and line number to match a component that you select. For more
information, see All (on page 57).
Reload *.prj File - Refreshes the changes made to the open .prj file in the specification
editor.
Help - Displays the help file.
76
Palette Panel
Draw pipe components

1. Select the pipe spec to use from the list.
The software uses the default type (Buttweld).
2. If necessary, right-click and change the type.
3. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the pipe.

The software draws the pipe using the specified type.
Draw non-pipe components

1. Select the non-pipe component type to use from the list.
The software draws the component in plan view based on the current UCS.
2. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the component.
The software draws the component using the specified insertion option.
Spec Editor
CADWorx Plant I Tab: Setup and Size/Spec Panel > Editor
Spec View Palette > Start Spec Editor
Command Line: SPECEDIT
Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new specifications.
Spec Editor
can also be used as standalone software and can be copied to any
computer. It does not require a hardware lock (ESL) or a license manager.
CADWorxSpecEdit.exe is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.
When opening the Spec Editor from CADWorx, the software loads the specification that you
have specified in Plant. If you want to open a different specification, then select the specific spec
in Project Data.
The Spec Editor stores all the components delivered with CADWorx. If you want to
add a size for a component, you must first add it in the Data Table and the EndType Table in
the Spec Editor. You cannot use a component size that has not been added to the catalog for
the specification. CADWorx uses the SpecificationDefaultProject (on page 39) to locate the
project file and access the components.
Optional components can be manipulated and created in the spec editor.
For more information, see the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide delivered with CADWorx.
77
Palette Panel
Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for adding items to the line numbering list that appears with the line
numbering system. These values are stored in the DropDownList.TXT file. This file is located in
the same folder as the current configuration settings.
Available Categories - Lists the categories for which you can assign dropdown items. Select an
item from the list to make it the active category.
Dropdown Values - Lists the assigned dropdown items for the active category.
Add - Adds an item to the Dropdown Values list.
Remove - Removes the selected item from the Dropdown Values list.
Remove All - Removes all of the items from the Dropdown Values list.
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)

Controls parameters for customizing the appearance of the CADWorx Spec View palette.
View Options
Show optional components - Displays optional components in the CADWorx Spec View
palette. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw
components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View
palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx
uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same
component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show all components - Displays all components listed in the specification file regardless of the
current size set. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw
components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View
palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx
uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same
component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show socket weld - Displays socket-welded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show threaded - Displays threaded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show tag - Displays tags in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show long description - Displays long descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show short description - Displays short descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Tree Options
View 1 (No tree or categories) - Lists components in numerical order based on the Sort
Sequence set for the component in the specification file.
View 2 (One level tree with more categories) - Creates a category for each type of
component. For example, butt-welded and socket-welded tees are listed in separate categories.
View 3 (One level tree with less categories) - Creates fewer categories than View 2. For
example, all tees are listed in a single category.
View 4 (Two level tree with Spec Editor style view) - Displays a two-level tree that is
arranged in the same sequence as the Spec Editor application.
Color Options
Main Size component - Specifies the color associated with main size components.
Main Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with main size optional
components.
Reducing Size component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size components.
78
Palette Panel
Reducing Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size
optional components.
Level 1 category - Specifies the color associated with level 1 category components.
Level 2 category - Specifies the color associated with level 2 category components.
Line View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Line View
Palettes toolbar: Line View
Plant menu: Palettes > Line View
Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate Palette
Command line: LINEVIEW
The Line View palette isolates components based on their line number or their specification. It
also lets you locate components based on their description information.
Line View does not process any entities on locked layers.
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 79)
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 80)
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette)

Controls parameters for isolating components based on their line number or specification. You
can isolate an entire line number, or to isolate one line number and include surrounding
buildings or equipment.
If components have been hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not
listed in the Find tab.
Refresh List - Refreshes the line number list in the palette. Use this option if new line
numbers do not appear in the list.
Show All Components - Makes all objects in the drawing visible.
Select Line Number by Component - Select a component in the drawing. The software
uses the line number of this component to isolate the model.
Isolate Selected Line Numbers - Isolates the selected line numbers.
Set Layer Options - Displays the Line View Layer Selection dialog box so that you can
include or exclude certain layers when Isolate Type is set to Layer Isolate. For more
information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 99). By default, all layers are visible for line isolate.
Help - Displays on-line help.
Right-clicking the line number list displays the Isolate Selected Line Numbers, Show
All Components, and Refresh List options.
Isolate Options
Line Number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing so that you can select one or more
line numbers to isolate.
Spec - Lists all specs used in the model so that you can select one or more specifications to
isolate.
Isolate Type
79
Palette Panel
Full - Displays the selected CADWorx components, and hides all non-CADWorx components
such as buildings, equipment, and dimensions.
Partial - Displays the selected CADWorx components and all non-CADWorx components.
Layer - Displays the selected CADWorx components and hides all non-CADWorx components
based on the layer setup.
Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.
For details on this option, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144).
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette)

Controls parameters for locating components based on their description information.
Click the edit boxes to refresh the list of components. Type in the boxes to dynamically filter the
list of available components.
If components are hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not listed in
the Find tab.
Tag - Type tag text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text
displays.
Code - Type code text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text
displays.
Line number - Type line number text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the
associated text displays.
Short annotation - Type short annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from
the list, the associated text displays.
Long annotation -- Type long annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from the
list, the associated text displays.
Id Count - Type ID count text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the
associated text displays.
Right-Click Menu
Zoom - Zooms the current model space view to the component. Double clicking in the list of
components also zooms to the component. Zoom does not work with XREFs that have been
inserted into the base drawing with a rotation.
CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box. CEdit on an XREF component
does not allow any changes to the component descriptions.
Refresh - Refreshes the list in the dialog box. Use this option if new components do not appear
in the list.
80
Palette Panel
Support Modeler Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Pipe Support Modeler
Palettes toolbar: Pipe Support Modeler
Plant menu: Palettes > Pipe Support Modeler
Command line: PIPESUPPORTVIEW
Inserts pipe and elbow support components. Supports that are set up for pipe components are
shown in black. Supports that are setup for elbow components are shown in blue.
For more information, see Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) (on page 84)
Configuration Setup
New - Creates a new pipe support assembly (.PSA) file. This command displays the Create
New Pipe Support Assembly File dialog box so that you can specify the name and location of
the file. The default path to the .PSA file is set from the PipeSupportDirectory in the
configuration settings.
Save As - Saves your current settings to a pipe support assembly (.PSA) file. This command
displays the Specify Pipe Support Assembly File dialog box so that you can specify the name
and location of the file. The default path to the .PSA file is set from the PipeSupportDirectory in
the configuration settings. The drop list displays the .PSA files that are available in the folder.
Drawing
Insert - Inserts the support selected in the list. Based on the type of support selected (pipe or
elbow), the AutoCAD command line asks you to select the appropriate CADWorx component
(pipe or elbow).
Single - Inserts one support onto the pipe. This option is only available for pipe supports.
Multiple - Inserts multiple supports onto the pipe. You specify the start point, end point, and
spacing between the supports. This option is only available for pipe supports.
Free - Inserts a support without selecting a CADWorx component. The support is inserted using
the current UCS settings. This option is only available for pipe supports.
Detect Steel - Detects CADWorx Steel components to set the correct size for the beam clamp if
the beam clamp is used as the last component in the pipe support assembly.
Repeat Insert - Repeats the insert command for pipe type supports.
Modify
Regenerate - Recreates the support graphics based on what is set in the current .PSA file for
support components that you select from the model. Use Regenerate any time you need to
recreate a support based on a new assembly sequence or if the parametric values for the
support have changed since the support was originally inserted into the model.
Replace - Replaces the selected components in the model with the support that is selected from
the list.
Spec Change - Updates the spec information for the support based on what is currently set in
the .PSA file.
File
Add - Displays the Add Support dialog box so that you can add a new assembly to the .PSA
file. For more information, see Add Support Dialog Box below.
Modify - Displays the Modify Support dialog box so that you can modify an assembly in the
.PSA file. For more information, see Modify Support Dialog Box below.
Remove - Removes an assembly from the .PSA file.
81
Palette Panel
Copy - Duplicates an assembly within the .PSA file.
Move Up - Moves an assembly up one position in the list.
Move Down - Moves an assembly down one position in the list.
Add Support Dialog Box

Modify Support Dialog Box
Controls parameters for modifying supports in the .PSA file.
Data Tab
Controls parameters for creating pipe support assemblies.
Directory - Displays the folder in which the current .PSA file is located.
File Name - Displays the name of the current .PSA file.
Support Name Specifies the name of the support. This name displays in the CADWorx
Support Modeler palette. In modify mode, you can rename the support assembly.
Components Available - Displays the support components that you can use to make an
assembly. After you select a type, the list box shows the available parametric data files (*.SUP)
for that type of support. For elbow type supports, only Custom, Pipe, Plate, Rod, and Spring
Hanger are available. For more information, see Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) (on
page 84).
Open - Opens the selected parametric data file (*.SUP) in Notepad.EXE.
Type
Pipe - Specifies that the support is a pipe support. This option is only available when the support
is first created.
Elbow - Specifies that the support is an elbow support. This option is only available when the
support is first created.
Add - Moves the selected item from the Components Available list to the Components
Selected list.
Remove - Moves the selected item from the Components Selected list to the Components
Available list.
Components Selected - Displays the components in the assembly. The support is built using
the selected components in the order shown.
Move Up - Moves the selected item one position higher in the assembly sequence.
Move Down - Moves the selected item one position lower in the assembly sequence.
Spec Tab
Controls parameters for setting the specification information for the support component.
Size
Start - Specifies the beginning size of a component.
End - Specifies the ending size of a component. For example, if the range of sizes is 1/2 in. to
1-1/2, in., type 1.5. Enter values as the nominal size, not the actual size.
Insulation Options
Increase support size if component is insulated - Automatically selects a larger size support
component based on the insulation thickness. For example, a six-inch nominal size pipe (6.625
inch actual OD) has four-inch thick insulation (14.625 inch OD). This makes the total pipe
82
Palette Panel
diameter 6.625 inch actual OD plus 8 inch insulation OD. The software determines the support
by looking it up in the data file.
Use next larger size if exact size is not available - Specifies that if the calculated support is
not available in the data file, the next larger size support is selected.
Description
Tag - Specifies an optional tag description for the component.
Short - Specifies the abbreviated description for the component. This description is used by
Component (on page 199) in CADWorx Plant.
Long - Describes the component. This description is used in the bill of materials schedule and
Component (on page 199) in CADWorx Plant.
BOM
Sort - Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0
to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If the same sort numbers
are used for different components, they are placed in alphabetical order.
Type - Specifies the type of bill of material item. Select Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or
Misc.
Other
Index Code - Specifies the index, or pointer, for generation of database codes placed within
components. Type a value, or click Edit Codes to select a value. Index code values are found in
the file defined by the DataBaseCodes startup variable.
CAESAR II Type - Specifies the restraint type of the support for use in CAESAR II pipe stress
analysis.
ISOGEN
SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for an isometric drawing. For more information,
see SKEY Information .
Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for an isometric drawing. For more
information, see SKEY Information .
Sketch - Specifies a .DWG AutoCAD file containing details about the support. Select the file
from the Select detail sketch file dialog box.
Message
Type - Specifies the format of text displayed with the support.
Text - Specifies text displayed with the support.
Insert a pipe support

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Single on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette.

Select a pipe support from the list.
Click Insert.
Select the pipe from the model.
The Select Optional Values for [<support type>] dialog box displays.
5. Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK.
6. Select the location on the pipe to insert the support.
7. Specify a rotation around the pipe and the length of the support.
The software places the pipe support in the model.
83
Palette Panel
Insert an elbow support

1. Select an elbow support from the list on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette.
2. Click Insert.
3. Select the elbow from the model.
4. Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK.
5. Select the location to insert the support.
The software places the pipe support in the model.
Insert multiple pipe supports

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click Multiple on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette.

Select a pipe support from the list.
Click Insert.
Select the pipe from the model.
This dialog box only displays when optional items are available.
Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK.
Select the beginning location for the supports on the pipe.
Select the ending location for the supports on the pipe.
Type the distance between the supports, and press ENTER.
The software places the pipe supports in the model.
Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP)

There are several types of support components that can be used to make an assembly. Each
type has a data file which lists the parametric data needed to build the support. Sample data
files are located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\PipeSupport\ folder. For each type, a sample
drawing file shows how the data file parameters are used to draw the shape. For custom
(TYPE=CUSTOM), a drawing file cannot be created for each size.
The top of the .SUP file has information about the support type (TYPE=) and unit system of the
file.
The SHOWOPTIONAL setting can be used to control how different sizes are selected when the
support is inserted.
SHOWOPTIONAL = 0 - Uses the exact size match if it is found in the data file. The Select
Optional Values dialog box does not display.
84
Palette Panel
SHOWOPTIONAL = 1 - If multiple sizes are listed, a dialog box displays to select a size. In the
example shown below, all 10" U bolts are shown in the dialog box for selection.
85
Palette Panel
SHOWOPTIONAL = 2 - Shows the entire content of the file. This setting is useful for
components that are not based on the connecting pipe or elbow, such as plates, rods, and
spring hangers.
86
Palette Panel
If several components in the assembly have the SHOWOPTIONAL setting of 1 or 2, a dialog
box similar to the one below displays. Select the different components that make up the
assembly. The rod, pipe, and spring hanger have an additional option for the length column in
the data file. If the length column is set to -1, use the Enter length box to type the length of the
component.
If SHOWOPTIONAL = 0 for all components in the assembly, the dialog box displays so that you
can type the length of the component. The software prompts you for the length of the last
variable-length component during the assembly insertion into the model.
87
Palette Panel
Insulation View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Insulation View
Palettes toolbar: Insulation View
Plant menu: Utility > Insulation Palette
Plant menu: Palettes > Insulation View
Command line: INSULATIONVIEW
Creates a data file with an extension .INU. In this file, you can add, modify, and remove
insulation configurations. After you create the insulation configuration data file you can apply
these configurations to selected components.
Model
Insulation
88
Palette Panel
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 89)
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 90)
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette)

Controls parameters for creating a data file with an .INU extension. In this file, you can add,
modify and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components.
Save - Saves the data in the Configuration Setup grid to the configuration file.
Save As - Displays the Save As Insulation Data dialog box to save the current data in the
Configuration Setup grid to a new file.
Open - Displays the Open Insulation Data dialog box to load an insulation data file. The data
contained in that file is displayed in the Configuration Setup grid and listed individually in the
drop down categories.
Configuration Setup
Add to drawing - Saves the selected grid rows to the current AutoCAD drawing. If similar data
already exists in the current drawing, it is not overwritten. All configurations that have been
added, appear in the Apply tab of the palette.
Options - Displays the Insulation Options dialog box. For more information, see Insulation
Options Dialog Box below.
Configuration Setup - Grid - Displays the content of the insulation data file in grid form.
Thickness - Specifies the actual insulation thickness value. Type a numeric value greater than
zero. You can also select an existing value. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), type a value in inches.
In mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in inches or
millimeters based on the setting from the Insulation Options dialog box. If you type inch
values, the software automatically converts to millimeters when the insulation solid is
created in the model. If you type a millimeter value, no conversion is done.
In metric units (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in millimeters.
Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You
can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by
multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
3
In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in .
3
In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm .
3
In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm .
Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value.
Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.
Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value.
Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value.
User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.
Add - Adds the current values from the boxes to the grid. If similar data exists, the value is not
added to the grid.
Modify - Modifies the currently selected row in the grid using the values currently shown in the
boxes. Each box corresponds to a column in the grid.
Remove - Deletes the currently selected row in the grid.
89
Palette Panel
Add, Modify, and Remove only change the data currently displayed in the grid. The data
in the insulation file is not updated until you click Save or Save As.
Insulation Options Dialog Box

Controls parameters for insulation options.
Insulation
Append "_I" to layer name - Adds the characters _I to the layer name to create the insulation
layer name. For example, If the solid is on layer 1"-150-CWS, the insulation solid is on
1"-150-CWL_l. The insulation solid is grouped with the component solid and center line.
New Layer Name - Indicates that the software creates a new layer.
Name - Specifies the layer name for the insulation solids.
Color - Displays the standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box. Select the default layer color
for the insulation.
Graphics
Show Graphics for Gasket - Indicates whether gasket graphics display.
Show Graphics for Weld gap - Indicates whether weld gap graphics display.
Show Graphics for User Shapes - Indicates whether user shape graphics display.
Metric/Inch Units system
Millimeter - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in millimeters in mixed metric units
(Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations.
Inch - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in inches in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe
size / metric dimensions) situations.
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette)

Controls parameters for applying configurations to CADWorx components.
For most CADWorx components, insulation is approximated with the use of single or
multiple AutoCAD cylindrical components.
Available Configuration - Displays the currently saved insulation configurations in the current
AutoCAD drawing.
Remove - Removes the highlighted row in the grid from the current drawing.
Select Mode
Select on screen - Indicates that you will select components in the drawing window.
Line number - Indicates that you will select components by line numbers.
Insulation Mode
Data/Graphics - Adds both the insulation graphic and data.
Data Only - Adds only the insulation data and no graphics.
Insulation
Add - Adds the insulation currently selected in the Available Configuration grid to components
in the drawings. You are prompted to select CADWorx components. If any of the selected
components are already insulated, this action is skipped.
Modify - Modifies existing insulation graphics and data.
Remove - Removes existing insulations graphics and data.
Refresh - Generates the graphics from the insulation data stored in the component's centerline.
Use this option if insulation graphics were deleted or lost.
90
Palette Panel
Graphics
Add - Adds insulation graphics to components that have had their graphics removed. The data
previously stored in the components is used to generate the graphics.
Remove - Removes the graphics from the selected components. The insulation data remains.
These components do not show the insulation solid even if you later click Refresh.
Visibility
Isolate - Isolates insulation graphics by either selecting components on screen or by selecting
line numbers from the list.
Hide/Show - Hides or shows the insulation graphics by selecting components on screen or by
selecting line numbers from the list.
Show All - Shows all objects that have been previously hidden in the current drawing.
Report - Creates a complete report, in HTML format, about all of the insulation components in
the model. The report is itemized by the different types of insulation data and calculates the total
weight, volume, and length.
Filter - Filters the list of line numbers using wild cards. For example, type *25-1B* to limit the
line number list to line numbers with 25-1B as part of the name. The text filter occurs regardless
of where the text is in the line number name.
Edit - Displays the Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects dialog box so that you can edit
the insulation data for all components having the selected insulation configuration.
Right-Click Menu
In Line Number selection mode, a right-click menu is available with additional options. The
right-click menu changes what displays in the edit box.
Select All / Clear All - Selects or clears all line numbers in the list.
List Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only insulated line numbers.
List Un-Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only uninsulated line numbers.
List Data Only Line Numbers - Lists line numbers that have insulation data but no insulation
graphics.
List Un-Insulated Components - Lists only uninsulated components.
List All - Refreshes the list.
Modify - Replaces the selected insulation data with the highlighted insulation in the Available
Configuration grid. This change applies to all components in the selected line number.
Remove - Removes the insulation from all components in the selected line number.
Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects Dialog Box

Controls parameters for editing the insulation data on multiple objects. This dialog box applies
the settings to all of the selected objects.
Thickness - Displays the insulation thickness value. You cannot edit this value.
Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You
can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by
multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
3
In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in .
3
In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm .
3
In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm .
Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value.
Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.
91
Palette Panel
Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value.
Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value.
User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.
Discontinuity View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Discontinuity View
Palettes toolbar: Discontinuity View
Plant menu: Palettes > Discontinuity View
Command line: DISCONTINUITYVIEW
Checks for different types of modeling issues, such as disconnected, un-connected, overlapped,
and not on line.
Refresh - Refreshes the data in the grid.
Show All Types - Displays all issues in the grid.
Show Disconnected Only - Displays only disconnected and un-connected issues in the
grid.
Show Not On Line Only - Displays only not-on-line issues in the grid.
Show Overlap Only - Displays only overlap issues in the grid.
Tolerance Settings - Displays the tolerance settings.
Color Settings - Displays the color and Auto Refresh settings.
Remove Selected Overlaps - Deletes the selected overlaps from the model .DWG file.
Export to File - Exports all data from the palette to a Microsoft Excel (*.CSV) file
Help - Displays the help file.
Tolerance Min - Specifies the minimum connection tolerance. Two components that are
separated by a distance greater than the minimum tolerance but less the maximum tolerance
ace are considered disconnected.
Tolerance Max - Specifies the maximum connection tolerance. Two components that are
separated by a distance greater than the maximum tolerance are considered un-connected.
Color Arrow - Specifies the color for arrows.
Color Text - Specifies the color for text.
Auto Refresh - Indicates whether the software automatically updates the grid when you open
the drawing.
# - Displays a number from the palette that coincides with the highlighted number in the drawing.
The arrow and text color setting is used for the graphics drawn in the model.
Line Number - Displays the line number of the component.
Type - Displays the discontinuity type for the component.
Disconnected - Displays components that are not connected within the minimum tolerance.
Un-connected - Displays components that are not connected with in the maximum
tolerance.
Overlap - Displays components that are duplicated at the same location. The number in
parenthesis (n) is the number of overlapping components at this location.
Not on line - Displays components that are not connected to the pipe centerline (typically
OLET type components).
92
Palette Panel
Gap - Displays the distance between the two components. This value is 0.0 for overlapping
components.
Long Description - Displays the long description of the component.
Category - Displays the category of the component.
Component Type - Displays the command named used to draw the component.
(X,Y,Z) - Displays the global X-, Y-, Z-coordinates of the component center point.
Pressing CTRL or SHIFT while left-clicking lets you select multiple items from the list.
Left-click to zoom in to the location of the issue.
Right-click to change the AutoCAD view to the location of the issue without zooming.
Pipe Support Report

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Pipe Support Report
Command line: PIPESUPPORTREPORT
Generates a report of all pipe supports found. You can report on the pipe supports found on a
selected item, or the entire model.
The software saves the report to a .CSV file which you can use with Microsoft Excel.
93
Palette Panel
P&ID View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > PID View
Palettes toolbar: P&ID View
Plant menu: Palettes > P&ID View
Command line: PIDVIEW
Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database.
You must set up the following items to use this palette:
1. Create a CADWorx P&ID project that uses the P&ID live database system.
2. Create a CADWorx Plant project that uses the Plant live database system.
3. With Microsoft Access, you must write database tables used by Plant and P&ID to the same
Access file. With SQL Server and Oracle, you must write database tables used by Plant and
P&ID to the same database.
4. Create associations between in-line components and the main process line in the P&ID
drawings with the Combine Process
command. For more information, see "Combine
Process" in the CADWorx P&ID User's Guide.
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 94)

Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 96)
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)

Controls parameters for linking matched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project
database.
Select Configuration File
The current configuration file (Project.CFG) displays.
Browse - Select a different Project.CFG file
Options - Displays available options.
Available Line Numbers - Displays line numbers that are in both the P&ID database and the
Plant database.
Select - Specifies a component in the current Plant model drawing. The software sets the line
number of this component to the current line number for P&ID View.
Component Type - Displays the component tables from the P&ID database.
Link - Links or unlinks P&ID and Plant components.
Help - Displays on-line help.
P&ID Data
P&ID ID_Count - Lists the P&ID ID_COUNT from the P&ID database.
Line Number - Lists the line number for the P&ID component.
Tag - Lists the tag for the P&ID component.
Size - Lists the size for the P&ID component.
Spec- Lists the spec for the P&ID component.
Drawing - Lists the drawing for the P&ID component.
Right-Click Menu
94
Palette Panel
Insert in model - Reads the size, spec, and component type from the P&ID database and
inserts the component into the Plant model.
View P&ID drawing - Displays a preview of the P&ID drawing.
To zoom inside the viewer, use the two arrow buttons on the left side of the dialog box. Zooming
inside the viewer can also be done by holding down the left mouse button while rotating the
mouse scroll wheel. The viewer dialog box closes when you switch between drawings in the
same session of AutoCAD. The dialog box must be started with every new AutoCAD session.
Left-click an item to update the P&ID drawing viewer dialog box if it is active.
Double-click an item to run the Insert in model command.
Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.
Options - Displays the Options dialog box so that you can set the colors of the items displayed
in the P&ID and Plant data.
Plant Data
P&ID ID_Count - Displays the ID_COUNT of the P&ID component if a link between the P&ID
component and the Plant component is made. The Plant database (PIPE table) saves the P&ID
ID_COUNT in the RESERVE_10 column.
Line Number - Displays the line number of the plant component.
Tag - Displays the tag of the plant component.
Size - Displays the size of the plant component.
Spec - Displays the spec associated with the plant component.
Drawing - Displays the drawing associated with the plant component.
Description - Displays the description of the plant component.
Right-Click Menu
CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box.
Zoom - Zooms and highlight the component in the model.
List data from all drawings - Lists plant data from all drawings that have the line number.
List data from current drawing - Lists plant data from the open drawing.
95
Palette Panel
Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.
Options Dialog Box

Link components (on page 96)

Unlink components (on page 96)
Link components
1. Select the check box next to an item in the P&ID Data list and an item in the Plant Data list.
2. Click Link.
The P&ID ID_Count value in the Plant Data list updates.
Vales, reducers, and nozzles can be linked. Instrument components cannot be linked.
Unlink components
1. Select two linked components.
Link changes to Unlink.
2. Click Unlink.
The software removes the link between the two components.
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)

Controls parameters for unmatched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project
database.
Line number from P&ID table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the
P&ID database that do not have corresponding line numbers in the Plant database.
Line numbers from Pipe table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the
Plant database (PIPE table) that do not have corresponding line numbers in the P&ID database.
Line numbers from P&ID table with no in-line components - Displays line numbers from the
P&ID database that do not have any P&ID components associated with them in the P&ID
database.
Export - Exports all data from the Unmatched tab to a report. The report is written to the same
folder as the Project.CFG file. The file names of the reports are P&IDViewUnmatched1.HTML,
P&IDViewUnmatched2.HTML, and P&IDViewUnmatched3.HTML.
Refresh - Refreshes the data presented in the Unmatched tab.
Line numbers - Displays line number information from the P&ID and Plant databases.
In-line components - Displays in-line component information from the P&ID and Plant
databases.
96
Palette Panel
Insert a drawing into the project

When a Plant drawing is opened from the current project, Plant attempts to insert it into the
project. The Insert Drawing into Project Database dialog box opens to confirm this action.
When Insert Into DB is clicked, rows are added to the appropriate tables within the database.
Plant drawings created without a database have xdata attached to each component that allows
the software to automatically add rows into the appropriate tables.
Clash View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Clash View
Palettes toolbar: Clash View
Plant menu: Palettes > Clash View
Plant menu: Utility > Clash
Command line: CLASH or CLASHVIEW
Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D solids in the current drawing and any attached
XREF drawings.
Settings
Clash On - Turns the clash system on.
Clash Off - Turns the clash system off.
Show Clashes - Displays clash entities that exist in the model.
Options - Displays the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on
page 98).
Layers - Displays the Layers dialog box. For more information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page
99).
Refresh - Updates the clash list.
Export - Writes the clash list to a text file. The file is exported to the same folder as the model
drawing file. The name of the file is the drawing name with _Clash.TXT appended.
Display by Status
New - Displays new clashes in the list.
Active - Displays active clashes in the list.
Resolved - Displays resolved clashes in the list.
Approved - Displays approved clashes in the list.
97
Palette Panel
All - Displays all clashes in the list.
Clash List
# - Displays the number assigned to each clash.
Component 1 - Displays the CADWorx data for the first component.
Component 2 - Displays the CADWorx data for the second component.
Status - Displays the clash status.
Type - Indicates whether the clash was from a CADWorx Insulation View-created component.
You can set the color of the grid items using the Options dialog box. For more information,
see Options Dialog Box (on page 98).
Left-clicking an item in the list generates the clash entity in the model and zooms to the
clash.
Right-Click Menu
Clash Status New - Changes the status of a clash to New.
Clash Status Active - Changes the status of a clash to Active.
Clash Status Resolved - Changes the status of a clash to Resolved.
Clash Status Approved - Changes the status of a clash to Approved.
Clash Zoom To - Zooms to the clash point.
Clash Viewer - Displays a dialog box with the two clashing components.
Clash Isolate Selected - Isolates the selected clash.
Clash Isolate All - Creates clash entities for all clashes, and isolates them. To remove all clash
entities from the model, run the command CLASHDELETEALLOBJECTS.
Clash Show All - Shows all components in the drawing.
Options Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting options on clash objects.
Start up - Indicates whether clash detection runs on drawing start up.
On - Clash detection is always on for every drawing.
Off - Clash detection is off for every drawing.
Display Prompt - The software prompt you every time a drawing opens.
On clash detection - Indicates what happens when a clash is detected.
Do Not Report - The software does not notify you if a clash is detected.
Show Tray Notification - The software notifies you through the tray bubble notification that
a clash has occurred.
Show Palette - The software displays the Clash View palette every time a clash is
detected.
Ignore connected steel - Indicates whether the clash detection system checks for connecting
steel members. If this option is selected, steel members that are touching each other are
ignored.
Detect clashes within blocks - Indicates whether the software detects clashes inside blocks. If
this option is selected, the system detects clashes within any blocks in the current drawing.
Synchronize clashes from XREFs - Indicates whether the software checks for clash data
inside external reference drawings and updates the master drawing data for that clash. Only
New clashes in the master drawing which are from an XREF drawing have the status updated to
match the status that is saved in the XREF drawing.
98
Palette Panel
Synchronize layers from XREFs - Indicates whether the system checks for clash layer data
inside externally reference drawings and updates the master drawing clash layer data to match.
If a layer in an XREF is excluded from clash detection, the XREF layer is also excluded in the
master drawing.
Ignore insulation clashes - The system ignores all clashes generated from components
created with the CADWorx Insulation View palette.
Connectivity tolerance - Specifies the tolerance for checking component connectivity. If two
components are connected, a clash is not reported, even if the actual solids intersect.
Clash zoom factor - Specifies the zoom factor used during clash.
Color Options - Specifies the color of the clash entity and the color of the list.
Layers Dialog Box

Controls parameters for including or excluding certain layers from clash detection. By default, all
layers are considered for clash detection. XREF layers are also displayed.
Layers - Displays the available layers. Select the check box next to the layer name to include
that layer in clash detection.
Select all - Selects all of the layers in the list.
Clear all - Clears the selection of all of the layers in the list.
Assembly View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Assembly View
Command Line: ASSEMBLYVIEW
Creates assemblies for placement in a model. The Assembly Manager has four options:
create, edit, delete, and insert.
Command Name
Create Assembly - Creates a new assembly. For more
information, see Create an assembly (on page 100).
Command Line
MAKEASSEMBLY
Edit Assembly Selected - Edits the selected assembly. For

more information, see Edit an assembly (on page 100).
Delete Assembly Selected - Deletes the selected assembly.
For more information, see Delete an assembly from the
Assembly Manager (on page 101).
Insert Assembly Selected - Inserts the selected assembly
into the model. For more information, see Insert an assembly
into the drawing (on page 101).
INSERTASSEMBLY
Help - Opens the help file.

Edit Assembly Paths - Edits the path folder location of the
assembly. For more information, see Edit an assembly path
(on page 101).
ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS
99
Palette Panel
Right- Click Menu
Insert Assembly - Inserts an assembly.
View Assembly - Opens the Assembly Viewer and displays the assembly. The assembly can
be zoomed and rotated for a 360-degree view.
a. Wireframe - Displays the model in wireframe view.
b. Hidden - Displays the model in hidden view.
c. Shaded - Displays the model with shaded view.
Modify Assembly - Enables you to edit an assembly.
New - Creates a new assembly.
Rename - Renames an assembly.
Delete - Deletes an assembly.
Copy - Copies an assembly.
Paste - Pastes an assembly.
Reload Global File - Reloads the global assembly file.
Edit File Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly.
You can close the Assembly Manager at any time by typing ASSEMBLYCLOSE on the
command line.
Create an assembly
1. Click Assembly View
press ENTER.
2.
3.
4.
5.
. Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and
Click Create Assembly

.
Select all the components necessary for the assembly, and press ENTER
Pick a point where you want to connect.
Type a name on the command line, and press ENTER.
The assembly appears in the Assembly Manager.
Edit an assembly
press ENTER.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Edit Assembly Selected

.
Make the changes to the drawing as needed.
Click Close Assembly Editor.
Click Yes to save the changes.
To close the Assembly Editor without saving any changes, click No.
The change is saved.
100
Palette Panel
Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager

press ENTER.
2. Select an assembly for deletion.
3. Click Delete Assembly Selected
4. Click OK to delete.
If you do not want to delete the object, click Cancel.

The assembly disappears from the Assembly Manager.
Insert an assembly into the drawing

press ENTER.
2. Select an assembly from the Assemblies box.
3. Click Insert Assembly Selected
.
4. Select a component to connect to.
5. Select a direction.
The assembly appears in the drawing.
If an assembly is built with a reducer and then attached to a component of a larger size
you are prompted to change the size of the reducer. The assembly usually takes on the size and
the specification of the component to which it is attached.
Edit an assembly path

then press ENTER.
2. Type ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select Project and then the name of the assembly from the popup.
OR
Select Global Assembly and then the name of the assembly from the popup.
4. Enter the subdirectory for the user shape path, and then press ENTER.
OR
Type B on the command line for the user shape path, press ENTER to open the Browse for
Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER.
5. Enter the subdirectory for the Topworks path, and then press ENTER.
OR
Type B on the command line for the Topworks path, press ENTER to open the Browse for
Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER.
The assembly paths are updated.
101
Palette Panel
102
SECTION 4
ISOGEN Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN
Command Name
Command Line
ISOGEN Out - Generates an isometric drawing. For more

information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).
ISOGENOUT
ISOGEN Batch - Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for

one or more line numbers. For more information, see
ISOGEN Batch (on page 106).
ISOGENBATCH
ISOGEN Supplemental - Places supplemental ISOGEN

blocks in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN
Supplemental (on page 107).
ISOGENSUPL
Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the

drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page
108).
STOPSIGN
ISOGEN Start Point - Places ISOGEN start point symbols

in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Start
Point (on page 108).
ISOGENSTARTPT
Offset Tap - Creates offset tap connections for use by

ISOGEN. For more information, see Offset Tap (on page
108).
OTAP
PCF Out - Creates a piping component (PCF) file from

PCFOUT
components selected in the drawing. For more information,
see PCF Out (on page 112).
PCF In - Imports components into the current drawing from PCFIN
a piping component (PCF) file. For more information, see
PCF IN (on page 112).
Tap Connection - Creates tap connections for use by
ISOGEN. For more information, see Tap (on page 112).
TAP
103
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out
Command line: ISOGENOUT
Generates an isometric drawing. The components you select to use with this command must be
generated with an authorized ISOGEN hardware lock, or this function cannot process them. The
selection process has different options that allow you to perform more detailed selections.
Select ISOGEN Style Dialog Box

Controls parameters for selecting ISOGEN projects, styles, and names of the
automatically-generated isometrics. See ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113)
for more in information on creating and managing these projects and styles.
Directory - Specifies the directory of the ISOGEN project.
Project - Specifies the active project. The list contains all of the available projects. See ISOGEN
Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113) for information on creating these projects.
Style - Specifies the active style. The list contains all of the available styles in the project.
File Name - Specifies the name of the file. This allows you to name an isometric file if none of
the components selected contain a line number. If the selected components contain line number
information, the line number from the last component selected is used as the isometric file
name.
Path - Displays the Isometric folder that is used by the ISOGEN style.
Select - Displays the Select Isogen Style Directory dialog box so that you can select an
ISOGEN Style (ISOGEN.FLS) file. Use this command to select an ISOGEN style that is in a
shared network folder. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).
Settings - Displays the ISOGEN Settings dialog box so that you can transpose the system by
an X, Y, and Z offset distance. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).
The DXF edit box enables you to name a portion of the output file. The name appends a series
of numbers. ISOGEN might break up the selected components into multiple sheets which would
require this numbering sequence.
Select ISOGEN Style Directory Dialog Box

Controls parameters for selecting an ISOGEN style directory file.
Look in - Specifies the folder in which the file resides.
File name - Specifies the style directory file name.
Files of type - Specifies the file type (extension).
ISOGEN Settings Dialog Box

Controls parameters for transposing the system by X, Y, and Z offsets. The whole system can
be rotated by any angle. This allows any user-defined north arrow direction.
X - Specifies the X-direction offset.
Y - Specifies the Y-direction offset.
Z - Specifies the Z-direction offset.
104
ISOGEN Panel
Angle - Specifies the north arrow direction:
90 = World positive Y-axis as north direction. This is the default value.
180 = World positive X-axis as north direction.
270 = World negative Y-axis as north direction.
0 = World negative X-axis as north direction.
ISOGEN Project Data Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting position text (POS) that can be displayed on the isometric
drawing file. Review the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils\POS_Help.pdf file to locate
the POS number associated with each item. These values are stored with the configuration file
and are used when an isometric is exported. For I-Configure projects, this is the only option for
setting these values. For Project Manager projects, these values can be set from the Project
Manager > Project Default dialog boxes or with this dialog box.
After typing a value, click the Use check box to store the value in the configuration file. To delete
a value from the configuration file, clear the Use box. The values that have the Use box selected
display at the top of the dialog box the next time it displays.
ISOGEN Results Dialog Box

Controls parameters for reviewing the results of the ISOGEN extraction.
The dialog box displays the success or failure of the extraction in a text box.
Open Plot Files - Opens all the generated ISOs in the current session of AutoCAD. The
AutoCAD SDI setting must be set to 0 for the option to be available.
View Message File - Opens Notepad to display a message file that provides information that
could be used when an error was produced. The text file that displays is an .MES file. For more
information, read the ISOGEN documentation.
Extract ISOGEN files

1. Click ISOGEN Out
. Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press
ENTER.
The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays.
2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements.
3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box.
Enter an option [Line number/Select component] <Select component>.
4. Select Line Number to select components using line numbers.
Enter an option [List/Select component] <Select component>.
5. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item
or
Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other
preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the
UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 42) is set to 1.
Processed 164 component(s) to file.
The components must have been generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware
lock. If not, the a message similar to the following displays.
Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...
Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...
No components were written to file...
The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays.
105
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Batch
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch
Command line: ISOGENBATCH
Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. The command uses the
default settings from the ISOGEN Project Manager. For more information, see ISOGEN Project
Manager / I-Configure (on page 113).
ISOGENBATCH also exports line number continuation information to ISOGEN.
Extract batch ISOGEN files

1. Click ISOGEN Out
. Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press
ENTER.
The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays.
2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see ISOGEN Out
(on page 104).
3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box.
The software displays the Select Item dialog box which lists all the line numbers available in
the model.
4. Select one or more from the available line numbers. For more information, see Select Item
CADWorx sends each line number to ISOGEN for processing. ISOGEN might break up the
selected line numbers into multiple sheets. Messages similar to the following display:
********** Start processing (1"-IG-915-A1) **********
Sent 38 component(s) to ISOGEN for processing...
1 DXF file(s) created:
E:\ISO\NEWPROJECT\IMPERIAL_INCH_ANSI_C\DRAWINGS\1_-IG-915-A1.DXF
********** End processing (1"-IG-915-A1) **********
********** Start processing (1"-IG-918-A1) **********
Sent 9 component(s) to ISOGEN for processing...
1 DXF file(s) created:
E:\ISO\NEWPROJECT\IMPERIAL_INCH_ANSI_C\DRAWINGS\1_-IG-918-A1.DXF
********** End processing (1"-IG-918-A1) **********
*****************************
********** Summary **********
*****************************
*** Line(s) completed successfully ***
1"-IG-915-A1
1"-IG-918-A1
106
ISOGEN Panel
*** Total DXF files: 2
*** Line(s) with errors ***
None
ISOGENBATCH log file written to:
C:\Drawings\Model_ISOGEN.log
The components must be generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If
not, a message similar to the following displays.
Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...
Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...
No components were written to file...
As each line is processed, any errors encountered are displayed on the screen, and a log
file is created.
The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page
104).
ISOGEN Supplemental
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental
Command line: ISOGENSUPL
Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. There are several types of block available
for export to ISOGEN:
ISOGEN_Arrow
ISOGEN_Wall
ISOGEN_Floor
ISOGEN_Instrument
ISOGEN_BreakIn
Arrow, wall, and floor blocks must be inserted along the center line of a pipe component.
Instrument blocks must have the instrument line connected to the end of an olet component,
TAP component, or a weld gap component.
Break in (Tie in) points must be connected to the end point of a component.
To add other blocks to this menu, see Introduction. The block name must contain
ISOGEN_Arrow, ISOGEN_Instrument, ISOGEN_Wall, ISOGEN_Floor, or ISOGEN_BreakIn
for export to ISOGEN. For example, to add another instrument type, you could name the block
ISOGEN_Instrument_4, and add it to the menu.
If you are placing a flow arrow on a sloped line, align the UCS to the slope before
inserting the arrow.
ISOGEN Supplemental Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing.
The folder containing the ISOGEN supplemental blocks displays at the top of the dialog box.
List - Displays the available ISOGEN supplemental blocks.
Preview - Displays a preview of the selected block.
107
ISOGEN Panel
Stop Sign
CADWorx Plant I tab: Stop Sign
Misc toolbar: Stop Sign
Command line: STOPSIGN
Places stop sign symbols in the drawing. This symbol is used for designating the starting and
ending locations for automatically-generated isometric output. For more information, see
ISOGEN Out (on page 104). Stop signs must be at a weld or connection point on the piping
system. You place these designators on the drawing and then exports them to the database.
This could occur manually with Export Pipe (on page 143) or automatically with Setup Live
Database (on page 142).
If stop signs are present when using the Database option of the ISOOUT command, you are
asked if stop signs should be used in generating the ISOs.
Use Stop Signs [Yes/No] <Yes>:
If you select Yes, continuity is checked and the ISOs are broken at each stop sign. If there are
no line numbers or stop signs present in the database, the following prompt displays.
Database does not have any line number or stop signs...
When exporting with the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box isometric generator (ISOGEN
Out (on page 104) or ISOGEN Batch (on page 106)), stop signs are used, if selected.
ISOGEN Start Point

CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN Start Point
Command line: ISOGENSTARTPT
Places start point symbols in the drawing.
Offset Tap
CADWorx Plant I tab: Offset Tap
Command line: OTAP
Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. Offset taps are for use with large branches.
After you create an offset tap connection for a component, you can route piping from that point.
Use offset taps for all major branches of the main pipeline. Offset tap is more robust at
processing branches then tap connection. Use an offset tap connection if ISOGEN reports
discontinuity or tap connection does not produce the necessary results.
Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.
The OTAP command allows several types of pipe-to-pipe connections. The default connection
for OTAP is TANGENTIAL (TTSO). To change to another type of connection, change the
symbol key (SKEY) value on the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64) for the OTAP
component.
108
SKEY
Connection Type
TTSO
TANGENTIAL
TTRF
TANGENTIAL REINFORCED
TOSO
OFFSET
ISOGEN Panel
TORF
OFFSET REINFORCED
TSSO
STUB IN
TSRF
STUB IN REINFORCED
TESO
SET ON
TERF
SET ON REINFORCED
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the
following results:
TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:
The length of pipe for the cut list increases to include the OTAP length.
The dimension includes OTAP length.
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the
following results:
TORF, TOSO, TTRF, TTSO:
The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
The dimension does not include OTAP length.
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are of different sizes (reduction), ISOGEN Option Switch 2
is used for cut length calculation.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF,
TSSO:
109
ISOGEN Panel
The length of pipe for the cut list is increased to include the OTAP length.
The dimension includes the OTAP length.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO,
TOSO:
The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
The dimension does not include the OTAP length.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF,
TSSO:
The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
The dimension includes the OTAP length.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO:
The length of the pipe for the cut list is adjusted based on the diameter of the main and
reduction pipe sizes.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point setting with SKEYs: TOSO:
The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
Option switch 77 Generate PAD Item Code and Show Symbol on Iso option shows a
reinforcement pad on OTAP connections with SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF. A CADWorx
reinforcement pad does not have to be drawn in the model for these three SKEYs.
For all other SKEYs, a CADWorx reinforcement pad must be drawn in the model for it to appear
in the ISO drawing.
110
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN option switch 77 No Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads, One Extra Weld
added at Reinforcement Pads, and Two Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads settings
control weld numbering at the reinforcement pads. Extra welds are only shown for the following
SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF.
Place an offset tap

1. Click Offset Tap . Alternatively, type OTAP on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping
component.
3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.
The software places the offset tap.
111
ISOGEN Panel
PCF Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF Out
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF Out
Command line: PCFOUT
Creates a piping component (PCF) file from components selected in the drawing.
This command displays the standard file selection dialog box and prompts for a file name.
Extract piping component files

1. Click PCF Out . Alternatively, type PCFOUT on the command line, and press ENTER.
The Create dialog box displays.
2. Type the name of the PCF file in the File name box, and click Save.
or
Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other
preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the
UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 42) is set to 1.
The software processes the components.
PCF In
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF In
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF In
Command line: PCFIN
Imports components into the current drawing from a piping component (PCF) file. The PCF file
is usually produced from some other plant design system. This command requires that proper
CADWorx specification and data files exist. If the PCF file uses a specification that does not
match the CADWorx specification exactly, the model created by PCF In
does not function as
expected.
The function displays a standard file selection dialog box. There is an intervention level. For
more information, see System In (on page 174).
Tap
CADWorx Plant I tab: Tap
Command line: TAP
Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. The tap connection are used for small branches.
After creating a tap connection for a component, piping can be routed from that point. The
CADWorx ISOGEN interface automatically processes numerous types of taps without needing a
tap connection. Only use a tap connection if ISOGEN reports a discontinuity.
Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.
112
ISOGEN Panel
Place a tap
1. Click Tap . Alternatively, type TAP on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping
component.
3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.
The software places the tap.
ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure

Generates isometrics. All of the software included with ISOGEN is supplied with an Adobe
Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF) file. This PDF file can be printed or viewed from the
computer. The PDFs can be accessed from the program group that is created during
installation. We suggest reading the PDF manual prior to contacting for technical support.
ISOGEN is installed in a subfolder of CADWorx. There is not an option to install it anywhere
else. The program group created during installation provides shortcuts to all the software within
these folders. It also provides shortcuts for all the documentation.
The information supplied in the CADWorx help file is for general use only.
The Isogen_Utils folder contains all the editors that are used to control the format of the
automatically generated isometrics. These utilities include the options editor, symbols editor,
and others. These applications are required to control the appearance of the ISOGEN isometric.
All of the applications have shortcuts in the program group.
There are two applications available for creating and maintaining ISOGEN Styles: Project
Manager and I-Configure.
Project Manager is installed with CADWorx ISOGEN and is located in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\ISOGEN\Project_Manager\PIPMAN.EXE file.
I-Configure is not installed with CADWorx ISOGEN. The installation executable for I-Configure
is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\I-Configure\Setup.exe file.
CADWorx can use ISOGEN styles created by Project Manager or I-Configure.
ISOGEN Information
The following topics provide general ISOGEN information.
Material List Definition

The Material List Definition (MLD) file allows you to customize the ISOGEN material list. The
following table shows how CADWorx data is exported to an ISOGEN material list for use with
the MLD file.
cadworx data (as listed in
component edit dialog box)
ISOGEN MLD
Alpha size
Not exported ('N.S.' in the MLD is

based on the size stored within
the component data.)
Short annotation
'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2'
113
ISOGEN Panel
Long annotation
'DESCRIPTION'
Line Number
Not available as an MLD item.
Tag
Code
'ITEM-CODE'
(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on
page 34) = Yes in current
configuration settings)
Code
(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on
page 34) = No in current
configuration settings)
Weight
'WEIGHT'
Sort sequence
Not exported
Length
'QTY'
Specification
SKEY Information
The following ISOGEN SKEYs can be used by CADWorx when creating an isometric.
ISOGEN SKEY definitions and symbol shapes are available in the Skey.pdf file in the
[Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.
114
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
PIPE
PIPE
(Blank)
ELBOW 90 LR BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
ELBOW 90 SR BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
ELBOW 90 REDUCING BUTTWELD
ELBOW-REDUCING
ERBW
ELBOW 45 BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
BEND 180 LR RETURN BUTTWELD
ELBOW
EUBW
BEND 180 SR RETURN BUTTWELD
ELBOW
EUBW
TEE STRAIGHT BUTTWELD
TEE
TEBW
TEE REDUCING BUTTWELD
TEE
TEBW
10
REDUCER CONCENTRIC BUTTWELD
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCBW
11
REDUCER ECCENTRIC BUTTWELD
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
REBW
12
CAP BUTTWELD
CAP
KABW
13
STRAIGHT CROSS BUTTWELD
CROSS
CRBW
14
REDUCING CROSS BUTTWELD
CROSS
CRBW
15
LATERAL BUTTWELD
TEE
TSBW
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
16
STUB END BUTTWELD
LAPJOINT-STUBEND
FLSE
17
LONG WELD NECK
FLANGE / NOZZLE
FLWN /
NZFS
18
FLANGE WELD NECK
FLANGE
FLWN
19
FLANGE SLIP ON
FLANGE
FLSJ
20
FLANGE BLIND
FLANGE-BLIND
FLBL
21
FLANGE LAP JOINT
FLANGE
FLLB
22
FLANGE SOCKET WELD
FLANGE
FLSW
23
FLANGE THREADED
FLANGE
FLSC
24
BOLT
BOLT
(Blank)
25
GASKET
GASKET
(Blank)
26
NIPPLE
COUPLING
NRSC
27
CONCENTRIC SWAGE
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
CSPL
28
ECCENTRIC SWAGE
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
ESPL
29
90 LR ELBOW SOCKET WELD
ELBOW
ELSW
30
90 STREET ELBOW SOCKET WELD
ELBOW
ELSW
31
90 REDUCING ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW-REDUCING
ERSW
32
45 ELBOW SOCKET WELD
ELBOW
ELSW
33
STRAIGHT TEE SOCKET WELD
TEE
TESW
34
REDUCING TEE SOCKET WELD
TEE
TESW
35
LATERAL SOCKET WELD
TEE
TSSW
36
STRAIGHT CROSS SOCKET WELD
CROSS
CRSW
37
REDUCING BUSHING SOCKET WELD
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
RBSC
38
CAP SOCKET WELD
CAP
KASW
39
COUPLING SOCKET WELD
COUPLING
COSW
40
HALF COUPLING SOCKET WELD
OLET
HCSW
41
UNION SOCKET WELD
UNION
UNSW
42
BLEED RING
MISC-COMPONENT
RP
43
90 LR ELBOW THREADED
ELBOW
ELSC
44
90 STREET ELBOW THREADED
ELBOW
ELSC
45
90 REDUCING ELBOW THREADED
ELBOW-REDUCING
ERSC
46
45 ELBOW THREADED
ELBOW
ELSC
115
ISOGEN Panel
116
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
47
STRAIGHT TEE THREADED
TEE
TESC
48
REDUCING TEE THREADED
TEE
TESC
49
LATERAL THREADED
TEE
TSSC
50
STRAIGHT CROSS THREADED
CROSS
CRSC
51
REDUCING BUSHING THREADED
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RBSC
52
CAP THREADED
CAP
KASC
53
COUPLING THREADED
COUPLING
COSC
54
HALF COUPLING THREADED
OLET
HCSC
55
UNION THREADED
UNION
UNSC
56
PLUG THREADED
MISC-COMPONENT
PL
57
SOCKET WELD ELL-O-LET
ELBOLET
CESW
58
THREADED ELL-O-LET
ELBOLET
CESC
59
WELD ELL-O-LET
ELBOLET
CEBW
60
SOCK-O-LET
OLET
SKSW
61
THREAD-O-LET
OLET
THSC
62
WELD-O-LET
OLET
WTBW
63
BALL VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD
VALVE
VBFL or
VBBW
64
BALL VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VBSW
65
BALL VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VBSC
66
BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE
VYFL or
VYBW
67
CHECK VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE
CKFL or
CKBW
68
CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
CKSW
69
CHECK VALVE THREADED
VALVE
CKSC
70
GATE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE
VTFL or
VTBW
71
GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VTSW
72
GATE VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VTSC
73
GLOBE VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE
VGFL or
VGBW
74
GLOBE VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VGSW
75
GLOBE VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VGSC
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
76
PLUG VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE
VPFL or
VPBW
77
PLUG VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VPSW
78
PLUG VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VPSC
79
RELIEF VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE-ANGLE
ARFL or
ARBW
80
RELIEF VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE-ANGLE
ARSW
81
RELIEF VALVE THREADED
VALVE-ANGLE
ARSC
82
NEEDLE VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VNSW
83
NEEDLE VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VNSC
84
3-WAY VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE-3WAY
V3FL or
V3BW
85
3-WAY VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE-3WAY
V3SW
86
3-WAY VALVE THREADED
VALVE-3WAY
V3SC
87
4-WAY FLANGED or BUTTWELD
VALVE-4WAY
V4FL or
V4BW
88
4-WAY SOCKET WELD
VALVE-4WAY
V4SW
89
4-WAY VALVE THREADED
VALVE-4WAY
V4SC
90
CONTROL VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
INSTRUMENT
CVFL
91
CONTROL VALVE SOCKET WELD
INSTRUMENT
CVSW
92
CONTROL VALVE THREADED
INSTRUMENT
CVSC
93
STRAINER FLANGED or BUTTWELD
FILTER
FIFL
94
STRAINER SOCKET WELD
FILTER
FISW
95
STRAINER THREADED
FILTER
FISC
96
ANGLE VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE-ANGLE
AVFL or
AVBW
97
ANGLE VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE-ANGLE
AVSW
98
ANGLE VALVE THREADED
VALVE-ANGLE
AVSC
99
GAGE VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VKSW
100
GAGE VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VKSC
101
SPECTACLE BLIND
MISC-COMPONENT
SB
102
EXPANSION BELLOWS
MISC-COMPONENT
EXFL
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
117
ISOGEN Panel
118
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
103 to
107
Symmetrical user shapes: NCFL

Non-symmetrical users shapes with two
points: NCFL
Non-symmetrical users shapes three or
more points: XVFL
MISC-COMPONENT
NCFL or
(NCFL) or
XVFL
MULTI-PORT-COMPONEN
T (XVFL)
108
ELBOW 22.5 BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
109
ELBOW 11.25 BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
110
WYE BW
TEE
TSBW
111
REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH

SOCKET WELD HUB
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCSW
112

THREADED HUB
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCSC
113
REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH SOCKET REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

WELD HUB
RESW
114
REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH

THREADED HUB
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
RESC
115
FLANGE REDUCING SO
FLANGE-REDUCING-CON FLRC
CENTRIC
116
FLANGE REDUCING THREADED
CENTRIC
117
FLANGE REDUCING WN
CENTRIC
118
COUPLING SOCKET WELD
COUPLING
COSW
119
COUPLING THREADED
COUPLING
COSC
120
LATERAL-O-LET SOCKET WELD
OLET
LASW
121
LATERAL-O-LET THREADED
OLET
LASC
122
LATERAL-O-LET WELD
OLET
LABW
123
NIP-O-LET THREADED
OLET
NISC
124
NIP-O-LET PLAIN
OLET
NIPL
125
PIPE FLANGED
PIPE-FIXED
FPFL
126
ELBOW 90 LR FLANGED
ELBOW
ELFL
127
ELBOW 45 FLANGED
ELBOW
ELFL
128
TEE STRAIGHT FLANGED
TEE
TEFL
129
REDUCER CONCENTRIC FLANGED
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCFL
130
REDUCER ECCENTRIC FLANGED
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
REFL
131
WYE FLANGED
TEE
TSFL
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
132
DIAPHRAGM VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VDSW
133
DIAPHRAGM VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VDSC
134
DIAPHRAGM VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE
VDFL or
VDBW
135
ROTARY VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VRSW
136
ROTARY VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VRSC
137
ROTARY VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE
VRFL or
VRBW
138
DUAL CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
CKSW
139
DUAL CHECK VALVE THREADED
VALVE
CKSC
140
DUAL CHECK VALVE FLANGED or

BUTTWELD
VALVE
CKFL or
CKBW
141
XBODY GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD
VALVE
VTSW
142
XBODY GATE VALVE THREADED
VALVE
VTSC
143
XBODY GATE VALVE BW
VALVE
VTFL
144
ELBOW 90 WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
ELBOW
EL**
145
ELBOW 90 REDUCING WITH SPECIAL ELBOW-REDUCING

END TYPES
ER**
146
ELBOW 45 WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
ELBOW
EL**
147
TEE STRAIGHT WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
TEE
TE**
148
TEE REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
TEE
TE**
149
CROSS WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
CROSS
CR**
150
CROSS REDUCING WITH SPECIAL

END TYPES
CROSS
CR**
151
LATERAL WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
TEE
TE**
152

SPECIAL END TYPES
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RC**
153
REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH

SPECIAL END TYPES
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
RE**
154
STUB WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
CONNECTOR
MPBW
155
WYE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
TEE
TS**
156
CAP WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
CAP
KA**
119
ISOGEN Panel
120
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
157
NUT WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
NUT (BNUT) or CLAMP

(CLMP)
BNUT or
CLMP
158
BALL VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE
VB**
159
BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH SPECIAL

END TYPES
VALVE
VY**
160
CHECK VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE
VC**
161
GATE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE
VT**
162
GLOBE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE
VG**
163
PLUG VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE
VP**
164
3-WAY VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE-3WAY
V3**
165
ANGLE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
VALVE-ANGLE
AV**
166
MULTIPORT 1 VALVE WITH SPECIAL

END TYPES
VALVE, VALVE-ANGLE,
VALVE-3WAY
ZG**, 2Z**,
3Z**
167

END TYPES
VALVE-MULTIWAY
MZ**
168

END TYPES
VALVE-MULTIWAY
MZ**
169
ELBOW 22.5 WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
BEND
BE**
170
ELBOW 11.25 WITH SPECIAL END

TYPES
BEND
BE**
171
LATERAL REDUCING WITH SPECIAL

END TYPES
TEE
TE**
172
U-BEND WITH SPECIAL END TYPES
Not exported
Not
exported
173
WELD GAP
WELD
WW
174 to 197
(Future Components)
198
GENERIC INSERT
Not exported
Not
exported
199
WELD GAP
WELD
WW
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
200
BENT PIPE
ELBOW, BEND
ELBW,
BUBW,
PBBW,
201
MITER PIPE
GAP
(Blank)
202
ROLLED PIPE
MISC-COMPONENT
FXBW
203
RESTRAINTS
SUPPORT
(Blank)
204
PAD or SADDLE
REINFORCEMENT-PAD
(Blank)
205
RIGID ELEMENT
GAP
(Blank)
206
SKIPPED ELEMENT
GAP
(Blank)
207
SPECIAL RIGID
GAP
(Blank)
208
TUBING
PIPE or BEND (PB)
(Blank) or
PB
209
STOP SIGN
ISO-SPLIT-POINT
(Blank)
210
TAP CONNECTION
TAP-CONNECTION
(Blank)
211
OFFSET TAP CONNECTION
TEE-SET-ON
TTSO
End Type Information

CADWorx special end type components are written to the PCF based on the end type used in
the data file.
CADWorx End Type
ISOGEN End Type
PL
BW
FL
LN
LN
MP
MP
MP
MP
CL
10
CL
11
CL
12
CL
13
CL
121
ISOGEN Panel
122
14
SW
15
SC
SECTION 5
LNum Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum
You can create and store line numbers in different configuration files for various requirements in
a variety of formats. There can be any number of categories within a line number.
When you start a new drawing, the line number system is not active by default.
Click Setup
to automatically assign line numbers when you place components. After you set
the line number in the current drawing, it remains set until you change it.
Command Name
Setup - Modifies line number configurations. For more
Command Line
NUMBERSETUP
Set - Sets line number from three different sources: a P&ID NUMBERSET
project, the current drawing, or a component that you
select. For more information, see Set (on page 125).
Count - Sets the present line number count value. For
more information, see Count (on page 126).
NUMBERCOUNT
Increment - Increases the line number count value. For

more information, see Increment (on page 127).
NUMBER+
Decrement - Decreases the line number count value. For

more information, see Decrement (on page 127).
NUMBER-
Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers to existing

components. For more information, see Assign (on page
127).
NUMBERASSIGN
Annotate - Labels components with existing line numbers.

For more information, see Annotate (on page 128).
NUMBERANNOTATE
Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a

component that you select. For more information, see Line
(on page 129).
COMP2LINE
Line Isolate - Isolates components based on their line

numbers or their specifications. For more information, see
Line Isolate (on page 129).
LINEISOLATE
123
LNum Panel
Setup
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Setup
Line Number toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Setup
Command line: NUMBERSETUP
Modifies any line number configuration. You can turn the line numbering system on or off. If the
system is on, it can operate in a static or dynamic mode.
In the dynamic mode, CADWorx adjusts the line number according to the size or specification.
In the static mode, you must manually change the size and specification. Static is useful when
all components and sizes of a particular piping run are required to have the same line number
(such as, the 3/4 vent on an 8 process line needs a line number of 8-150-2001-N). Static line
numbering is also useful when selecting runs of piping for other functions with CADWorx. For
more information, see LineNumberSystem (on page 37).
This system also works with a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file. You can change the
configuration file location in SETUP to use the same project configuration as any P&ID project.
For more information, see Setup (on page 26). Click Add in the Category group in this dialog
box to select additional fields located in the process lines table of a typical P&ID project
database. When using a P&ID project, changes made to a line number configuration within
CADWorx reflect within the P&ID project.
If the system is not using a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file, the additional fields are
obtained from the DATABASE.TBL file located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You
must manually edit this file for any modifications required of the existing fields within the default
line number system.
Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124)
Line Numbering System Dialog Box

Controls parameters for line numbering systems. The name of the current configuration file
displays at the top of the dialog box. You can also use a P&ID project configuration file.
Category - Specifies the active process line item. The list contains the process line items from
the Database.TBL file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You can add these items to
any line number system. After you select an item, click Add to place it in the Category list.
Highlight the item in the right list box, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number
system. You can also type in a value, and then click Add.
Add - Adds the item from the Category box to the Category list.
Delete - Removes the selected item from the Category list.
Separator - Specifies a separator character. Type an alphanumeric value (including special
characters such as -, ~, #, or SPACE). Click Add to place it in the Category list. Highlight the
item in the Category list, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number system.
Add - Adds the separator character to the Category list.
Delete - Removes the separator character from the Category list.
Default Value - Adds any default value to any category included in the Category list. The size
and specification are disabled if the system is set to the dynamic mode.
System Off - Indicates that line numbers are not placed in the drawing.
124
LNum Panel
System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) - Indicates that each component placed in the drawing
receives a line number. When this option is cleared, the line number is not placed on the
component.
System On (Static Size/Spec) - Indicates that the line number system uses the value in the
Default value box, including the size and specification. This allows you to type anything for the
size and specification.
Preview - Displays the line number based on the selected categories. The line number added to
components looks similar to the Preview value.
Move Up - Moves the selected item higher in the Category list. The new order also displays in
the Preview box.
Move Down - Moves the selected item lower in the Category list. The new order also displays
in the Preview box.
Set
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Set
Line Number toolbar: Set
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Set
Command line: NUMBERSET
Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a
selected component.
P&ID - Requires a valid CADWorx P&ID project using an Access database. If the configuration
file is the same as an existing P&ID project, this option automatically supplies all the line
numbers within that project from the process lines table. The line numbers supplied are of the
same format as the project. If the configuration file is not the same, a standard file dialog box
displays requesting the location of the database to use.
Current Drawing - Sets the line numbers based on the current drawing. This option searches
the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option
requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable is set to 2. This is the same as
selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box.
For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).
Component - Sets the line numbers based on a component that you select from the current
drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select
Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable is set to
2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line
Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box
(on page 124).
Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144)

Set line numbers based on a P&ID project (on page 126)

Set line numbers based on the current drawing (on page 126)
Set line numbers based on a component (on page 126)
125
LNum Panel
Set line numbers based on a P&ID project

1. Click Set
. Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER.
2. Type P on the command line and press ENTER, or select Process drawings from the
popup menu.
The Select Database File dialog box displays.
3. Select the P&ID Access database file.
4. Click Open on the Select Database File dialog box.
The software sets the line numbers.
Set line numbers based on the current drawing

1. Click Set
. Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER.
2. Type D on the command line and press ENTER, or select current Drawing from the popup
menu.
The Select Item dialog box displays.
3. If needed, use the Filter box to limit the items that display.
4. Select the item to use from the list.
5. Click OK.
Set line numbers based on a component

1. Click Set
. Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Type C on the command line and press ENTER, or select Component from the popup
menu.
3. Select the component in the drawing.
Count
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Count
Line Number toolbar: Count
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Count
Command line: NUMBERCOUNT
Sets the present line number count value.
same as selecting the System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering
System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page
124).
126
LNum Panel
Set the line count value

1. Click Count
. Alternatively, type NUMBERCOUNT on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Type the line count value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software sets the line count number.
Increment
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Increment
Line Number toolbar: Increment
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Increment
Command line: NUMBER+
Increases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0001, then
this increments it to 0002.
Decrement
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Decrement
Line Number toolbar: Decrement
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Decrement
Command line: NUMBERDecreases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0002, this
decrements it to 0001.
Assign
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Assign
Line Number toolbar: Assign
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Assign
Command line: NUMBERASSIGN
Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. In the static mode, the line
number is replaced exactly as it is previewed in the Setup dialog box. This means that a 3/4
line can be assigned a 8-150-2001-N line number. When in dynamic mode, the line number is
automatically adjusted and the 3/4 line receives a line number of 3/4-150-2001-N. This is
based on the present size and specification listed within the component's data.
When selecting a component with a line number already attached, a message appears. Select
Yes to assign the component the new line number. You can make your selection by window,
fence, or by individually selecting a component. During the process, a rubberband cursor
appears indicating which component is being assigned the new line number.
127
LNum Panel
Assign line numbers

1. Click Assign
. Alternatively, type NUMBERASSIGN on the command line, and press
ENTER.
Current line number is 4"-150-HWS-3001-N.
2. Select all the components requiring a new number.
3. Press ENTER to finish the selection process.
If the component already has a line number, a prompt appears confirming replacement.
Component has existing line number of 4"-150-HWS-3001-N
Replace with line number of 2"-150-HWS-3001-N
4. Type N on the command line and press ENTER, or select No from the popup menu to leave
the line numbers as they are.
Type Y on the command line and press ENTER, or select Yes from the popup menu to
replace the line numbers.
Type A on the command line and press ENTER, or select yes to All from the popup menu
to skip all future prompts and replace the line numbers.
The software assigns the line numbers.
Annotate
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Annotate
Line Number toolbar: Annotate
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Annotate
Command line: NUMBERANNOTATE
Labels components with existing line numbers. The text size is based upon the AutoCAD
environment variable TEXTSIZE and is placed on the default text layer. You can select
individual components to annotate. During the labeling process, a rubberband cursor appears
indicating which component is being labeled.
Label components with line numbers

1. Click Annotate
. Alternatively, type NUMBERANNOTATE on the command line, and
press ENTER.
2. Select the components to annotate.
3. Select the point for the annotation.
4. Select the direction for the annotation, or type the angle for the annotation on the command
line and press ENTER.
The software places the annotation.
128
LNum Panel
Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Line
Setting toolbar: Line
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Line
Command line: COMP2LINE
Sets the current line number by selecting a component with the required line number. Any
components created after running this command use the new line number.
same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System
dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).
Set the current line number to that of a component

1. Click Line
. Alternatively, type COMP2LINE on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a component in the drawing.
CADWorx displays the line number.
Line Isolate
Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate
Command line: LINEISOLATE
Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. You can use this
command to isolate an entire line number or to isolate one line number and include surrounding
buildings or equipment. It can also turn off any isolation of components or surrounding
equipment and building.
Isolate - Isolates only components with particular specifications or line numbers. This option
hides all objects including non-CADWorx objects in the drawing. To make them visible again,
run this command again and select the Show all option.
Partial isolate - Works similar to the Isolate option, except that it leaves the surrounding
graphics (building, equipment, dimensions, and so on) visible. This option has the same
additional options as Isolate.
Show all - Turns off any isolation and makes all objects in the drawing visible.
Spec - Lists all specs used in the model. You can select one or more specifications to isolate.
Line number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing. You can select one or more line
numbers to isolate.
List - Displays a dialog box listing either the specifications or line numbers within the drawing.
You can select one or more items using the standard Windows selection methods.
Select component - Select a component in the drawing.
129
LNum Panel
130
SECTION 6
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

CADWorx Plant I tab > Steel BOM DB Panel
Command Description
Command line
BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style BOMSETUP
or layout that you need. For more information, see Bill of Material
Setup (on page 132).
Cut BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece BOMCUT
of pipe with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Pipe
Bill of Material (on page 134).
Total BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for BOMTOTAL
a total length of pipe in each size. For more information, see Total
Pipe Bill of Material (on page 136).
Single BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each
BOMSINGLE
selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single
Pipe Bill of Material (on page 138).
Export BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an
external file format that you specify. For more information, see
Export Pipe Bill of Material (on page 139).
BOMEXPORT
Import BOM - Imports a database into a Bill a Material schedule.

For more information, see Import Pipe Bill of Material (on page
141).
BOMIMPORT
Delete BOM - Deletes all entities designated for Bill of Material.

For more information, see Delete Bill of Material (on page 141).
BOMDELETE
Tag Toggle - Turns on and off the placement of tags. For more
information, see Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 141).
TAGTOGGLE
Tag Location - Moves a tag. For more information, see Tag

Location (on page 141).
TAGRELOCATE
Insert Tag - Places a tag on the drawing without having to run a

Bill of Material. For more information, see Insert Tag (on page
142).
TAGINSERT
Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. LIVEDB

For more information, see Setup Live Database (on page 142).
Export Pipe - Exports CADWorx component information to a
DBFGEN
Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see
Export Pipe (on page 143).
Import Pipe - Imports and draws CADWorx components from a
DBFIN
Import Pipe (on page 145).
131
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Audit Pipe Database - Maintains the database for each
component in the drawing that has data attached. For more
information, see Audit Pipe Database (on page 145).
DBAUDIT
Synchronize - Checks all components in the drawing and updates SYNC

them according to the current value in the database. For more
information, see Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 146).
C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected pipe CG
members. For more information, see C.G. Generator (on page
147).
Bill of Material Setup

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Setup
Command line: BOMSETUP
Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog
box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user
specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of over 30
different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.
Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.
Use the Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 141) command to turn the tags on and off in the
schedule.
Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box

Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the
configuration file listed at the top of the dialog.
Database Columns Available - Lists all the information that you can include in the BOM. These
columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
There are six special columns: USER1, USER2, USER3, USER4, USER5, UNIT. These
columns are blank in the BOM. You can manually enter data after the BOM is generated.
PT4_X, PT4_Y and PT4 _Z are the world coordinate system location of the approximate center
point of the component.
BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of
appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order
to set the order by which these columns are sorted.
Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the Database Columns Available and
BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking
the column name in the list.
Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column.
Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down
or start at the bottom and work its way up.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM.
Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM.
132
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of
the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order.
Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column.
Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column.
Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of pipe components in the BOM. For
more information, see BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 134).
Add or remove properties from BOM (on page 133)

Change the column order (on page 133)
Change text alignment in columns (on page 133)
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation (on page 134)
Add or remove properties from BOM

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup
You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line.

The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.
2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the Database Columns
Available list.
Use the Column title and Column width boxes to define the column heading text and
the column width respectively.
3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns
Selected list.
4. Click OK.
Change the column order


2. Select the column to move in the BOM Columns Selected list.
3. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the column order. The column order in the list top
to bottom is the column order in the BOM from left to right.
4. Click OK.
Change text alignment in columns

2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list.
Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column.
Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected
column.
Click OK.
133
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Click Sort Order.
The BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays.
Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list.
Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM.
Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how
information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger
numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z
to A.
Click OK on the BOM Sort Order dialog box.
Click OK on the Bill of Material Setup dialog box.
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box

Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list
are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth.
Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted.
This dialog box also controls the accumulation of piping components. If two valves have different
TAG values and you do not want these to accumulate, then you need to add TAG to the BOM
Columns Selected list.
BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort
the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add.
BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their
sort order from top to bottom.
Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM
Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking on the
column name in the list.
Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting
from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.
If you want the BOM to sort from large size piping to small size piping, use Descending for
MAIN_NOM and RED_NOM.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click
Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.
Cut Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Cut
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Cut
Command line: BOMCUT
134
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of pipe with a length and a tag. Identical
items are accumulated in the quantity column.
Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set,
the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of
tags.
Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The
software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag
location. You must continue specifying locations until the last components tag has been placed.
Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space,
CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this
prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see
BomTagOptimize (on page 32).
The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger
than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation
stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in
the Configuration Settings.
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).
Cut BOM using Automatic placement (on page 135)

Cut BOM using Manual placement (on page 136)
Cut BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut
You can also type BOMCUT in the command line.

2. Select the Automatic placement option.
3. Enter the placement angle for the tag.
4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule.
135
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

5. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.
The BOM is generated.
Cut BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type BOMCUT in the command line.

Select the Manual placement option.
Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule.
Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.
Specify the tag location for each component you selected.
Total Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Total
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Total
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Total
Command line: BOMTOTAL
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of pipe in each size. Identical
long annotation items are accumulated in the length column.
Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.
tags.
136
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Total BOM using Automatic placement (on page 137)

Total BOM using Manual placement (on page 137)
Total BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line.

Select the Automatic placement option.
Enter the placement angle for the tag.
are finished.
Total BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line.

are finished.
137
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Single Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Single
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Single
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Single
Command line: BOMSINGLE
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the
schedule.
tags.
138
Single BOM using Automatic placement (on page 139)

Single BOM using Manual placement (on page 139)
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Single BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line.

are finished.
Single BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line.

are finished.
Export Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Export
Command line: BOMEXPORT
Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The
schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). CADWorx
can export the Bill of Material schedules to:
Access file (*.mdb)
Excel file (*.xls)
Text file (*.txt)
HTML file (*.htm)
When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a
single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in
Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard
selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from
text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be
totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension
Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.
An additional command called BOMEXTERNAL is available to export a project database
to a file based on the columns chosen in the BOMSETUP.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export
139
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
140
You can also type BOMEXPORT in the command line.

Specify if you want an Cut, Total, or Single BOM.
Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.
In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want.
Type the file name, and specify the folder location.
Click Save.
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Import Pipe Bill of Material

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Import
Command line: BOMIMPORT
Imports a database into a Bill of Material schedule on the present drawing. The schedule is
generated using the BOMSETUP parameters, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). You can
import only Access files (*.mdb) formats created with the DBFGEN command. For more
information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).
This command cannot be used to import data from the files generated with the BOMEXPORT
command because BOMEXPORT exports only partial field information. BOMIMPORT command
expects all the fields to be present.
1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Import.
You can also type BOMIMPORT in the command line.
2. Specify if you want an Cut length, Total length, or Single item BOM.
3. Select to use the current database or to select another database. The current database
displays in the command line area.
4. Select the upper right corner location of the Bill of Material in the drawing.
Delete Bill of Material

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Delete
Command line: BOMDELETE
Deletes all entities that are on the layer designated for Bill of Materials in the current
configuration settings. This option cannot be used for deleting partial tags or for deleting the
schedule only.
1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Delete.
You can also type BOMDELETE in the command line.
Tag Toggle Bill of Material

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle
Command line: TAGTOGGLE
Toggle Bill of Material tags in the schedule on and off.
1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle.
You can also type TAGTOGGLE in the command line.
Tag Location
Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Location
Command line: TAGRELOCATE (EQUIPTAGRELOCATE in CADWorx Equipment)
Relocates a tag. This command is useful when tags are placed on top of each other. Optionally,
this command deletes the connector line from the item mark to the component. This is useful
when multiple items are required for one location, such as gaskets and bolts associated with a
flange.
Tags and the associated leader lines are grouped. This makes them easier to
manipulate. You can use the AutoCAD Group command to un-group the items and manually
rearrange them.
141
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Insert Tag
Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Insert
Command line: TAGINSERT (EQUIPTAGINSERT in CADWorx Equipment)
Places tags on the drawing without having to run the main Bill of Material generator. The tag is
scaled according to the present text size.
Setup Live Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Setup
Command line: LIVEDB
CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the
database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a
configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that
configuration file using a live database or not.
When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that
component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the
drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then
the item is deleted from the database.
All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.
On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are
updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the
database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.
Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the
type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.
Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create
the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an
existing database.
SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database
information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide
for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the
Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.
Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in
the Schema box.
Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.
No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in
the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved
immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with
the appropriate configuration file.
No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the
database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.
Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or
not.
Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for
Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).
142
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Export Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Export
Command line: DBFGEN
Exports CADWorx component information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
When using live database, this command updates the appropriate database setup for the
drawing.
Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a
Microsoft Excel file.
Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of
the dialog display the file name and folder in use.
Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the
database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database
according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to
maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database
file at the same time.
New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
You can also type DBFGEN in the command line.

Select Line Number to select components using line numbers.
Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item
or
Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any
other preferred method.
Select the components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.
The Select Database Type dialog box displays.
Select Access or Excel to define the file type.
Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.
Select New if you are creating a new file.
or
Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file.
Click OK.
If live database is being used, the prompt Continue to update live database? [Yes/No]
<Yes>: displays.
Click Yes to update the database.
or
Click No to stop updating the live database.
143
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Select Item Dialog Box

Lists all the line number or specifications in the drawing (or database). You can select multiple
items using the CTRL or SHIFT keys.
Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.
Wildcards
Character
Used to
# (pound)
Matches any single numeric digit
@ (at)
Matches any single alphabetic character
. (period)
Matches any single non-alphanumeric character
* (asterisk)
Matches any character sequence, including an empty one, and it can

be used anywhere in the search pattern: beginning, middle, or end
? (question mark) Matches any single character

~ (tilde)
If it is the first character in the pattern, it matches anything except the

pattern
[...]
Matches any one of the characters enclosed
[~...]
Matches any single character not enclosed
- (hyphen)
Used inside brackets to specify a range for a single character
, (comma)
Separates two patterns
` (reverse quote)
Escapes special characters (reads next character literally)
In the example below, lines with 2C or A1 display for selection.
144
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Import Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Import
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Import
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Import
Command line: DBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This
command is not available when you are using a live database.
You can select one or more drawings to import. CADWorx then draws the imported components
in single line mode. These can be converted to any other modes using the Mode Convert (on
page 70) tools available.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Import
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type DBFIN in the command line.

Browse to and select the file to import.
Click Open.
The Select Item dialog box displays.
Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing.
Click OK.
Audit Pipe Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Audit
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Audit
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Audit
Command line: DBAUDIT
Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this
command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the
drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the
option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Audit
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type DBAUDIT in the command line.

Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing.
Click Open.
The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays.
If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays.
If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to
delete the row. Select No to ignore the row.
145
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Synchronize Pipe Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Synchronize
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Synchronize
Command line: SYNC
Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the
database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that
are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database (on page
142) before using this command.
When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the
ALPHA_SIZE, SHORT_DESC, LONG_DESC, TAG, LINE_NUM, DB_CODE, and WEIGHT
values in the PIPE table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the
drawing.
If the SPEC_FILE column value is changed, the values in the other columns listed above are
ignored. The SPEC_FILE column value must be changed to an existing valid specification. The
column values listed above are updated according to the information derived from the
specification. When a specification is changed, it must match the base rating of the specification.
For example, changing a component from a 150 lb rated specification to a 300 lb rated
specification causes discontinuity within the drawing. This discontinuity does not present itself
until a mode convert is performed on the component.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize
You can also type SYNC in the command line.

2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.
146
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
C.G. Generator
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > C.G. Generator
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: C.G. Generator
Plant menu: Accessory > C.G. Generator
Command line: CG
This routine provides center of gravity calculations for components drawn in X,Y planes (2D
plans) or in X,Y,Z planes (3D Model). It does not provide center of gravity locations for
equipment and other miscellaneous items that do not have a centerline xdata. You can use a
generic attach (from Plant>Toolbars>Misc) which provides the center of gravity location and
weight.
Selection can be done by crossing, window, or selecting individual component centerlines.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator
.
or
Select objects:
99 found (not necessarily the number of components)
44 were filtered out.
Select objects: select more or enter to end
The next option writes the information to an external file. You can hit enter for no file or enter a
file name.
Enter name of file or enter for none: C:\CG\32-002.CGC
View file [Yes/No] <Yes>: enter to view items
If you answered yes to the preceding prompt, they are able to view the contents of the file name
above. If you just hit enter at the prompt asking for a file name, no file written, they are still be
able to view the contents of CADWorx's default file. A list of items scrolls by of each component
found. It is best to write to a file, then view it with a text editor (NOTEPAD).
Total count...55 items
Listing...finished
Items....
Weight Sum =
1759.22 lb
Sum (X * W) =
44829.7300 ft-lb
Sum (Y * W) =
25511.6400 ft-lb
Sum (Z * W) =
4750.8520 ft-lb
The Center of Gravity X,Y,Z is 25.4827 ft 14.5017 ft 2.7005 ft
Insert drawing marker [Yes/No] <Yes>:
To combine center of gravity reports from steel and piping components, take the weight
summations and add them together. Take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add them
together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the total
weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight.
147
Pipe BOM / DB Panel
148
SECTION 7
Misc Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc
Command Name
Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For
more information, see Auto Connect (on page 150).
Command Line
CONNECTOG
Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the

GROUPTOG
centerline of the component with the accompanying
graphics. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page
150).
Weld Size - Sets the default size of the weld dots that
accompany single line components. For more information,
see Weld Size (on page 151).
WELDSIZE
Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn TOPWORKSADD
in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on
page 151)
Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or
deletes top works already associated with a valve. For
more information, see Top Works Change (on page 151).
TOPWORKSCHANGE
System Out - Creates a CAESAR II input file. For more

information, see System Out (on page 152).
C2OUT
Create - Creates symmetrical or non-symmetrical user

shape components. For more information, see User
Shapes (on page 153).
USERCREATE
Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic

AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see
Generic Attach (on page 173).
GENERIC
System In - Reads a CAESAR II input file. For more

information, see System In (on page 174).
C2IN
Elbow Centerline - Turns on or off elbow centerlines for

use with isometrics. For more information, see Elbow
Centerline (on page 175).
ELBOWCL
ISO Flag - Sets a flag in the component indicating that the

present stored length should be used regardless of what
type of length modifications are made to the pipe
component. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page
175).
ISOFLAG
149
Misc Panel
Dim Adjustment - Adjusts a dimension when the pipe
DIMADJUST
segments of a particular run have been adjusted or
modified with the ISO flag command. For more information,
see Dim Adjustment (on page 175).
System Visibility - Turns on or off visibility of components
usually located on the system layer. For more information,
see System Visibility (on page 177).
SYSVIS
Auto Connect
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Auto Connect
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Connect
Settings toolbar:
Command line: CONNECTTOG
Turns automatic connection on or off. Auto connection provides minimum prompts and makes
certain assumptions.
The last component placed in the drawing provides the starting point for the next
component. The direction of the last component indicates the direction of the new
component.
If you select a component which requires a second direction, such as an elbow, or tee, there
are additional prompts requesting the direction.
Typical elbow - Prompts you for a direction.
Pipe with an arbitrary length - Prompts you for an end point.
Elbow pointing up or down - Prompts you for a direction.
This is useful for placing components down a line. It can dramatically decrease the time required
to place components in assemblies, such as control valve bypass loops.
If you have run any type of mode conversion, the last point is not available. The software
prompts you to pick the starting point.
Auto Connect does not work in conjunction with Router (on page 191).
Group On/Off
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Group On/Off
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Group On/Off
Settings toolbar:
Command line: GROUPTOG
Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics.
This is useful for selecting any piece of the component rather than only the centerline. By
default, grouping is turned on.
150
Misc Panel
Weld Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Weld Size
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Weld Size
Command line: WELDSIZE
Specifies the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. This
command also allows for the change of weld dots already placed in the drawing.
Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe (on page 151)
Change all of the weld dots on a drawing
Change individual weld dots
Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe

1. Click Weld Size
. Alternatively, type WELDSIZE on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Type the new weld size on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software changes the weld dot size.
Top Works Add

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Add
Operators toolbar: Top Works Add
Command line: TOPWORKSADD
Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model.
Top Works Change

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Change
Operators toolbar: Top Works Change
Command line: TOPWORKSCHANGE
Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve.
151
Misc Panel
System Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: MISC > System Out
Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System Out
Command line: C2OUT
Creates a CAESAR II input file. This input file can then be used in CAESAR II without any
modification. Components selected in the drawing convert to the appropriate elements for the
stress model. For example, a tee connected to pipe in all directions is represented with one
node at the intersection instead of four (three at the ends and one at the intersection). This
provides the stress analyst a model that is ready for use. All pertinent information is transferred
(weights, wall thickness, and so on).
The selection process in the drawing environment is available in two ways. The first requires
selecting the components with the standard selection processes in AutoCAD. This can include
selection by crossing, window or any other preferred method. The second selection process
allows the selection by line number or selecting a component with an existing line number. The
database option is not available with this command.
Generate a CAESAR II input file

1. Click System Out
. Alternatively, type C2OUT on the command line, and press ENTER.
The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays.
2. Specify the location and file name for the file, and click Save.
or
Provide start locations [Yes/No] <No>
5. Select Yes to provide a start and direction, or select No to process all of the components.
6. Press ENTER to finish the selection.
Example
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the starting point at node 10.

Select anywhere along the centerline toward node 90 for a direction.
Select the intersection at 30, and then select a direction toward 50.
Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 50.
Select the intersection at 50 and then select a direction toward 70.
You could let CAESAR II automatically node the rest of the model, or you could finish by
manually selecting the next point at 30 and then selecting a direction toward 90.
7. Select a point at 50 and then select a direction toward 110.
8. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 150.
152
Misc Panel
Make sure Ortho is off, and use OSnap NEArest to pick along centerlines for directions.
User Shapes
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Create
Misc toolbar: Create
Command line: USERCREATE
Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. Symmetrical shapes require
you to draw an outline that can be used to create the user component. Non-symmetrical shapes
require a block or an object completely drawn in 2D and 3D that represents the complete
component. A symmetrical object can be converted from 2D to 3D Mode, or vice versa, using
the mode convert (on page 70) commands. It does not allow double-line to single-line
conversion in 2D mode. Non-symmetrical shapes can only convert between isometric and solids
(Convert Isometric (on page 71) or 3D Solids (on page 71)).
1. Create the component.
2. Modify the specification.
153
Misc Panel
3. Click Create
, or type USERCREATE on the command line and press ENTER.
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
Each dialog box option is explained below.
User shape components can also be tagged as optional components in the specification. This
allows for an infinite number of additional components.
For symmetrically shaped components, draw a 2D polyline indicating the outline of the shape.
The symmetrical shape is limited to straight lines between vertices in the polyline. In other
words, there cannot be a fillet radius on any corner of the polyline. If fillets exist, the routine
draws them with chamfered corners. Draw only half of the shape on one side of the centerline.
We recommend preparing an outline before trying to draw the polyline. For example, draw the
component using standard AutoCAD methods or CADWorx components, and then draw a
polyline around the contour.
For symmetrical shapes, the polyline may overlap as shown in the example below for 2D
solids (drawn to each indicated point, PT1, PT2, and so on). For use with 3D solids, the polyline
cannot overlap (there cannot be a PT4 or PT7). If the polyline overlaps, an ACIS error occurs
indicating the object cannot be revolved.
For non-symmetrically shaped components, you must first create a 2D and 3D representation.
This representation needs to show all the required details of the component. The 3D
representation is used when in the 3D drawing mode. It can be used for orthographic and
model-type representation. The 2D representation is used when in the 2D isometric drawing
mode.
After the polyline or components are complete, click Create
. This creates a data file in the
required folder with the required file name. For non-symmetrically shaped components, it also
creates two drawing files: one 2D and one 3D. The drawing names have appended in square
brackets, the size and drawing mode (for example, [4.0-3D]). The file name must be unique.
User Shapes are stored in Product Folder]\Plant\Spec\UserShape_I. You can change were User
Shapes are stored under Folder Settings in the Define User Shape dialog box.
Make sure to set a default size and specification first. Create
creating components with different sizes.
must be run multiple times for
Component Setup
Name - Specifies the name of the user shape. There is a 20 character limit.
Number - Specifies the number of the user shape. Select a number in the range of 1 to 5.
Specification - Sets the specification for the user shape.
Assign to Spec - Assigns the user shape to other specifications.
Save to Catalog - Saves the user shape to the catalog.
Folder Settings
Folder - Defines the save location for the user shape.
Browse - Enables you to search the computer folders for a specific location.
154
Misc Panel
Define Size and Geometry
Type - Sets the type selection for the user shape.
Block - Specifies a block to form the shape. If the component is created on layer 0, it
inherits the specification color when inserted. This option requires a fully developed
component drawn to the correct size with AutoCAD or CADWorx. The software removes
any attached extended entity data. This option is used with non-symmetrical
components.
Select Polyline - Specifies a polyline to form the shape. The software automatically
extracts all the points from the selected polyline. You must first select the reference and
end points. This option is used with symmetrical components.
Pick Point - Specifies each point required to form the shape. You must first select the
reference and end points (PT1 and PT37 in the following figure). This option is used
with symmetrical components. Press ENTER to end the sequence.
Main Size - Sets the main size of the user shape.

Reduction Size - Sets the reduction size of the user shape.
Select 3D Solid - Creates 3D user shapes.
Select 2D Double Line - Creates 2D double line user shapes.
Select 2D Single Line - Creates 2d single line user shapes.
Define Connections - Defines the end type connection for the user shape. You can select
Buttweld, Socket, Threaded, or Flanges. The user shape must have been previously selected
with either Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line.
If the component is less than 1/16" long (2 mm when in metric mode), the associated xdata is in
an inserted block named XATB. It is located on the default layer named SYSTEM instead of the
CL layer so that it does not plot or display while this layer is turned off.
If the component is non-symmetrical, there is an inserted block named NATB located at the start
point. This block, like the XATB block, contains all the associated xdata and acts as any other
component.
When a 2D representation of a non-symmetrical component is not present (that is, only the 3D
representation option is used) and the component is converted to the 3D mode, the NATB
remains. This block can be converted to 2D but does not have any graphics in the 3D mode.
The NATB and XATB blocks can be moved and controlled just as any other CADWorx
component.
155
Misc Panel
Spec Properties
BOM Type - Sets the bill of material type for the user shape.
Color - Sets the color of the user shape.
Layer - Sets the layer for the user shape. This setting defaults to the layer named as the
specification in the Define User Shape dialog box.
Material - Sets the material type of the user shape.
Density - Sets the density of the user shape.
Weight - Sets the weight of the user shape
Length - Sets the length of the user shape.
Sort Sequence - Sets the sort sequence of the user shape.
Optional Component - Sets the user shape as an optional component.
With the use of optional components, a specification file can have an unlimited number of
user shapes.
Description
Long - Describes the component in long format.
Short - Describes the component in short format.
Tag - Tags the user shape with the entered information.
Notes - Sets other information about the user shape.
Isogen Symbol Information

Identifier - Identifies the isogenic information for the component.
SKEY - Sets the SKEY for the user shape.
Rating
Component Class - Sets the specification class for the user shape.
Temperature Rating - Sets the highest temperature allowed for the user shape.
Pressure Rating - Sets the highest pounds per square inch allowed for the component.
Define User Shape Dialog Box buttons

OK - Creates the user shape.
Cancel - Cancels creation of the user shape.
Help - Displays the online help file.
When placing non-symmetrical user shapes

Up - Rolls the component by 90 degrees. This option turns the component up if the
non-symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion.
Down - Rolls the component by 90 degrees. This option turns the component down if the
non-symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion.
Roll - Allows the non-symmetrical user shape to be rolled at any angle. When the component
has been flipped with one of the mirror options, the angle may need to be negative. If the rolled
angle input is incorrect, retype the angle as a negative to correct it. When the component has
been turned up or down with one of the options above, rolling is from that location.
156
Misc Panel
mirrorX - Mirrors the non-symmetrical user shape along the X-axis. After a shape has been
mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component
back in its original position.
mirrorY - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Y-axis. After a shape has been
mirrorZ - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Z-axis. After a shape has been
<Pick rotation> - Rotates the nonsymmetrical user shape by the angle you specify. This option
causes the command to exit, and the options above become unavailable. This should be the last
option chosen.
Create a user shape file (on page 157)

Edit an existing user shape (on page 158)
Create a user shape from points (on page 162)
Create a user shape from a polyline (on page 164)
Create a user shape from a block (on page 165)
Create a 3D user shape (on page 167)
Create a 2D user shape (on page 168)
Create a 2D single line user shape (on page 170)
Add a user shape to a specification (on page 171)
Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172)
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172)
Create a user shape file

1. Click Create
. Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box.
3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5.
4. Select a specification in the Specification list.
5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box.
6.
7.
8.
9.
This is the default setting.

Select the type of the user shape in the Type list.
Select the main size in the Main Size list.
If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.
The Reducing Size list becomes available.
Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file.

10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the
prompts.
157
Misc Panel
11. Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
12. Select a direction in the drawing.
Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
13. Select an end type for the user shape.
Pick connection 1 or <Enter to finish>.
14. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted and then press
ENTER when finished.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the

nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and
affect the scaling if not properly selected.
Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.
Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
Type the density of the component in the Density box.
Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
Type the length of the component in the Length box.
Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
Select Optional Component to make this component an optional component.
Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
Type the short description in the Short box.
Type the tag information in the Tag box.
Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
Type the component class in the Component Class box.
Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information
on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).
Edit an existing user shape

1. Click Create
ENTER.
2. Select the name of the user shape, you want to modify, in the Name box.
158
Misc Panel
The software auto-populates the boxes with the information you used when you initially
created the shape.
3. Change any other data as needed.
4. When finished making changes to the file, click OK.
The software updates the user shape.
Edit by redefining connection points

Command line: EDITUSERSHAPE
Enables you to redefine connection points on user shapes.
When you import legacy user shape data, the software may not map the connection
points. Use EDITUSERSHAPE to define the user shape connection points.
1. Type EDITUSERSHAPE on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select the user shape to edit.
3. Select connection points for each point you want to change, and then select an end type.
4. Changing the connections points and end types, and then press ENTER to finish.
The connection points update in the drawing and the catalog, with routing points added to
the user shape.
ISOGEN Export Options

Select connection points based on the images below, where one is the first pick, two is the
second pick, and so on. For MISC-COMPONENT-OFFSET, point 1 and point 2 are required.
Point 3 and Point 4 are optional.
PCF Identification Valid SKEY Connection Connection Points Order

Points
NUT
BNUT
159
Misc Panel
160
SUPPORT
4 blank
chars
CAP
KA**
MISC-COMPONEN
T-RETURN
BR**
Misc Panel
TEE
TE**, TS**
VALVE-3WAY
V3**
MISC-COMPONEN
T-ANGLE
BA**
161
Misc Panel
CROSS
CR**
MISC-COMPONEN
T-OFFSET
BO**
Create a user shape from points

1. Click Create
ENTER.
6. Select Pick Points in the Type list.
7. Click Select.
Pick point.
162
Misc Panel
8. Select points on the drawing based on the following graphic.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Pick insertion point.

Select an insertion point on the shape.
Pick end point.
Select an end point on the drawing.
If reducing is selected as the insertion point you receive the following prompt. If not skip to
step 12.
Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]<No>.
Select the required option.
Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld end type>.
Set End Type at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld end type>.
Select the main size in the Main Size list.
If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.
Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. For more information, see User Shapes
(on page 153).
Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
163
Misc Panel
27. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
28. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Click OK.
Create a user shape from a polyline

1. Click Create
ENTER.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Select Polyline in the Type list.
Click Select.
Select polyline.
Select the polyline that defines the shape.
The Selection dialog box displays.
Pick insertion point.
Select the insertion point on the model.
Pick end point.
Select the end point on the model.
The prompt below only displays if you have a reducing component in the user shape.
Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]<No>.
12. Select the required option.
Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
13. Select the required option.
Set EndType at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End Type>.
14. Select the main size in the Main Size list.
164
Misc Panel
15. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.
16. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.

Click OK.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more
information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing
(on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).
Create a user shape from a block

1. Click Create
ENTER.
6. Select Block from the Type list.
165
Misc Panel
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
166

Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the
prompts.
Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
Select a direction in the drawing.
Type>.
Select an end type for the connection.
Select a connection point on the drawing.
Pick direction.
Type>.
Select an end type for the connection.
Press ENTER to finish.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.

31.
32.
33.
34.
Misc Panel
35. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
36. Click OK.
Create a 3D user shape

1. Click Create
ENTER.
6. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list.
8. If the component reduces, click the Reducing check box.
10. Click Select 3D Solid.
Select 3D solid representation.
11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower
right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish
selection.
Pick insert point.
12. Select an insertion point on the component.
Pick direction.
Type>.
16. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted, and then press
17. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.
167
Misc Panel
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.

Click OK.
Create a 2D user shape

1. Click Create
ENTER.
10. Click Select 2D Double Line.
Select 2D double line representation.
168
Misc Panel
11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower
selection.
Pick insert point.
12. Select an insertion point on the component.
Pick direction.
Type>.
16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.

Click OK.
169
Misc Panel
Create a 2D single line user shape

1. Click Create
ENTER.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
170

Click Select 2D Single Line.
Select 2D single line representation.
Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower
selection.
Pick insert point.
Select an insertion point on the component.
Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
Type>.
Select an end type for the user shape.
If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press
Misc Panel
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Click OK.
Add a user shape to a specification

Adds a user shape to the specification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If Spec Editor is already displayed skip to step 2.

Click Start Spec Editor
on the spec view palette. Alternatively, click Spec Editor on the
desktop.
The Specification Editor software opens.
Click File > Open.
The Open File dialog box displays.
Select a catalog, and then click Open.
The Catalog Data window displays.
Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder.
The Data Tables list displays.
5. Right-click User Shapes, and select Add Data Table

The New Usershape Table displays.
6. Type the name of the table in the Name box.
7. Select a user type in the Type list.
8. Select a size table in the Size Table list.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
You can select and clear multiple sizes by clicking the Size Table ellipsis.
Select the Reducing Component check box if you want this to be a reducing component.
Type the user shape folder name in the Usershape Folder box.
Type the part number in the Part Number box.
Type the description of the user shape in the Description box.
Click OK.
171
Misc Panel
The user shape file appears under the User Shape category in the Data Tables folder, and
also to the right of Catalog Data, in the Main Table List View.
14. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.
You can now enter information for the specifics of the user shape that you have
added to this specification catalog. For more information, see Add a new data table in
CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.
Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing

1. Click and hold Create
on the Misc toolbar.
A list of numbered buttons displays.
2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place.

3. Select a point in the drawing.
4. Select a direction in the drawing, or type Up or Down.
The software places the shape in the drawing.
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing

1. Click and hold Create
on the Misc toolbar.
A list of numbered buttons displays.
2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place.

3. Select the start point for the shape in the drawing.
4. Select the rotation option that meets your requirements.
172
Misc Panel
Generic Attach
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Generic Attachment
Misc toolbar: Generic Attach
Command line: GENERIC
Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information
later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a
component, use this routine to attach xdata information.
You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component.
To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place
information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and
pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.
Place a generic attachment in the drawing

1. Click Generic Attachment
. Alternatively, type GENERIC on the command line, and
press ENTER.
The Generic Attach dialog box displays.
2. Alpha Size auto-populates with the main size already selected when you set up the
drawing. Type the alpha size in the Alpha size box if you need to change it.
3. Type an abbreviated description, such as PUMP 2X1X8, in the Short annotation box.
4. Type a complete description, such as PUMP, INGERSOLL-RAND, MODEL HOC, 2X1X8, in
the Long annotation box.
5. Type a line number in the Line number box, if you want to assign a line number to the
component.
6. Type the tag in the Tag box.
7. Type the code in the Code box, if you want to assign a code to the component.
8. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
9. Type the sort sequence number for the bill of material schedule location in the Sort
sequence box.
10. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
11. Change the Coordinates if available and needed.
12. Select Existing in the Miscellaneous column, if needed.
13. Change the BOM Item Type, if needed.
14. If BOM Mark Point is available, change as needed.
15. Click Attach.
Select an entity.
16. Select the object to attach the information.
The software attaches the information to the object, and a red arrow displays indicating
where you attached the information.
Select another entity or Enter to stop.
17. Select other objects as needed, and press ENTER when finished.
The software attaches the information to the object.
173
Misc Panel
System In
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > System In
Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System In
Command line: C2IN
Reads a CAESAR II input file. You must select the necessary ._A or .C2 file. This is the input file
created by CAESAR II or the output facility in CADWorx. After you select the input file, a dialog
box indicating that the file was read displays.
Make sure that the CAESARVersion (on page 34) startup variable is set to match your
CAESAR II installation. If this variable is set to 3.2, and the C2IN command is issued on a file
created or modified with CAESAR II 4.40, then an error message displays indicating that the
valid file is corrupt.
The next prompt requires that a specification be set. Although, there might be an existing
specification set, confirmation or a new specification is required. The specification might not be
used. The input facility in CADWorx attempts to determine the proper specification for the
component being input from data in the CAESAR II input file. The input facility or the data in the
input file does not always indicate a specification. Therefore, a default specification needs to be
set for these components.
Caesar - Derives the descriptive information within any new components from the material
passed back from CAESAR II and the name of the purposed component located in the
PRGM.TBL file. This file is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. The system
automatically assigns all the required paths for data files which might be used later for
reconstruction (such as mode conversion). If the material was not supplied in CAESAR II, then
this option uses the description from the specification but does not populate the line number.
Environment - Assigns the component information based on the default specification. It also
assigns a line number if there is a current line numbering system setup. You are responsible for
the correct line number being set before importing. This option overrides any material sent from
CAESAR II. For example, if A-133-B material type was chosen in CAESAR II, and the default
specification above dictated A-106-B as the material type, this option would override the
A-333-B grade and place A-106-B in the component. The full description would be from the
default specification set above.
174
Misc Panel
Read a CAESAR II input file

1. Click System In
. Alternatively, type C2IN on the command line, and press ENTER.
The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays.
2. Select the file to read, and click Open.
3. Set the default specification, or press ENTER to use the current specification.
The software reads the CAESAR II input file.
4. Select the option that meets your requirements.
The software writes the CAESAR II components in the drawing.
Elbow Centerline
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Elbow Center Line
Command line: ELBOWCL
Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. When toggled on, it provides square
elbow centerlines which can be used for dimensioning. This also produces attractive isometrics.
ISO Flag
Plant menu: Utility > ISO Flag
Command line: ISOFLAG
Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless
of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. This command only
affects pipes and nipples. This is useful when adjusting a pipe which is to be used in an
isometric. For example, if you use this command before stretching a pipe which was 120'-0" long
to 5'-0" long, the Bill of Material generator reflects a 120'-0" long piece of pipe.
The components xdata is flagged when using the CEDIT dialog box.
Dim Adjustment
Pipe menu:
Utility
Dim Adjustment
Command line: DIMADJUST
Adjusts a dimension when the pipe segments of a particular run have been adjusted or modified
with the ISO flag command. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175). This command
works with the associate dimensioning setvar DIMASSOC on. The command also adjusts the
pipes stored xdata length. This is performed by using the dimension to adjust the pipes xdata.
You can adjust the pipe with Dimension option, or adjust the dimension with Pipe option. Both
options of this command read and write fractional characters used with the dimension routines.
Options
Dimension - Adjusts the pipe to match an existing dimension. Select the dimension, then select
the pipes centerline.
Pipe - Adjusts the dimension to match the stored length in the pipes xdata.
175
Misc Panel
Line - Adjusts the pipe distance to match the length of a line that you select. AutoCAD
dimension lines stop at the back of the arrow, so they are not typically a good choice for this
option.
Pick reference points - Adjusts the pipe distance based on two reference points that you
select. This the most commonly used option and can be used to pick each end of a pipe.
For this option, the following prompts requests the selection of the pipe(s) that were adjusted.
Selection can be made by crossing, window or individually selecting the centerlines. Other
components which might have been selected with crossing or window are simply ignored. This
only detects adjusted pipe.
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe

1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command
line, and press ENTER.
2. Select Pipe.
3. Select the reference points for the pipe. Press ENTER to finish.
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension

1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command
line, and press ENTER.
2. Select Dimension.
3. Select the dimension text. Press ENTER to finish.
176
Misc Panel
System Visibility
Command line: SYSVIS
Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. The command
affects the components listed below.
Weld gaps
Pads / Saddles
Bolts
Gaskets
177
Misc Panel
178
SECTION 8
2D Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D
Command Name
Command Line
2D Representation - Creates a 2D representation. For

more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).
2DREP
2D Representation Hidden - Creates a 2D representation

with hidden lines. For more information, see 2D
Representation Hidden (on page 180).
2DREPH
Box - Creates views based on a picked box. For more

information, see Box (on page 180).
VIEWBOX
Edit - Edits a views box. For more information, see Edit (on
page 181).
VIEWEDIT
Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more ZOOMLOCK
information, see Zoom Lock (on page 181).
Zoom Factors - Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. For
more information, see Zoom Factors (on page 182).
ZOOMF
2D Representation
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation
Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation
Command line: 2DREP EQUIP2DREP
Creates a two-dimension representation from a three-dimensional model. This command
removes hidden lines and retains layer and color information. It can work in model or paper
space. In model space, the 2D representation is created as a block.
An alternate command, 2DREPH (EQUIP2DREPH in CADWorx Equipment), is also available.
This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features
of this command are similar to the 2DREP command.
Solids - Generates 2D representations of native AutoCAD 3D solids.
Centerlines - Copies selected CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines to the 2D representation.
Lines - Copies selected AutoCAD 3dPolyline, Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Leader, Line, Polyline, Spline
and Helix to the 2D representation. This includes CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines.
This command only processes native AutoCAD solid and line entities that are typically
created by CADWorx. This command does not process any custom solid or line entities that are
created by other add-on AutoCAD applications.
Create a 2D representation (on page 180)

Create a 2D representation with hidden lines (on page 180)
179
2D Panel
Create a 2D representation
1. Type 2DREPEQUIP2DREP.
2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.
3. Select the filter option that meets your needs.
If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.
4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.
This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D
representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD
Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.
2D Representation Hidden
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation Hidden
Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation
Command line: 2DREPH
Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. This command exports the hidden lines from
solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP
command. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).
Create a 2D representation with hidden lines

1. Type 2DREPHEQUIP2DREPH.
2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.
3. Select the filter option that meets your needs. For more information, see 2D Representation
(on page 179).
If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.
4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.
This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D
representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD
Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.
Box
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Box
Command line: VIEWBOXEQUIPVIEWBOX
Displays the View Creation dialog box. This dialog box creates clipped views by defining a 3D
box. This command is useful in creating layout drawings in paper space.
View Creation Dialog Box

View set name - Specifies the overall set name for the views. Each view created is named
based on this name.
180
2D Panel
First corner point
Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the first corner point of the view box.
Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.
X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.
Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.
Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first
and second corner points.
Second corner point

Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the second corner point of the view box.
Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.
X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.
Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.
Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first
and second corner points.
Views
View Type - Indicates the orientation of the view.
Name - Specifies the view name. The default name is a combination of the View set name
value and the View Type. After you create the view set, the views display in the AutoCAD View
dialog box.
Available - Indicates whether the view is included in the set. Select the checkbox to include the
view. Clear the checkbox to exclude the view.
Select All - Selects all of the check boxes in the Available column.
Delete All - Deletes all of the AutoCAD views that were previously created with this view set,
and close the dialog box.
Set Current - Sets the AutoCAD window to the selected view.
Isolate Box - Hides all AutoCAD entities outside the view box. Entities that cross the boundaries
of the view box are not hidden.
Show All - Shows all of the entities in the drawing.
Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Edit
Command line: VIEWEDITEQUIPVIEWEDIT
Edits the box created with the VIEWBOX command. For more information, see Box (on page
180)View Box. Double-clicking an existing view box runs this command.
Zoom Lock
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Zoom Lock
Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Lock
Settings toolbar:
Command line: ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK
181
2D Panel
Locks the AutoCAD ZOOM command to allow zooming in paper space only. This means that
while you are in paper space with the MSPACE command activated (the cursors are in the
Mview), you can zoom without resizing the model space viewport. Instead, this command
intercepts the ZOOM command and changes to paper space before zooming. When you are
finished zooming, the command returns the cursor and environment back to the Mview.
This command simplifies working on CADWorx isometrics.
Turn on the zoom lock (on page 182)

Turn off the zoom lock (on page 182)
Turn on the zoom lock
Type ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK.
Paperspace zoom lock toggled on.
Turn off the zoom lock
Type ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK.
Paperspace zoom lock toggled off.
Zoom Factors
Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Factors
Command line: ZOOMF
Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. This command zooms to a perfect scale for your current
Mview. If you use this command from model space (tilemode 1), it displays a warning that
tilemode has to be set to 0 (paper space). After selecting the scale from one of the menus, a
prompt displays requesting the center of the view.
182
SECTION 9
Bolt
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt
Command Name
Command Line
Auto Gasket - Place gaskets automatically after the last

AUTOGASKET
flange face drawn. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on
page 183).
Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each AUTOBOLT
gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 184).
Auto Weld - Places weld gaps automatically after the last butt AUTOWELD
weld drawn. For more information, see Auto Weld (on page
185).
Weld Total - For more information, see Weld Total (on page
186).
WELDTOTAL
Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected

location. For more information, see Standard (on page 187).
STDBOLT
Non Standard - Places nonstandard stud bolts at the selected NONSTDBOLT

location. For more information, see Non Standard (on page
187).
Auto Gasket
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Gasket
Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Gasket
Command line: AUTOGASKET
Places a gasket on flange sets, and valves.
Automatic - Places a gasket into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a gasket into the drawing manually.
This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 46).
Place a gasket automatically

1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then
press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER for Automatic.
3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set.
4. Select the branches to add gaskets, or press ENTER to finish.
5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish.
The gasket is placed.
183
Bolt
Place a gasket manually

1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then
press ENTER.
2. Type M on the command line, and press ENTER.
3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set.
5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish.
The gasket is placed.
Automatic
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Automatic
Command line: AUTOBOLT
Assigns stud bolt sets with similar sizes and specifications to all gaskets within the current
selection set. Gaskets of different sizes and specifications are automatically handled.
Automatic - Places a bolt into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a bolt into the drawing manually.
When the Bolt Insertion rule is turned on and you place a flange in the drawing it
does not have a bolt until you place a flange or a valve on the other side. Only then is the bolt
automatically inserted into the drawing when necessary.
page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47).
Place stud bolts automatically

1. Click Automatic
. Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set.
The bolt is placed.
Place stud bolts manually

1. Click Automatic
. Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set.
The bolt is placed.
184
Bolt
Auto Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Weld
Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Weld
Command line: AUTOWELD
Places weld gaps on every end of any butt weld and socket weld component or only on every
end of any butt weld when the component is selected. Three different scenarios can occur when
the weld gaps are placed:
1. When a weld gap is automatically placed on the end of a butt weld or socket weld
component, do one of the following to place the next component:
Press ENTER to place the component at the weld gap.
Pick the end point of the weld gap symbol.
2. When a component, such as a tee, is inserted into a pipe, and the weld gaps are placed at
each end of the tee, the weld gaps automatically break and cut back the pipe on both sides
of the tee. If one exists, the branch connection pipe is also broken.
3. When a component is placed against another component that cannot be cut back, a weld
gap must already exist. For example, if you are placing a flange against an elbow, the elbow
must have an existing weld gap. If not, the software places the flange against the elbow
without any gap. In this scenario, it is your responsibility to place a weld gap before placing
the flange.
Automatic - Places a weld gap into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a weld gap into the drawing manually.
page 46) and Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 47).
Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds.
For more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit
(on page 62). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for
field fit welds.
Place weld gaps automatically

1. Click Auto Weld
. Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when
finished.
4. Select branches to add welds, or press ENTER to finish.
The software displays the number of welds added.
185
Bolt
Place weld gaps manually

1. Click Auto Weld
. Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when
finished.
The software displays the number of welds added.
Weld Total
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Weld Total
Command line: WELDTOTAL
Counts weld gaps on a drawing for estimating purposes.
An example of the typical output is shown below. You can copy this information and paste it
into a text file or to a Microsoft Excel workbook.
Qty.
Spec.
Nominal
Actual
Thk.
Linear Lg.
A0
2.000
2.375
0.154
37.310
A0
3.000
3.500
0.216
43.980
14
A1
10.000
10.750
0.365
472.810
A1
14.000
14.000
0.375
43.980
150
A1
2.000
2.375
0.154
1119.190
The ability to export the drawing to a database using the DBFGEN or LIVEDB command
can also help manage weld gaps.
Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds.
For more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit
(on page 62). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for
field fit welds.
Count weld gaps automatically (on page 186)
Count weld gaps automatically

1. Click Weld Total
. Alternatively, type WELDTOTAL on the command line, and then
press ENTER.
2. Select the objects you want to have automatically counted, and then press ENTER.
The software displays a prompt showing the total number of welds in the drawing.
186
Bolt
Standard
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Standard
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Standard
Command line: PLACEBOLT
Inserts stud bolt sets into the drawing environment for Bill of Materials extraction. You can insert
a stud bolt set anywhere in the drawing. However, stud bolt sets must be attached to a flange
set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. Size and specification must be set
accordingly.
This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules
(on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47). If you need to change the bolt set by
the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.
Place standard stud bolts

1. Click Standard
. Alternatively, type PLACEBOLT on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
If placing bolt you must have a set of flanges to place the bolt. If there is not a
flange set you get the response Flange set not found. If you connect it to a pipe component
you get the response Component Stud Bolts cannot be inserted by a Pipe component.
The B that is inserted on the drawing for the bolt symbol uses the current AutoCAD
TextStyle setting.
Non Standard
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Non Standard
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Non Standard
Command line: NONSTDBOLT
Inserts a stud bolt set anywhere. However, nonstandard bolt sets must be attached to a flange
set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. You can also insert special bolts. Size and
specification must be set accordingly.
This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules
(on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47). If you need to change the bolt set by
the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.
Place nonstandard stud bolts

1. Click Non Standard
. Alternatively, type NONSTDBOLT on the command line and then
press ENTER.
2. Type the required text. For example, you can type NON STD STUD BOLTS.
3. Type the required description. For example, you can type STUD BOLTS W/ DOUBLE
NUTS & WASHERS.
4. Type the stud diameter. You must enter the value as a real number, such as 5/8".
5. Type the length. You must enter a real number, such as 7.25 or 7-1/4".
187
Bolt
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Type the required stud value.

Type the required weight.
Type a string, a real number, or press ENTER to accept the default.
Type the value, or press ENTER to accept the default.
Select a point in the drawing.
Use the compass to pick a direction in the drawing, and click to finish.
The bolt is placed in the drawing.
The B that is inserted on the drawing for the bolt symbol uses the current AutoCAD
TextStyle setting.
188
SECTION 10
RT Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT
Command Name
Command Line
Auto Route - Provides the ability to draw components

continuously without selecting them from the toolbar or
palette. For more information, see Auto Route (on page
189).
AUTOROUTE, ROUTE
Router - Provides routing lines with various options such as

slope and elevation changes. For more information, see
Router (on page 191).
ROUTER
Buttweld LR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected

ROUTEBWLR
routing line. For more information, see Buttweld LR (on page
192).
Buttweld SR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected
routing line. For more information, see Buttweld SR (on
page 193).
ROUTEBWSE
Threaded - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected

routing line. For more information, see Threaded (on page
193).
ROUTETRHD
Socket Weld - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected

routing line. For more information, see Socket Weld (on
page 194).
ROUTESW
Auto Route
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Auto Route
Command Line: AUTOROUTE, ROUTE
You can also use the PIPW command to start routing pipe.
Starts the ROUTE in the X-Y plane as needed. This command can be used to route pipe from
one component to another without accessing the pipe, or elbow commands. The command is
best used to start a new route of pipe, but it also works to continue routing a previous section of
pipe. However, the most useful way to continue routing pipe is to use the + sign on the ends and
middle of the pipe. For more information on continuing routing, see Continue Routing (on page
191).
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing.
Slope - Starts the pipe in a slope direction.
a. Meter - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on meters.
b. Foot - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on feet.
c. Rise - Places the slope rise or drop based on the degrees entered.
189
RT Panel
Elevation - Starts the pipe perpendicular to the plane for routing.
Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on the
command line and press ENTER to reorient the compass direction.
Reference - Starts the line at a distance based on the reference point chosen.
Fitting mode - Starts the pipe as either Short Radius Buttweld or Long Radius Buttweld,
depending on your selection.
Undo - Undoes the last piece of routed pipe.
Connect - Connects to a component or other piece of pipe.
a. Components - Displays all possible connecting directions to the component or pipe
using an image of piping.
b. Lines - Displays specific lines in a box form for connecting to the component or pipe.
Toggle length - Toggles the dimension of the pipe from the start point.
Alignment - Starts the pipe at a chosen alignment.
a. Center - Center of pipe
b. BOP - Bottom of pipe
c. TOP - Top of pipe
d. Left - Left of pipe
e. Right - Right of pipe
TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Start a new route (on page 190)

Continue Routing (on page 191)
Start a new route

1. Click Auto Route
. Alternatively, type AUTOROUTE, or ROUTE on the command line,
and press ENTER.
2. Select a start point.
3. Select an end point, or select one of the options in the list.
CADWorx lets you continue routing pipe as needed, using the component List and other
options to allow you to route to components as needed.
4. When finished routing pipe, press ENTER.
The new pipe is inserted in the drawing.
190
RT Panel
Continue Routing
This procedure does not require a command to start. However, the ROUTE command used to
start new piping can be used to continue routing pipe but is not required.
1. In a model click on the component you want to route from.
2. Click the plus grip point
.
3. Continue to route pipe as needed in any direction, or select an option.
As you click, the pipe stops at that point, and allows you to go in any other direction. Do
not click on the screen unless you want the pipe to stop.
Turning on Auto Connect (on page 150) allows you to continue routing from your last point
without having to click the grip point or without pressing ENTER. Turn off Auto Connect to start
from a different point, or to start a new point in the drawing.
Router
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Router
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Router
Command line: ROUTER
Draws a 3D polyline for the previous welded, threaded, and socket automatic routing routines.
If you are using known 3D points, the UCS must be at the world position: Type UCS on the
command line, and press ENTER.
Unlike a normal 3D polyline, the elevation must be controlled with the Elevation option of
the Router
command or the UCS position.
Slope - Specifies the known slope or drop per foot to the next point in degrees (positive or
negative). Alternatively, use one of the options listed below to define the slope. This option does
not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Slope option and then
select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.
Meter - Defines the rise or drop in millimeters per meter.
Foot - Defines the rise or drop in inches per foot.
Drop - Defines the drop to the next point as a real number, such as 1'-8
Rise - Defines the rise to the next point as a real number, such as 2'-9.
Continuous - Turns constant sloping on or off.
Position - Starts the 3D polyline at an elevated position. This option does not take effect until
the next point is selected. For example, select the Position option and then select the next point
of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.
Nominal - Determine the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.
Size - Determines the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.
BOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size upward.
TOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size downward.
Centerline - Default when starting this routine. You can change to the bottom of pipe BOP
option, then change back with this option.
Reference - Starts the line at a given distance from a reference point. After you provide this
reference point, you must provide relative/polar coordinates with an @ location.
191
RT Panel
Elevation - Changes the elevation in conjunction with the present UCS coordinate system. The
elevation change can be expressed using a positive or a negative numbers .
World - Specifies the elevation in the world coordinate system.
Pick - Establishes the working elevation based on a point selected in the drawing. You can
use object snap, if necessary.
Undo - Removes the last 3D polyline segment, and prompts you to enter the next point.
Specify next point - Selects the next point along the 3D polyline segment. Press ENTER to end
the selection.
Router commands
The CADWorx Plant auto route commands listed below provide a quick and effective way of
drawing pipe. You can draw long radius, short radius, threaded, or socket weld pipe.
Buttweld LR (on page 192)
Buttweld SR (on page 193)
Threaded (on page 193)
Socket Weld (on page 194)
All commands have the same options.
Buttweld LR
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld LR
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld LR
Command line: ROUTEBWLR
Draws a long radius pipe.
Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.
Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to
select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place,
followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are
drawn along each construction point.
An elbow is not placed at the starting and ending locations.

The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not
polylines.
Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides
rolling offsets.
For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 191).
192
RT Panel
Buttweld SR
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld SR
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld SR
Command line: ROUTEBWSR
Draws a short radius pipe.

polylines.
rolling offsets.
Threaded
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Threaded
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Threaded
Command line: ROUTETHRD
Draws threaded pipe.

polylines.
rolling offsets.
193
RT Panel
Socket Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Socket Weld
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Socket Weld
Command line: ROUTESW
Draws socket weld pipe.

polylines.
rolling offsets.
194
SECTION 11
Dimension Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions
Command Name
Command Line
Automatic - Automatically creates dimensions for a set of

components that you select. For more information, see
Automatic (on page 196).
AUTODIM
Horizontal - Places horizontal dimensions. For more

information, see Horizontal (on page 196).
DIMH
Vertical - Places vertical dimensions. For more information,

see Vertical (on page 197).
DIMV
Set - Sets the elevation. For more information, see Set (on
page 197).
ELEV
Rotated - Places rotated dimensions. For more information,

see Rotated (on page 198).
DIMR
Horizontal with Tail - Places tailed horizontal dimensions

on objects from a user-selected reference point. For more
information, see Horizontal with Tail (on page 198).
DIMTAILH
Vertical with Tail - Places tailed vertical dimensions on

objects from a user-selected reference point. For more
information, see Vertical with Tail (on page 198).
DIMTAILV
Change - Changes the elevation. For more information, see CHANGEELEV

Change (on page 199).
Component - Places component annotation. For more
information, see Component (on page 199).
ANOTCOMP
Elevation - Places component elevation annotation. For

more information, see Elevation (on page 200).
ANOTELEV
Coordinates - Places coordinates in either a user

coordinate system or a world coordinate system. For more
information, see Coordinates (on page 200).
DIMCOORD
Tick Mark - Shows which side of the dimension extension

line the gasket is on. For more information, see Tick Mark
(on page 201).
TICK
ISO Text - Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in

paper space when working with isometrics. For more
information, see ISO Text (on page 202).
Height - Changes the height of selected text by matching it
with other text. For more information, see Height (on page
202).
TEXTHEIGHT
195
Dimension Panel
Automatic
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Automatic
Plant menu: Dimension > Automatic
Command line: AUTODIM
Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. Options to set the
offset distance and whether to include flanges are also provided.
Options
Flange - Dimensions flange faces. You specify whether flange dimensioning is turned On or
Off.
Offset - Specifies the distance from the dimension line to the component.
Selection - Starts the dimensioning process.
Place automatic dimensions

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Automatic
. Alternatively, type AUTODIM on the command line, and press ENTER.
Type S on the command line, and press ENTER to select objects to dimension.
Select the objects to dimension. Press ENTER when you are finished.
Select the centroid for the dimensions. For example, if you selected two pieces of parallel
pipe with elbows attached to each end to dimension, and then selected a point between the
two pieces of pipe, the software would place the dimension lines to the outside.
The software displays the dimensions.
If you try to place automatic dimensions on two pieces of parallel pipe with no elbows, an
error code displays. Combined components must have at least one turn.
Horizontal
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Horizontal
Command line: DIMH
Places horizontal dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the
sequence, you must type D for dimension line.
Place horizontal dimensions

1. Click Horizontal
. Alternatively, type DIMH on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the origin location for the first extension line.
3. Select the origin location for the second extension line.
The software continues to prompt you for extension lines.
4. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence.
5. Select a location for the dimension line.
6. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension.
The software displays the dimension.
196
Dimension Panel
Vertical
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Vertical
Command line: DIMV
Places vertical dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence,
you must type D for dimension line.
Place vertical dimensions

1. Click Vertical
. Alternatively, type DIMV on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the origin location for the first extension line.
3. Select the origin location for the second extension line.
Set
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Set
Pipe menu: Utility > Elevation > Set
Command line: ELEV
Places piping at a preset elevation. This is the standard AutoCAD Elev command. When using
this option, remember to place the elevation back to 0'-0" for the proper elevation placement of
all future components. Use this command with caution. An alternative is to use the Flat (on page
229)
command built into CADWorx (VIEWFLAT).
Refer to the AutoCAD documentation for complete details regarding this command (ELEV).
Set the Elevation

1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Set
on the Dimensions panel.
Alternatively, type ELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a point in the drawing to specify a new elevation.
3. Select a second point in the drawing.
4. Enter a thickness value.
Piping is now at the new elevation.
Remember to set it back to 0'-0" when you are finished with the new elevation.
197
Dimension Panel
Rotated
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Rotated
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Rotated
Command line: DIMR
Places rotated dimensions. You are prompted for the angle of rotation and the points to
dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.
Place rotated dimensions

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Rotated
. Alternatively, type DIMR on the command line, and press ENTER.
Type the dimension angle, or select two points to indicate the angle.
Select the origin location for the first extension line.
Select the origin location for the second extension line.
Horizontal with Tail

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal with Tail
Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Horizontal
Command line: DIMTAILH
Places tailed horizontal dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this
sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.
Place horizontal tailed dimensions

1. Click Horizontal with Tail
. Alternatively, type DIMTAILH on the command line, and
press ENTER.
2. Select the reference point for the dimension.
3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end.
4. Select the location for the dimension.
5. Press ENTER to end the sequence.
When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the
reference point or use the previous reference point.
Vertical with Tail

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical with Tail
Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Vert
Command line: DIMTAILV
Places tailed vertical dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this
sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.
198
Dimension Panel
Place vertical tailed dimensions

1. Click Vertical with Tail
. Alternatively, type DIMTAILV on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Select the reference point for the dimension.
3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end.
4. Select the location for the dimension.
5. Press ENTER to end the sequence.
When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the
reference point or use the previous reference point.
Change
CADWorx Plant II: Dimensions > Change
Command line: CHANGELEV
Moves all selected entities (blocks, lines, polylines and so on) to a new elevation in reference
with the world coordinate system. You can also change a component elevation to 1/2 its actual
outside diameter.
Arbitrary - Places the component anywhere in the drawing.
BOP Correction - Aligns the pipe bottom with the center of the connected piece.
Change the Elevation

1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Change
on the Dimensions panel.
Alternatively, type CHANGEELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER to select the default.
3. Select a point in the drawing, or enter a numerical value.
5. Select the needed objects for elevation, and press ENTER.
The component appears at the new elevation.
Component
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Component
Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Component
Command line: ANOTCOMP
Places component annotation.
Options
Tag - Annotates the component with its tag.
Long - Annotate the component with its long description and appends the size to the front.
Short - Annotates the component with its short description and appends the size to the front.
199
Dimension Panel
Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more
information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.
Leader - Adds a leader to the text.
Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.
Place component annotation

1. Click Component
. Alternatively, type ANOTCOMP on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Select the annotation type.
3. Select the component to annotate.
4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification.
5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle.
The software displays the annotation.
Elevation
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Elevation
Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Elevation
Command line: ANOTELEV
Places component elevation annotation.
Options
BOP - Labels the bottom of the pipe elevation.
TOP - Labels the top of the pipe elevation.
Centerline - Labels the centerline elevation.
Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more
information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.
Leader - Adds a leader to the text.
Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.
Place component elevation annotation

1. Click Elevation
. Alternatively, type ANOTELEV on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Select the component to annotate elevation.
3. Specify the elevation option to use.
The software displays a rubber band to the selected component.
4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification.
5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle.
The software displays the annotation.
Coordinates
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Coordinates
200
Dimension Panel
Plant menu: Dimension > Coordinates
Command line: DIMCOORD
Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. You can
place the text at the coordinate with or without a leader.
TEXTSIZE is controlled by DIMSCALE and DIMTXT.
Options
Leader - Places a leader.
Other point - Places the dimension text in an alternate location without a leader.
Same point - Places the dimension text at the same location which is picked without a leader.
Centerline - Places the dimension text either with a north or east designation. This option labels
a vertical dimension as east and a horizontal dimension as north.
The following AutoCAD setvars affect the dimensioning routines: DIMALT, DIMALTD,
DIMALTF, DIMASZ, DIMBLK, DIMEXE, DIMEXO, DIMLFAC, DIMTXT, DIMZIN, DIMSCALE,
LUNITS, LUPREC, and UNITMODE.
Place coordinates
1. Click Coordinates
. Alternatively, type DIMCOORD on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. If necessary, press ENTER, or type Y on the command line and press ENTER, to change to
the world coordinate system.
3. Select an extension line point.
4. Select an option.
5. Follow the prompts to place the coordinates.
The coordinates display.
Tick Mark
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Tick Mark
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Tick Mark
Command line: TICK
Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on.
This command is dependent upon the DIMSCALE being set properly. For example; if the gasket
thickness was set to 1/8" and the scale of the drawing was set to full, the distance from the
extension line to the tick mark would be 1/8". If the scale of the drawing was set to 3/4"=1'-0",
the distance from the tick mark to the extension line would be 3/8". This insures that the tick
mark is visible on a plotted drawing.
The initial prompt allows you to set the thickness, but does not appear again during the single
drawing session. Changing the thickness is allowed in the next prompt.
201
Dimension Panel
Place tick marks

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Tick Mark

. Alternatively, type TICK on the command line, and press ENTER.
Type the thickness, or press ENTER to accept the default.
Type C on the command line, and press ENTER if you need to change the thickness.
Type a value for the thickness.
Select the point.
Select a direction parallel with the extension line.
Select the gasket side.
Select the extension line.
Select a direction parallel with the extension line.
Select the gasket side.
The software displays the tick mark.
ISO Text
Plant menu: Text > ISO Text
Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. These
commands are similar to the AutoCAD DTEXT command.
Height
Plant menu: Text > Height
Command line: TEXTHEIGHT
Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. This is useful when you are
zoomed to an unknown factor in paper space.
Options
Entire drawing - Chooses all text on the drawing.
Layer - Specifies a layer for selection. CADWorxs default text layer is TEXT.
Selection - Matches the height of text that you select.
202
SECTION 12
Graphics / Pipe Ends

CADWorx Plant II tab: Graphics / Pipe Ends
Command Name
Section - Opens the Sections dialog box in which you can
select a section graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Section (on page 206).
Command Line
SECTIONS
Detail - Opens the Details dialog box in which you can select DETAILS
a detail graphic to place on the drawing. For more information,
see Detail (on page 207).
Plan - Opens the Plan dialog box in which you can select a
plan graphic to place on the drawing. For more information,
see Plan (on page 208).
PLANS
Elevation - Opens the Elevations box in which you can select ELEVATIONS
an elevation graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Elevation (on page 209).
Arrow - Opens the Arrows dialog box in which you can select ARROWS
an arrow head graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Arrow (on page 210).
Weld - Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box in which you
select a weld symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see Weld (on page 211).
WELDS
ISO - Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box in which you ISOS
can select an ISO symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see ISO (on page 211).
Misc - Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box in which you can
select a miscellaneous symbol graphic to place on the
drawing. For more information, see Misc (on page 213).
MISC
Instrument - Opens the Instruments dialog box in which you

can select an instrument graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see Instrument (on page 214).
INSTRUMENTS
Dots - Opens the Dots dialog box in which you can select a
weld dots graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Dots (on page 215).
DOTS
Fitting Width - Controls the appearance of all flanged, socket

weld, and threaded fittings. For more information, see Fitting
Width.
FITTINGWIDTH
Single Line Width - Specifies the line width for single-line

components. For more information, see Single Line Width.
LINEWIDTH
203

Each of the Graphics commands opens a related dialog box, which is used to preview and
select a graphic for placement in the drawing. A drawing file is used to display the preview
graphic in the dialog box. These graphic drawing files are delivered to the [Product
Folder]\Support folder. They can be modified to meet your specific project requirements.
A modified graphic drawing file must contain the same number of attributes as are
currently in the drawing.
Adding preview graphics

If necessary, you can add more graphics to any of the graphics dialog boxes by modifying the
contents of the Pipe_alt.dat file. This file contains the definitions for each graphic type. The
example below shows the graphics group in the Pipe_alt.dat file that is referenced in the
Sections dialog box.
[Sections]
s1s.dwg
Head
graph1 s1 1
s2s.dwg
Head w/ Attrib
graph1 s2 2
s3s.dwg
Head w/ 2 Attrib
graph1 s3 3
s4s.dwg
End w/ Attrib
graph1 s4 4
Columns must start at positions 1, 40, and 75 and define the information outlined below.
COL1 (Position 1) - Drawing used in the dialog box for preview image.
Before you modify the Pipe_alt.dat file, make a backup copy.

If the columns are not at the required positions, the drawing function fails.
There must not be any blank lines located within a section.
There must be a blank line at the beginning and at the end of a section.
The scale of the graphics inserted into the drawing, excluding isometric symbol graphics, is
based upon the value of the AutoCAD setvar DIMSCALE. If DIMSCALE is set to 0, as is
required for paper space, the software inserts graphics at a scale of 1. Isometric symbol
graphics are inserted at a scale of 1 regardless of the DIMSCALE setting.
COL2 (Position 40) - Name displayed in the dialog box for graphic name.
COL3 (Position 75) - Function used to draw the graphic in the drawing with
arguments.
System Prompts
The system prompts required to draw the graphic types delivered with the software are outlined
in the table below.
204
Function
System Response
Prompt 1
Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle
Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER
Prompt 2
Pick left justified insertion point: pick point in the drawing

Rotation angle: pick direction or enter angle
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER
Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER
Prompt 3
Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Rotation angle: pick a direction in the drawing or enter angle
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A)
Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)
Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")

Prompt 4
Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 5

Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER ( ex: 106)
Prompt 6

Projection or other direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 7
Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing

Pick mark location: pick point in the drawing
Prompt 8
Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing

Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing
Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)
Prompt 9
Pick left end point: pick a point in the drawing

Pick right end point: pick a point in the drawing
Enter title: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: ELEVATION NORTH)
Enter scale: enter a string (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")
Prompt 10
Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing

Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: SDV)
Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 1)
Prompt 11
Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing

Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: PI)
Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)
Enter third level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: B)
Prompt 12
Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle
Prompt 13
Prompt 14

Pick direction: pick a direction
Prompt 15
Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing (not center insertion, outside edge)
Pick direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 101)Weld
Prompt 16
Pick leader start point: pick a point in the drawing

Pick intermediate point: pick a point in the drawing
Pick direction for tail: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 17

Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 18
Prompt 19
Pick insertion point on line: pick a point in the drawing

Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 20
Pick location: pick a point in the drawing

Pick rotation or [Up/Down/Roll/mirrorX/mirrorY/mirrorZ]: select an option or pick the rotation
205
Section
CADWorx Plant II tab: Section
Pipe menu: Graphics > Section
Command line: SECTIONS
Opens the Sections dialog box, which allows you to select a section graphic for placement in
the drawing.
Sections Dialog Box

Displays the sections graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic.
Each section graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your
specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the
dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).
The table below lists the section graphics that display in the Sections dialog box by default. The
table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation,
as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific
set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more
information, see System Prompts (on page 204).
Sections Graphic Name
AutoCAD Drawing Name
Function Name
Head
S1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
S2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
S3S.dwg
Prompt 3
End w/ Attrib
S4S.dwg
Prompt 4
End w 2Attrib
S5S.dwg
Prompt 5
End
S6S.dwg
Prompt 6
Middle
S7S.dwg
Prompt 6
Place a section graphic

1. Click Section
. Alternatively, type SECTIONS on the command line and then press
ENTER.
The Sections dialog box appears.
2. Select the required graphic in the list.
The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing.
4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current
drawing.
The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.
206
Detail
CADWorx Plant II tab: Detail
Pipe menu: Graphics > Details
Command line: DETAILS
Opens the Details dialog box, which allows you to select a detail graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Details Dialog Box

Displays the detail graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each details graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the detail graphics that display in the Details dialog box by default. The
table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation,
Detail Graphic Name
Function Name
Head
D1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
D2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
D3S.dwg
Prompt 3
Mark w/ Attrib
D4S.dwg
Prompt 7
Mark w 2Attrib
D5S.dwg
Prompt 8
Place a detail graphic

1. Click Detail . Alternatively, type Details on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Details dialog box appears.
drawing.
207
Plan
CADWorx Plant II tab: Plan
Pipe menu: Graphics > Plans
Command line: PLANS
Opens the Plans dialog box, which allows you to select a plan graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Plans Dialog Box

Displays the plan graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each plan graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the plan graphics that display in the Plans dialog box by default. The table
also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well
as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of
prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information,
see System Prompts (on page 204).
Plan Graphic Name
Function Name
Head
P1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
P2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
P3S.dwg
Prompt 3
Place a plan graphic

1. Click Plan
. Alternatively, type PLANS on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Plans dialog box appears.
drawing.
208
Elevation
CADWorx Plant II tab: Elevation
Pipe menu: Graphics > Elevations
Command line: ELEVATIONS
Opens the Elevations dialog box, which allows you to select an elevation graphic for placement
in the drawing.
Elevations Dialog Box

Displays the elevation graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each elevation graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the elevation graphics that display in the Elevations dialog box by default.
The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical
representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries
with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing.
For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).
Elevation Graphic Name
Function Name
Head
E1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
E2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
E3S.dwg
Prompt 3
Generic Head
L1S.dwg
Prompt 9
Place an elevation graphic

1. Click Elevation
. Alternatively, type ELEVATIONS on the command line and then press
ENTER.
The Elevations dialog box appears.
drawing.
209
Arrow
CADWorx Plant II tab: Arrow
Pipe menu: Graphics > Arrows
Command line: ARROWS
Opens the Arrows dialog box, which allows you to select an arrow head graphic for placement
in the drawing.
Arrows Dialog Box

Displays the arrow head graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each arrow head graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files
are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit
your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the
The table below lists the arrow head graphics that display in the Arrows dialog box by default.
The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical
Arrow Graphic Name
Function Name
North
N1S.dwg
Prompt 14
Prevailing
N2S.dwg
Prompt 12
Model Iso North
N3S.dwg
Prompt 12
Paper Iso North
N4S.dwg
Prompt 14
Small
A1S.dwg
Prompt 12
Medium
A2S.dwg
Prompt 12
Large
A3S.dwg
Prompt 12
Place an arrow head graphic

1. Click Arrow
. Alternatively, type ARROWS on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Arrows dialog box appears.
drawing.
210
Weld
CADWorx Plant II tab: Weld
Pipe menu: Graphics > Weld
Command line: WELDS
Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select a weld symbol graphic for
placement in the drawing.
Weld Symbols Dialog Box
Place a weld symbol graphic

1. Click Weld
. Alternatively, type WELDS on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Welds dialog box appears.
drawing.
ISO
CADWorx Plant II tab: ISO
Pipe menu: Graphics > ISO
Command line: ISOS
Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select an isometric symbol
graphic for placement in the drawing.
Isometric Symbols Dialog Box

Displays the isometric symbol graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each isometric symbols graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing
files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit
your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the
The table below lists the isometric symbol graphics that display in the Isometric Symbols
dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the
graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function
carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the
drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).
Isometric Symbol Display Name
Function Name
Adjustable Base Ell
Adjustable_Base_Ell.dwg
Prompt 20
211
212
Angle
Angle.dwg
Prompt 20
Arrow1
Arrow1.dwg
Prompt 20
Arrow2
Arrow2.dwg
Prompt 20
Arrow3
Arrow3.dwg
Prompt 20
Base Support
Base_Support.dwg
Prompt 20
Channel
Channel.dwg
Prompt 20
Column
Column.dwg
Prompt 20
Column Knee Brace
Column_Knee_Brace.dwg
Prompt 20
DummyLeg
DummyLeg.dwg
Prompt 20
Floorwall Penetration
Floorwall_Penetration.dwg
Prompt 20
Grating Penetration1
Grating_Penetration_1.dwg
Prompt 20
Prompt 20
Prompt 20
Hanger Clamp
Hanger_Clamp.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clamp 1
Hanger_Clamp_2.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clevis
Hanger_Clevis.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clevis 1
Hanger_Clevis_1.dwg
Prompt 20
Insulation Saddle
Insulation_Saddle.dwg
Prompt 20
Knee Brace
Knee_Brace.dwg
Prompt 20
Pipe Clamp
Pipe_Clamp.dwg
Prompt 20
Pipe Shoe Extrude
Pipe_Shoe_Extrude.dwg
Prompt 20
Pipe Shoe Faced
Pipe_Shoe_Faced.dwg
Prompt 20
Spring Hanger Clamp
Spring_Hanger_Clamp.dwg
Prompt 20
T Support
T_Support.dwg
Prompt 20
Ubolt
Ubolt.dwg
Prompt 20
Ubolt 1
Ubolt_2.dwg
Prompt 20
Wide Flange Beam
WFlange_Beam.dwg
Prompt 20
Place an isometric symbol graphic

1. Click ISO . Alternatively, type ISOS on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Isometric Symbol dialog box appears.
drawing.
Misc
CADWorx Plant II tab: Misc
Pipe menu: Graphics > Misc
Command line: MISC
Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box, which allows you to select a graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Miscellaneous Dialog Box

Displays the set of miscellaneous graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each listed graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the graphics that display in the Miscellaneous dialog box by default. The
Sections Graphic Name
Function Name
Small Circle
M1S.dwg
Prompt 15
Small Hexagon
M2S.dwg
Prompt 15
Small Square
M3S.dwg
Prompt 15
Small Rev
M4S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Circle
M5S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Hexagon
M6S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Square
M7S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Rev
M8S.dwg
Prompt 15
213
Place a miscellaneous graphic

1. Click Misc
. Alternatively, type MISC on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Miscellaneous dialog box appears.
drawing.
Instrument
CADWorx Plant II tab: Instrument
Pipe menu: Graphics > Instruments
Command line: INSTRUMENTS
Opens the Instruments dialog box, which allows you to select an instrument graphic for
placement in the drawing.
Instruments Dialog Box

Displays the instrument graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each instrument graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the instrument graphics that display in the Instruments dialog box by
default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical
214
Instrument Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name
Function Name
2 Attrib Local
F1S.dwg
Prompt 10
3 Attrib Local
F2S.dwg
Prompt 11
2 Attrib Board
F3S.dwg
Prompt 12
Place an instrument graphic

1. Click Instrument
. Alternatively, type INSTRUMENTS on the command line and then
press ENTER.
The Instruments dialog box appears.
drawing.
Dots
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dots
Pipe menu: Graphics > Dots
Command line: DOTS
Opens the Dots dialog box, which allows you to select a weld dot graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Dots Dialog Box

Displays the weld dot graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each weld dot graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the weld dot graphics that display in the Dots dialog box by default. The
Dots Graphic Name
Function Name
Head
S1.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
S2.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
S3.dwg
Prompt 3
End w/ Attrib
S4.dwg
Prompt 4
End w 2Attrib
S5.dwg
End
S6.dwg
Prompt 6
Middle
S7.dwg
Prompt 6
Prompt 5
215
Place a weld dot graphic

1. Click Dots
. Alternatively, type DOTS on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Dots dialog box appears.
drawing.
216
SECTION 13
Layers Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers
Command Name
Command Line
Change Layer - Changes an objects layer to the layer

associated with another object that you select. For more
information, see Change Layer (on page 218).
LAYERCHANGE
Set Layer - Sets the current layer to that of an object that

you select. For more information, see Set Layer (on page
218).
LAYERSET
Delete Layer - Removes all of the entities on the layer

associated with an entity that you select. For more
information, see Delete Layer (on page 218).
LAYERDELETE
Layer Off - Turns off the layer associated with an entity

that you select. For more information, see Layer Off (on
page 219).
LAYEROFF
On - Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the

Layer Off command. For more information, see Layer On
(on page 219).
LAYERON
Match Layer - Changes an objects properties to match

those of another object that you select. For more
information, see Match Layer (on page 219).
MATCH
Isolate Layer - Turns off all layers except for the layer
associated with an entity that you select. For more
information, see Isolate Layer (on page 220).
LAYERISOLATE
Un-isolate Layer - Turns all of the layers back on that

LAYERUNISO
were turned off with the Isolate Layer command. For more
information, see Un-Isolate Layer (on page 220).
Previous - Sets the current layer back to the previous layer LAYERRESTORE
when you have placed dimensioning or text. For more
information, see Previous (on page 220).
217
Layers Panel
Change Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Change Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Change
Command line: LAYERCHANGE
Changes an objects layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. You can
select the objects to change individually or with a fence.
Change the layer associated with an object

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Change Layer

.
Select the objects whose layer you want to change.
Select additional object to change layers, or press ENTER to end the selection process.
Select an object on the layer to which you want to move the objects.
The software moves the selected object to the new layer.
Set Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Set Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Set
Command line: LAYERSET
Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. You must select an individual object.
Set the active layer

1. Click Set Layer
.
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to be the active layer.
The software sets the active layer to that of the selected object.
Delete Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Delete Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Delete
Command line: LAYERDELETE
Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For example,
you can delete all the entities, such as lines, text, and so on, on layer 0. You must select an
individual entity.
If you select the VIEWL layer, the software displays a warning message. Deleting the VIEWL
layer deletes a block named CPM which the software inserts when beginning a new drawing.
This block contains information (sizes, specification, and so on) that are used when opening an
existing drawing. If you delete this layer, this information is not available for the next drawing
session. You can re-enter this information.
218
Layers Panel
Delete a layer
1. Click Delete Layer
.
2. Select the object whose layer you want to delete.
The software deletes the layer associated with the selected object.
Layer Off
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer Off
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Off
Command line: LAYEROFF
Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. You must select an Individual entity.
Turn off a layer

1. Click Layer Off
.
2. Select the object whose layer you want to turn off.
The software turns off the display of the layer associated with the selected object.
Layer On
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer On
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > On
Command line: LAYERON
Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information,
see Layer Off (on page 219). No selection is required.
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command
Click Layer On
.
The software redisplays the layer.
Match Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Match Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Match
Command line: MATCH
Changes an objects layer to match that of another object that you select.
219
Layers Panel
Match an object's layer

1. Click Match Layer
.
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Press ENTER to end the selection.
3. Select an object on the layer that you want to match.
The software changes the layer of the objects.
Isolate Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Isolate Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Isolate
Command line: LAYERISOLATE
Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select.
Display only the layer associated with an object

1. Click Isolate Layer
.
2. Select an object on the layer to isolate.
The software turns off all layers except for the layer associated with the selected object..
Un-Isolate Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Un-Isolate Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Un-Isolate
Command line: LAYERUNISO
Turns all of the layers on. No selection is required.
Turn on all layers
Click Un-Isolate Layer

.
The software turns on display for all layers.
Previous
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Previous
Command line: LAYERRESTORE
Sets the current layer back to the previous layer when you have placed dimensioning or text.
This command is only available after these two items are placed. This command does not
restore a previous layer that has been changed with the Layer or Ddlmodes commands.
220
SECTION 14
Restraints Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints
The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.
Command Name
Command Line
Reinforcing Pad - Inserts intelligent information indicating a

REINFPAD
reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad
(on page 222).
Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts intelligent information indicating REINFSAD
a reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing
Saddle (on page 222).
Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For
more information, see Translational (on page 223).
TRANSLATIONAL
Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more

information, see Anchor (on page 224).
ANCHOR
Spring Hanger- Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For

more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 224).
SPRING
Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more

information, see Rotational (on page 225).
ROTATIONAL
Snubber - Creates a snubber-type restraint. For more

information, see Snubber (on page 226).
SNUBBER
Guide - Creates a guide-type restraint. For more information,

see Guide (on page 226).
GUIDE
Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that
appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are
delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be
re-drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the
restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.
The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is
important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can
position a rotational restraint at any vector.
The CAESARTolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process
encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is
sloped.
All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides
to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on
page 64) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID,
SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these
SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to
the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.
221
Restraints Panel
You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.
Reinforcing Pad
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Pad
Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Pad
Command line: REINFPAD
Attaches a reinforcement pad to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement pad is
represented by the alpha-identifier P. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in
Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
For information about showing reinforcement pads on an ISOGEN isometric drawing, see
Offset Tap (on page 108).
Insert a reinforcement pad

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Reinforcing Pad

on the Restraints panel.
Select a component.
Select the branch pipe component.
Type the thickness of the reinforcement pad on the command line, and press ENTER.
Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software places the reinforcement pad and notates the drawing with the reinforcing pad
alpha-identifier.
Reinforcing Saddle
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Saddle
Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle
Command line: REINFSAD
Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement
saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that
is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
222
Restraints Panel
Insert a reinforcement saddle

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Reinforcing Saddle

Select a component.
Select the branch run of the component.
Type the thickness of the reinforcement saddle on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software places the reinforcement saddle and notates the drawing with the reinforcing
saddle alpha-identifier.
Translational
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Translational
Restraints toolbar: Translational
Command line: TRANSLATIONAL
Creates a translational-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this
symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H1.dwg file.
Place a translational restraint

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Translational
Click where you want the transitional placed.
Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER.
223
Restraints Panel
The transitional is placed in the drawing.
Anchor
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Anchor
Restraints toolbar: Anchor
Command line: ANCHOR
Creates an anchor-type restraint.
Place an anchor
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Anchor
Click where you want the anchor placed.
The anchor is placed in the drawing.
Spring Hanger
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Spring Hanger
Restraints toolbar: Spring Hanger
Command line: SPRING
Creates a spring hanger-type restraint.
224
Restraints Panel
Place a spring hanger

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Spring Hanger on the Restraints panel.

Click where you want the spring hanger placed.
The spring hanger is placed in the drawing.
Rotational
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Rotational
Restraints toolbar: Rotational
Command line: ROTATIONAL
Creates a rotational-type restraint.
Place a rotational restraint

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Rotational
Click where you want the restraint placed.
The restraint is placed in the drawing.
225
Restraints Panel
Snubber
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Snubber
Restraints toolbar: Snubber
Command line: SNUBBER
Creates a snubber-type restraint.
Place a snubber
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Snubber
Click where you want the snubber placed.
The snubber is placed in the drawing.
Guide
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Guide
Restraints toolbar: Guide
Command line: GUIDE
Creates a guide-type restraint.
Place a guide
1.
2.
3.
4.
226
Click Guide
Click where you want the guide placed.
The guide is placed in the drawing.
SECTION 15
UCS Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS
Command Name
Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat
position. For more information, see Flat (on page 229).
Command Line
VIEWFLAT
Next - Places the current user coordinate system in the next UCSNEXT
position. For more information, see UCS Next (on page
230).
Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates
the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see
Compass (on page 230).
COMPASS
North - Places the current user coordinate system in the

north position. For more information, see North (on page
230).
VIEWNORTH
South - Places the current user coordinate system in the

south position. For more information, see South (on page
231).
VIEWSOUTH
East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east VIEWEAST
position. For more information, see East (on page 232).
West - Places the current user coordinate system in the
west position. For more information, see West (on page
231).
VIEWWEST
UCS Object - Orients the current user coordinate system

UCS
according to an object that you select. For more information,
see UCS Object (on page 232).
Point and Shoot UCS

AutoCAD allows you to manipulate the X, Y, Z coordinate system UCS (user coordinate
system). You must be familiar with the Point and Shoot system of manipulating the UCS.
The UCSICON option needs to be On (visible) and set to Origin. This lets you see exactly
where the icon is at all times. Although it isnt necessary, it is highly recommended that it be
somewhere on the centerline of the components you are drawing. This keeps everything in the
same plane. If you must turn into another plane, use the UCS NEXT command, or choose the
appropriate plane (North, South, East, West, or Flat) and place the icon on the centerline of the
new plane.
If you cannot see the rubber band effect, or if it doesnt appear correctly, you are out of plane.
Pay attention to the icon as it shows where you are. If the broken pencil icon appears, and there
are strange lines on the screen instead of pipe and components, your current plane is
perpendicular to the viewpoint. Use the Undo command, or change the viewpoint.
227
UCS Panel
When dimensioning or annotating an isometric or 3D model, place the UCS icon on a node or a
centerline on the run you are working on. The text has the same orientation as the icon.
Xtext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the X-axis. When you view a model from the bottom
side using a view point with a negative angle from the X-Y plane, text and dimension placement
is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the X-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text
and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change
from a negative to positive angle from the X-Y view point, you must replace the text for the
proper orientation.
Ztext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the Z-axis. When viewing a model from the back
side using a view point with a 0 to 180 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X axis, text and
dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the Z-axis of the UCS
to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and
plotting. If you change to a rear view position (180 - 360 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the
X-axis), you must replace the text for the proper orientation.
Elevation - Sets the elevation to the present UCS. This command does not set the depth in a
North, South, East, or West plane. Setting an elevation of 10' (when the present elevation is 0')
raises the UCS to 10' regardless of the position.
Rotate - Rotates the present UCS around the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. For example, rotating the UCS
to 45 degrees after inserting a 45 degree elbow allows you to place other components in line
with the 45 degree elbow.
COordinate - Specifies an exact X, Y, Z-coordinate in relation to the WCS (world coordinate
system).
CLip - Clips the view at the present plane set by the UCS. This plane can be established with
the Point and Shoot UCS options or any three-point UCS position. The plane can be skewed at
any angle.
On - Turns on view clipping with clipping distances as set by the Back and Front options.
Off - Turns off view clipping.
Back - Sets the distance to the back of the clipping area. This value must be a negative number.
If this value is positive, it can clip past the front clipping area and leave nothing in the view.
Front - Sets the distance to the front of the clipping area. This value must be a positive number.
If this value is negative, it can clip past the back clipping area and leave nothing in the view.
The CLip option is also available as the command VIEWCLIP.
Pick point - Moves the 0,0,0 user base to a point you select. Press Enter to keep the UCS at
the same origin but switch to a new plane. For example, press Enter to change from the north
plate to a west plane.
You must enter other UCS positions with AutoCADs UCS command. Two extremely useful
options in this command are the OBject and 3 Point. Leave the UCSICON on and set to origin
when using any method of rearranging the UCS.
228
UCS Panel
If you select a point close to the screens edge, and the UCS icon is on and set to origin,
the icon may not remain at this point. AutoCAD requires that the whole icon be visible and
places the icon in the lower left corner of the screen. If this happens, zoom out a little or pan
toward the new UCS position.
Flat
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > Flat
UCS toolbar: Flat
Plant menu: UCS > Flat
Command line: VIEWFLAT
Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position.
229
UCS Panel
UCS Next
UCS toolbar: Next
Plant menu: UCS > UCS Next
Command line: UCSNEXT
Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS positions.
Compass
UCS toolbar: Compass
UCS toolbar: Compass
Command line: COMPASS
Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. The symbol
displays at the point you select.
As the display's orientation changes, the symbol changes accordingly.

The aliases VF, VN, VS, VE, and VW are also available.
North
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > North
UCS toolbar: North
Plant menu: UCS > North
Command line: VIEWNORTH
Places the current user coordinate system in the north position.
230
UCS Panel
South
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > South
UCS toolbar: South
Plant menu: UCS > South
Command line: VIEWSOUTH
Places the current user coordinate system in the south position.
West
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > West
UCS toolbar: West
Plant menu: UCS > West
Command line: VIEWWEST
Places the current user coordinate system in the west position.
231
UCS Panel
East
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > East
UCS toolbar: East
Plant menu: UCS > East
Command line: VIEWEAST
Places the current user coordinate system in the east position.
UCS Object
UCS toolbar: UCS Object
Plant menu: UCS > UCS Object
Command line: UCS
Orients the UCS according to an object that you select. Please refer to the AutoCAD
documentation on the UCS (User Coordinate System) for more detail.
This command is useful for rearranging dimensions in the model space (MSPACE) of a
CADWorx isometric model. Run this command, and then select the dimension. The software
places the UCS according to the position of the dimension allowing it to be stretched and
moved.
232
SECTION 16
Steel Shapes Panel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC > Steel Shapes
Shape Name
Command Line
Wide Flange
WSHAPE
Channel
CSHAPE
Angle
LSHAPE
Tee
TSHAPE
Pipe
PSHAPE
Tube
TSSHAPE
Flat Bar
FBSHAPE
Round Bar
RBSHAPE
Channel with Lip
CLIPSHAPE
Angle with Lib
LLIPSHAPE
ZSHAPE
Double Angle
2LSHAPE
Shapes
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Shapes panel
Plant > Steel > Shapes
Command line: STEEL
Draws many different steel shapes in the drawing. When placing steel shapes, you can:
attach steel shapes to lines or you can specify the end points.
place members into the current UCS.
define the location of the centerline and the angle about the centerline.
place steel on arcs.
copy, stretch, or edit the size with the edit function.
Draw Steel Dialog Box

Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the
member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth).
Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files
located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display
for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx
automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.
233
Steel Shapes Panel

Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in
alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order.
Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180,
270, or type the needed rotation angle.
Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active
location.
Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the
component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of
the component.
Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in
the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this
option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically.
Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate.
Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is
the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is
the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.
Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION="
value in the data file header.
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number
yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page
40) startup variable.
Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL="
Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen.
Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and
position of the line define the component.
Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties
before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box.
User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a
custom-dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking
User Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.
Properties Dialog Box

Displays the available properties of the selected member.
The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top.
Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight
yourself.
Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length
yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of
the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would
be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length.
The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order
of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing.
The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data
file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage
distance.
234
Steel Shapes Panel

User Input Dialog Box
Defines custom dimensioned components.
Dimensions - Displays the dimensions that you can define. Refer to the figure for a key of
which dimension is which.
Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline or base point. You can
select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle.
Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The thickness, length,
and width dimensions are appended to the long annotation as the component is drawn and
placed.
Description - Defines the component description.
Density - Defines the material density for the component.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location
associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I
contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top
of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software
reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example,
when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you
want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file
values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory
variable.
Steel channel and angle shapes cannot be modified using the AutoCAD MIRROR
command. Use Flip Flange in the dialog to mirror channel and angle shapes.
When editing shape data files, remember these rules:
Columns have to be separated by two or more spaces.
First column has to be called "MEMBER". The member name cannot have two consecutive
spaces.
Required columns have to in the exact order listed for each type of steel shape to generate
the AutoCAD solid.
All columns after the required columns are optional. These optional columns display in the
Properties dialog box for reference. The Ix (Inertia about X-axis), Iy (Inertia about Y-axis),
and J (torsion) columns might be used by the SEXPORT command when export to CAESAR
II Steel (*.str) files.
The cross sectional area (AREA) and fillet radius (R) columns are required in the data file
but are not used by the software to generate the AutoCAD solid shape. These values are not
stored with the component.
For imperial sizes:
Weight (WGT) column is in pounds per foot (lbs/ft)
2
Area (AREA) column is in square inches (in )
All other required columns are in inches (in)
For metric sizes:
Weight (WGT) column is in kilograms per meter (kg/m)
2
Area (AREA) column is in square centimeters (cm )
All other required columns are in millimeters (mm)
235
Steel Shapes Panel
Wide Flange Shapes

Data file sample (TYPE=W)
Required columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
DEPTH - Depth
WEB_THK - Web Thickness
FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width
FLG_THK - Flange Thickness
R - Fillet Radius (not used)
236
Steel Shapes Panel
Channel Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=C)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
WEB_THK - Web Thickness
X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)
237
Steel Shapes Panel
Angle Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=L)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
THK - Thickness
Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)
238
Steel Shapes Panel
Tee Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=WT)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
DEPTH - Depth
STEM_THK - Stem Thickness
239
Steel Shapes Panel
Pipe Shapes
Data file sample (Type=P)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
OD - Outside Diameter
WALL_THK - Wall Thickness (not used)
240
Steel Shapes Panel
Tube Shapes
Data file sample (Type=TS)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
SIDE1 - Side 1 length
SIDE2 - Side 2 length
THK - Thickness
241
Steel Shapes Panel
Flat Bar Shapes

Data file sample (TYPE=FB)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
WIDTH - Width
THK - Thickness
242
Steel Shapes Panel
Round Bar Shapes

Data file sample (Type=RB)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
OD - Outside Diameter
243
Steel Shapes Panel
Channel Shape with Lip

Data file sample (TYPE=C_LIP):
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
DEPTH - Web Thickness
THK - Thickness
LIP - Lip Length
244
Steel Shapes Panel
Angle Shape with Lip

Data file sample (TYPE=L_LIP):
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
THK - Thickness
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
LIP - Lip Length
245
Steel Shapes Panel
Z Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=Z):
Columns:
WEIGHT - Weight
HEIGHT - Height
THK - Thickness
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LIP1 - Lip 1 length (optional)
LEG2 - Leg 2 length (optional)
LIP2 - Lip 2 length (optional)
THK_LEG1 - Leg 1 thickness (optional)
THK_LEG2 - Lip 1 thickness (optional)
THK_LIP1 - Leg 2 thickness (optional)
THK_LIP2 - Lip 2 thickness (optional)
246
Steel Shapes Panel
Angle Double Shape

Data file sample (TYPE=2L)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
THK - Thickness
247
Steel Shapes Panel
248
SECTION 17
Steel Draw Panel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Draw panel
Command Description
Command line
Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, SPLATE

see Plate (on page 250).
Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the
end of a member. For more information, see Base Plate
(on page 252).
SBPLATE
Steel Bolt - Places a bolt in the drawing. For more

information, see Steel Bolts (on page 255).
BTSHAPE
Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting COMP2STEEL

an existing component in the model. For more information,
see Set Size by Component (on page 257).
SGENERICD
Generic Attachment (on page 257).
User Shape - Places a component using a custom user
shape. For more information, see User Shape (on page
258).
SUSER
Loft - Creates loft steel components. For more

information, see Loft (on page 260).
SLOFT
Steel Single Line - Places steel single line components in SLS

the drawing. For more information, see Single Line Steel
(on page 261).
Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can
use to build structural steel models. For more information,
see Steel - Frame Creation (on page 268).
SFRAME
Annotate - Annotates and dimensions frame lines. For

more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).
SFRAMEANOT
Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the

SLADDER
drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 271).
Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more
information, see Handrail (on page 273).
SHRAIL
Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information,

see Stair (on page 275).
SSTAIR
249
Steel Draw Panel
Plate
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Plate
Steel Draw toolbar: Plate
Plant menu: Steel > Plate
Command line: SPLATE
Creates plates in the model using existing shapes or by specifying a minimum of three plate
corners. You define the extrusion direction after selecting the shape or defining the corners.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define plate data files location.
The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using
inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that
defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and
determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41)
is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from
Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters.
Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.
Draw Plate Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the
text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file.
Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in
the data file header.
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup
variable.
Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the
data file header.
Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the
long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.
Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.
Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box.
Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight
defined in the data file.
250
Steel Draw Panel

Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when
editing an existing plate in the model.
Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners.
Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape.
Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.
Place plate by points (on page 251)

Place plate by closed polyline (on page 251)
Place plate by curves (on page 252)
Place plate by points

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Plate
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
You can also type SPLATE in the command line.

The Draw Plate dialog box displays.
In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate.
Select the plate to place in the Select Member list.
Edit the Details boxes as needed.
Click Pick points.
Define the first corner location of the plate.
Continue to define the corners of the plate. When you are finished, right-click and then
select Enter on the menu.
Select Positive or Negative from the context menu.
You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.
Place plate by closed polyline

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Click Select line(s).
Select an existing closed polyline shape in the model.
Right-click and, then select Positive or Negative from the context menu.
You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.
251
Steel Draw Panel
Place plate by curves

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Click Select curve(s).
Select the existing curves in the model.
Right-click.
Enter the width distance for the plate.
Click in the model to indicate which direction to apply the width.
Select Bottom, Center, or Top for the insertion location.
Base Plate
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Base Plate
Steel Draw toolbar: Base Plate
Plant menu: Steel > Base Plate
Command line: SBPLATE
Places base plates in open space or attached to the end of a steel member. CADWorx
automatically copes the steel member with the base plate.
Base Plate Dialog Box

Details
Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
variable.
data file header.
252
Steel Draw Panel

Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material
weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value
yourself.
Plate Dimensions
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Hole Dimensions
On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate
without holes.
Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.
Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the
holes.
Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.
Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of
the holes.
Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.
Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.
Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from
the hole center.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.
Place a base plate (on page 254)

Place a base plate with holes (on page 254)
253
Steel Draw Panel
Place a base plate

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
You can also type SBPLATE in the command line.

The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays.
Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed.
Clear the On/Off option to place the base plate without holes.
Click Pick point.
The prompt Specify center base point displays.
Define the location for the base plate center.
Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.
Place a base plate with holes

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
254
You can also type SBPLATE in the command line.

The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays.
Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed.
Select the On/Off option to place the base plate with holes.
Enter the values for the hole dimensions and locations.
Click Pick point.
The prompt Specify center base point displays.
Define the location for the base plate center.
Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.
Steel Draw Panel
Steel Bolts
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Steel Bolts
Steel Draw toolbar: Steel Bolts
Command line: BTSHAPE
Draws bolts in the drawing. You can place bolt shapes on lines, or you can specify the end
points.

location.
the component.
255
Steel Draw Panel


yourself.
distance.

placed.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location
associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I
contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top
of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software
reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example,
when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you
want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file
values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory
variable.
256
Steel Draw Panel
Set Size by Component

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Set Size by Component
Steel Draw toolbar: Set Size by Component
Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Size by Component
Command line: COMP2STEEL
Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Set Size by Component
.
2. Select an existing component in the model that has the size that you want to use.
Generic Attachment
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Generic Attachment
Steel Draw toolbar: Generic Attachment
Command line: SGENERICD
information on a beam and have it reflect the CG correctly, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint
or NEArest to the end of the centerline or the exact known location.
Generic Attach Dialog Box

Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects.
Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25.
Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange.
Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6.
Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345.
Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36.
Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid.
Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid.
BOM Mark Point - Shows the drawing coordinate location at which the information was
attached.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Generic Attachment
You can also type SGENERICD in the command line.

The Generic Attach dialog box displays.
2. Enter the information to attach in the appropriate boxes.
3. Click Attach.
4. Select the nonCADWorx object to which to attach the information.
257
Steel Draw Panel
User Shape
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > User Shape
Steel Draw toolbar: User Shape
Plant menu: Steel > User Shape
Command line: SUSER
Places a component using a custom user shape. You select the component to draw based on
the user shape DWG file that you previously created. The extrusion direction and distance is
based on points picked or line selected in the drawing. Roll angle can edited along with the
standard annotations.
User Shapes Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing.
Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the shape. The default value comes from
the drawing file that contains the user shape.
Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. The default value
comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.
Description - Specifies the description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing
file that contains the user shape.
Part Number - Specifies the part number for the shape. The default value comes from the
drawing file that contains the user shape.
Material - Specifies the material for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file
that contains the user shape.
Length - Specifies the length of the shape.
Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape.
Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape.
Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing.
Select line - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the
drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.
For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.ini must be in the same folder as the user
shape drawing files. The Type.ini must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The folder
..\CADWorx (version)\Steel_I\User Shape is used to store the user shape drawing files.
258
Steel Draw Panel

The figure below shows the parameters stored in a user created DWG file that can be used to
create a roof purlin user shape.
After selecting the user shape from the dialog, you pick points or select a line to define the
extrusion length. See the figure below.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click User Shape
You can also type SUSER in the command line.

The User Shapes dialog box displays.
2. In the Select Member box, select the user shape to use.
3. Enter values in the Details boxes as needed.
259
Steel Draw Panel

4. Click Pick points to place the component by defining the two end locations.
-orClick Select line to select an existing line in the drawing on which to place the component.
Loft
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Loft
Steel Draw toolbar: Loft
Command line: SLOFT
Creates lofted steel components. You must have two cross sections and the path curve between
them defined in the drawing before using this command. The cross sections define the shape of
the resulting steel component. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.
1. Draw the two cross sections and the path curve in the drawing.
2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Loft
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
260
You can also type SLOFT in the command line.

Enter the material density.
Select the first cross section.
Select the second cross section.
Right-click to indicate you are finished selecting cross sections.
Select the path curve.
Define the annotations, descriptions, part number, and material.
Steel Draw Panel
Single Line Steel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Single Line Steel
Steel Draw toolbar: Single Line Steel
Command line: SLS
Using the Steel Single Line program

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Generate the 3D model of the steel in Model Space.

Create viewports in the Layouts.
Configure the object settings on the General tab. (see below).
Generate the viewports.
Apply new settings to objects.
Configure the dimension settings on the Dimension tab (see below).
Dimension the viewport.
This feature is only part of CADWorx Steel Professional Plus or CADWorx Plant
Professional.
Using the Steel Drawing Manager

The palette can be resized, docked and hidden like any AutoCAD palette. The command
SLSSHOWPALETTE shows the palette if it is hidden. The column line between the field labels
and the settings can be moved left or right to resize the columns.
261
Steel Draw Panel

General Tab
Tools
262
Steel Draw Panel

Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another
drawing
Load Settings From File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any
existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.
Add Setting - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.
Delete Setting - Delete a named setting from the list.
Match Settings - Apply settings from one object to other objects.
Turn off Vertical symbols - Used to turn off vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis
objects.
Generate - Generate the steel member drawing objects in a viewport.
Set to Object - Apply new settings to a viewport or individual steel components already
drawn.
Update - Updates the existing objects to match changes made to the model
Reset Settings - Resets individual member objects back to the viewport settings and link
them back to the view port.
Archive drawings - Detaches all intelligence from the drawing objects. Underlying models
can be removed.
Turn of Vertical Symbols - Used to turn on vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis
objects previously turned off.
Settings List Box - Choose the named settings.
Line Settings
Layer - AutoCAD Layer for New Steel

Color - AutoCAD object color for New Steel
Linetype - Loaded AutoCAD linetype for New Steel
Weight - AutoCAD line weight for New Steel
263
Steel Draw Panel

Layer Exist - AutoCAD Layer for Existing Steel
Color Exist - AutoCAD object color for Existing Steel
Weight Exist - AutoCAD line weight for Existing Steel
Gap Style - Used to set either Manual gap distance or automatic gap distance
Automatic uses the steel member end gap type to gap the lines set by the Gap Distance
setting
Manual applies the Gap Distance to all ends regardless of gap type
Gap Distance - This is a paper space distance for the coping gaps
Tag Settings
Layer - AutoCAD Layers

Color - AutoCAD object colors
Text Style - Loaded text styles
Text Height - Paper space text height
Offset - Set an offset above the line / symbol for the test to be placed
Justification - AutoCAD text justifications
Style - Short or Long descriptions
Display - Display of the tag, on or off
Symbol Settings
Layer Main - AutoCAD Layers for visible parts of the symbol

Color Main - AutoCAD object colors for visible parts of the symbol
Linetype Main - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for visible parts of the symbol
Layer Minor - AutoCAD Layers for hidden parts of the symbol
264
Steel Draw Panel

Color Minor - AutoCAD object colors for hidden parts of the symbol
Linetype Minor - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for hidden parts of the symbol
Scale - Width scale based on the actual visual width in the viewport
Length - Paper space length
Offset - Set the distance between parallel elements for visual effect
Display - Display of the symbol, on or off
Dimension Tab
Tools
Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another
drawing.
265
Steel Draw Panel

Load Settings from File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any
existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.
Add Named Style - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.
Delete Named Style - Delete a named setting from the list.
Generate Plan Dimension - Generate the plan style dimensions of a selected viewport.
Generate Elevated Dimension - Generate the elevation style dimensions of a selected
viewport.
Clear Dimensions - Remove all dimensions of a selected viewport.
Update Dimensions - Update existing dimensions of a selected viewport.
Settings List Box - Used to choose the named settings.
Dimension Level - Select how many dimension levels to use.
Dimension Settings
Layer - AutoCAD Layers

Dim Style - AutoCAD Dimension Styles
Dim Type - Select the dimension type.
Baseline Type
Continue Type
Ordinate Type
Offset - The distance from the edge of the viewport to place the first level dimensions
Elevation Value - The relative elevation of the selected origin point
Elevation Prefix - Prefix for the elevation dimensions
266
Steel Draw Panel

Tag Settings
Display - To display the column tags on the plan dimensions

Layer - AutoCAD Layer of the column tags and text
Color - AutoCAD color of the column tags and text
Style - Text style for the column tags and text
Height - Text height for the column tag text
Balloon Size - Diameter of the column tags
Orientation - The order of the automatic numbering of the column tags.
LR-BT left to right, bottom to top
LR-TB left to right, top to bottom
RL-BT right to left, bottom to top
RL-TB right to left, top to bottom
Vertical - Vertical column tag numbering start and style
Letter (A)
Letter + Number (A1)
Number (1)
Number + Letter (1A)
Horizontal - Horizontal column tag numbering start and style.
Letter (A)
Letter + Number (A1)
Number (1)
Number + Letter (1A)
Vertical Inc - The increment value of the tag number
Increments the second value of a combination tag
Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"
Horizontal Inc - The increment value of the tag number
Increments the second value of a combination tag
Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"
267
Steel Draw Panel
Frame Creation
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Creation
Steel Draw toolbar: Frame Creation
Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Creation
Command line: SFRAME
Create intelligent frames that you can use to build structural steel models.
Frame Creation Dialog Box

Name - Specifies the name for the current frame. The frame name is required only when you
create more than one frame in the same drawing. If you do not specify a name and you save the
frame configuration, the software uses the file name as the frame name.
Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the frame insertion point with your mouse.
Clear this option to use the coordinate location specified in the X, Y, and Z boxes as the frame
insertion location.
Repeat Rows/Columns - Select this option to repeat the same rows and columns as the first
plan for all subsequent plans. This option provides a quick way to create large frames without
repeatedly entering the same information. The setting of this option is saved with the frame
configuration.
Create Clipped Views - Select this option to create clipped views for each plan, row, and
column. These views can then be accessed using the View command in AutoCAD. The views
are clipped in the front and back making them excellent to use in annotation layouts. You need
to select the Update Layer option in the View command dialog for the view to be set correctly.
The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration.
Rotation Angle - Enter the rotation angle for the entire frame. The rotation is about the
specified insertion point. The rotation angle is saved with the frame configuration.
Draw Sloped Vertical Lines - Select this option to make the vertical lines sloped according to
each plans X and Y offsets. This option is useful when creating platform frames and requires
that each plan have the same number of rows and columns. The setting of this option is saved
with the frame configuration.
Plan - Defines the plans for the current frame. Specify the distance from one plan to the next in
the Distance column for each plan. You can also specify X and Y offset values from the
insertion point before the row and column lines for this plan are created.
CADWorx automatically creates labels for each plan based on the distance specified. The
elevation label default setting is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl with the
PLAN_LABEL_START setting. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. The
label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation
command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).
Click Add to add a new plan to the current frame. Click Remove to delete the selected plans
from the current frame. If Repeat Rows/Columns is not selected, Remove deletes all rows and
columns associated with the plan that is being removed.
Row - Defines the rows for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one row to the
next in the Distance column for each row. If Repeat Rows/Columns is selected, the rows are
for the currently selected plan.
CADWorx automatically creates labels for each row. The row label default setting is defined in
[Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [ROW] section contains the characters used in
making the label. If there are more rows and available characters, the labels are concatenated.
268
Steel Draw Panel

For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the Auto label option to define
the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the
Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).
Columns - Defines the columns for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one
column to the next in the Distance column for each column. If Repeat Rows/Columns is
selected, the columns are for the currently selected plan.
CADWorx automatically creates labels for each column. The column label default settings is
defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [COLUMN] section contains the
characters used in making the label. If there are more columns than available characters, the
labels are concatenated. For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the
Auto label option to define the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is
drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame
Annotation (on page 270).
New - Click to create a new frame. You are prompted to save any changes to the current frame.
Save - Click to save the current frame to a file. You are prompted to enter a name and specify
the location to save the frame configuration.
Save As - Click to save the current frame under a different file name.
OK - Click to draw the frame in the current drawing. You are prompted to save any changes to
the current frame.
Create a new frame configuration (on page 269)

Edit a frame configuration (on page 270)
Place a frame in the drawing (on page 270)
Create a new frame configuration

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Creation
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
You can also type SFRAME in the command line.

The Frame Creation dialog box displays.
Define the insertion point for the frame.
Define the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove.
Click Save As.
Enter the frame name, and specify of folder location.
Click Save.
269
Steel Draw Panel
Edit a frame configuration

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Browse, and then open the frame to edit.
Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed.
Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove.
Click Save.
Click Save As to save the frame to a different file.
Place a frame in the drawing

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Browse, and then open the frame to place.
Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed.
Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove as needed.
Click OK.
You are prompted to save any edits that you have made to the frame.
Frame Annotation
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Annotation
Steel Draw toolbar: Frame Annotation
Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Annotation
Command line: SFRAMEANOT
Annotates and dimensions frame lines. This command can also create the dimensions in call
outs in paper space.
Dimensions only - Draws only the dimension for the selected frame line. You are prompted to
pick the dimension side. The distance the dimensions are offset from the frame line is controlled
by the AutoCAD setvar DIMDLI. This option respects the current DIMSCALE setting.
Call outs only - Creates the call out and places the label of the selected frame line in a block
with attribute. The M5 block located in the [Product Directory]\Support folder is used for the call
out. You are prompted to pick the call out location.
Both - This option creates both dimensions and call outs.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Annotation
2.
3.
4.
5.
270
You can also type SFRAMEANOT in the command line.

Select the frame line in the drawing.
Select Dimensions only, Call outs only, or Both.
Select the side of the frame line to place the annotation.
Pick the location of the annotation.
Steel Draw Panel
Ladder
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Ladder
Steel Draw toolbar: Ladder
Plant menu: Steel > Ladder
Command line: SLADDER
Creates ladders by specifying the start and end points of the ladder and rotation angle of the
ladder. Click Browse to load a predefined ladder into the dialog box. Use Save As to save a
ladder configuration for use later.
Position Tab
Start point / End point - Defines the location of the ladder.
Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the start and end ladder locations interactively
in the model. Clear this option to define the locations using the X, Y, and Z coordinate boxes.
Rotation angle - Defines the rotation angle for the entire ladder. Select Specify On-screen to
define the rotation interactively in the drawing. Clear the option to use the rotation value
specified in the Angle box.
Dimension Tab
Sloped ladder - Select to allow the ladder to be sloped. The slope is determined by the
difference between the X or Y start and end locations in the Position Tab.
Rail width - Enter the inside distance from rail to rail.
Above platform - Enter the distance the ladder rails (offset extension of rail) are to extend
above the top rung.
Rail top exit width - Enter the inside to inside distance of the ladder opening above the
platform.
Rung spacing - Enter the center to center distance of the ladder rungs.
Offset (+/-) - Enter the distance the ladder is offset from the platform.
Cage Tab
Cage ladder - Select to place a cage on the ladder if the height of the ladder is over the
minimum distance.
Curved - Select to connect the hoop bars to the ladder using a curved connection.
Max. hoop spacing - Enter the distance from center to center of the intermediate hoops.
Cage bar spacing - Enter the distance from the center to center of the vertical bars on the
cage.
Bottom hoop clearance - Enter the distance from the base elevation or grade to the bottom
hoop.
Distance to middle - Enter the distance from the ladder rungs to the center of the cage.
Small hoop radius - Enter the radius of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is
available only when Curved is selected.
Connection distance - Enter the distance of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is
available only when Curved is not selected.
Top hoop radius - Enter the radius of the top hoop from the center of the cage.
271
Steel Draw Panel

Intermediate hoop radius - Enter the radius of the intermediate hoop from the center of the
cage.
Bottom hoop radius - Enter the radius of the bottom hoop from the center of the cage.
Top hoop opening - Defines the direction of the hoop opening. If you select Open Left or
Open Right, you need to define the side outlet width and extension distances.
Side outlet width - Enter the width of the cage side opening.
Side outlet extension - Enter the length of the side outlet extension.
Sizes Tab
The bars, rungs, hoops, and cage bars rows allows the selection of different components to be
used with the ladder.
Type - Select the member type.
Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration settings.
Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected.
Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog
box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.
Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation
is used in bill of material reports.
Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is
used in bill of material reports.
X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis.
Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member.
Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis.
Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member.
Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.
Place a ladder interactively (on page 272)

Place a ladder using key-ins (on page 273)
Place a ladder with a cage (on page 273)
Place a ladder interactively

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Ladder
.
You can also type SLADDER in the command line.
The Ladder dialog box displays.
2. Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place.
3. Select the Position tab.
4. Select the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points.
5. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs.
6. Click OK.
7. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the
ladder as defined but not to save the ladder properties for reuse.
8. Define the location of the ladder bottom.
9. Define the location of the ladder top.
272
Steel Draw Panel
Place a ladder using key-ins

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place.
Select the Position tab.
Clear the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points.
Enter the ladder start and end points using the X, Y, and Z boxes. The bottom of the ladder
is defined on the left. The top of the ladder is defined on the right.
If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs.
Click OK.
If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the
The ladder is placed in the drawing.
Place a ladder with a cage

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place.
Select the Cage tab.
Select the Caged ladder option.
If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Position, Dimension, and Size tabs.
Click OK.
The ladder is placed in the drawing.
Handrail
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Hand Rail
Steel Draw toolbar: Hand Rail
Plant menu: Steel > Hand Rail
Command line: SHRAIL
Creates handrails in the drawing using specified corner points of the handrail or a polyline or 3D
polyline that defines the path of the handrail. You are prompted to specify the offset direction
after the points have been picked, or the polyline has been selected.
Dimensions Tab
Post below platform (+/-) - Enter the distance to place the hand rail above or below the
platform to which it is attached to.
Platform offset dist (+/-) - Enter the distance to offset the hand rail. The hand rail can be offset
away from or over the platform.
273
Steel Draw Panel

Start/end offset - Enter the distance from the end of the hand rail to place the post or
stanchion. This distance applies to both ends of the hand rail.
Max post spacing - Enter the maximum distance between the post or stanchions.
Spacing distance - Enter the vertical spacing between the rails. Use Add and Remove to
change the number of rails.
Sizes Tab
The top rail, intermediate rail, bottom rail, and post can have different components for the hand
rail.
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file.
Place hand rail by points (on page 274)

Place hand rail by polyline (on page 275)
Place hand rail by points

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
274
You can also type SHRAIL in the command line.

The Hand Rail dialog box displays.
Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place.
Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs.
Click Pick points.
hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse.
Specify the starting location for the hand rail.
Continue placing vertex points for the hand rail path.
Right-click, and then select Enter.
Identify the path side that is away from the platform.
Steel Draw Panel
Place hand rail by polyline

1. Place a polyline or 3D polyline in the drawing that defines the hand rail path.
2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
You can also type SHRAIL in the command line.

The Hand Rail dialog box displays.
Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place.
Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs.
Click Select line.
hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse.
Select the polyline in the drawing.
Identify the path side that is away from the platform.
Stair
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Stair
Steel Draw toolbar: Stair
Plant menu: Steel > Stair
Command line: SSTAIR
Creates stairs in the drawing by specifying the top point of the stair and then a base elevation.
Position Tab
Top point - Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the top of the stairs. You can click Specified
On-screen to select a point in the drawing.
Base elevation - Enter the elevation at the bottom of stringer. You can click Specified
On-screen to select a point in the drawing.
Rotation angle - Enter the rotation in degrees. You can click Specified On-screen to define the
rotation in the drawing.
Dimension Tab
Tread
Boxes are disabled until the top point and bottom elevation are entered in the Position Tab. The
software then calculates initial values based on the top point and bottom elevation.
Changes made to
Recalculates
(A) Total rise
(C) Rise
(B) Riser count
(C) Rise, (E) Run
(C) Rise
(A) Total rise
(D) First rise
(C) Rise
(E) Run
(F) Total run
275
Steel Draw Panel

(F) Total run
(E) Run
(A) Total rise - Enter the distance between the bottom elevation and the top point.
(B) Riser count - Enter the number of risers (steps or treads) in the stair.
(C) Rise - Enter the distance between from the top of one riser to the top of the next riser.
(D) First rise - Enter the distance from the bottom elevation to the top of the first riser.
(E) Run - Enter the depth of the riser (if you were standing in front of the stair).
(F) Total Run - Enter the total length (measured horizontally) of the stair.
Stringer
Width - Enter the inside distance between the two stringers.
(H) Top extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the riser.
(J) Top clear - Enter the distance between the top of the stringer and the top point defined for
stair.
(K) Base extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the edge of the first riser.
(M) Base clear - Enter the distance between the bottom of the stringer and the bottom elevation
point.
Miscellaneous
(N) Stair offset - Enter the offset distance from the top stair location point.
(P) Angle - Enter the stair angle measured from horizontal.
Sizes Tab
You can define different components to use for the riser and the stringer.
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file.
276
Steel Draw Panel

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Stair
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
You can also type SSTAIR in the command line.

The Stair dialog box displays.
Using the Specify On-screen button or the X, Y, and Z boxes, define the top point for the
stairs.
Using the Specify On-screen button or the Z box, define the base elevation for the stairs.
Using the Specify On-screen button or the Angle box, define the rotation for the stairs.
Select the Dimension tab.
Review and edit the tread and stringer properties as needed. Refer to Dimension Tab if
needed.
Select the Sizes tab.
Define the components sizes for the treads and the stringers.
Click OK.
277
Steel Draw Panel
278
SECTION 18
Steel Edit Panel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC > Steel Edit
Command Description
Command line
Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more

information, see Cope (on page 280).
SCOPE
Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more
information, see Miter (on page 280).
SMITER
Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more

information, see Cut (on page 281).
SCUT
Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on
page 282).
SUNION
Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, see

Edit (on page 282).
SCEDIT
Global Edit - Edits the annotation, description, part number, and

material of multiple components. For more information, see Global
Edit (on page 286).
SGCEDIT
Global Edit All - Edits multiple components of the same member

shape. For more information, see Global Edit All (on page 287).
SGCEDITALL
Annotate Component - Places the long or short annotation of the

component in the drawing. For more information, see Annotate
Component (on page 289).
SCOMPANOT
Convert Solid - Converts components to solids. For more

information, see Convert Solid (on page 289).
SCONVERTSOLID
Layer Change - Moves steel solid or center lines to a new layer. For SLAYERCHANGE /
more information, see Layer Change (on page 290).
SSETEXIST /
SREMOVEEXIST
Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For
more information, see Select Control (on page 290).
SELECTCONTROL
Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of members. For

more information, see Auto Cope (on page 290).
SAUTOCOPE
279
Steel Edit Panel
Cope
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cope
Steel Edit toolbar: Cope
Plant menu: Steel > Cope
Command line: SCOPE
Copes steel members to other steel members. You can place bolted coping or welded coping.
Bolted coping is controlled by SteelCopeBoltDistance (on page 39) and provides a gap between
the coped member and the boundary member. Welded cope is controlled by
SteelCopeWeldDistance (on page 40) and provides a gap between the coped member and the
boundary member. You can:
Cope a single member to another single member that provides the cope boundary.
Cope many members to many other members.
A member that crosses another member is cut into two separate members.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cope
You can also type SCOPE in the command line.

2. Select the members to cope. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
3. Select the members to cope against. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
4. Select bolted or welded cope.
Bolt - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeBoltDistance startup
variable.
Weld - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeWeldDistance startup
variable.
Miter
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Miter
Steel Edit toolbar: Miter
Plant menu: Steel > Miter
Command line: SMITER
Miters two structural pieces to fit each other. The two structural pieces must be in the same
plane and have connected member ends. You miter multiple member pairs in each command
pass.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Miter
You can also type SMITER in the command line.

2. Select the members to miter.
3. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The software miters the selected members.
280
Steel Edit Panel
Cut
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cut
Steel Edit toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: Steel > Cut
Command line: SCUT
Cuts steel members along a plane that you define by an existing line or by points placed in the
drawing. The software updates the lengths, weight, and other affected properties of the cut
members. You cannot cut plate members with this command.
Line - Defines the plane using the two end points of the line and its extrusion direction (the
Z-axis of the plane the line was drawn in).
Points - Defines the plane using three points you pick in the drawing.
Cut members by line (on page 281)

Cut members by three-point plane (on page 281)
Cut members by line

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SCUT in the command line.

Select Line.
Select the line to use to define the plane.
Select the members to cut.
Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.
Cut members by three-point plane

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SCUT in the command line.

Select Points.
Pick three points in the drawing to define the cutting plane.
Select the members to cut.
Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.
281
Steel Edit Panel
Union
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Union
Steel Edit toolbar: Union
Plant menu: Steel > Union
Command line: SUNION
Joins two or more steel members into one member. The members must have the same
properties for:
Member size (W10x30 for example)
Insertion location
Centerline location
Rotation angle
Data file
Short annotation
Long annotation
Description
Material
Part number
In addition, the two center lines must meet each other but not intersect or overlap.
Curved members cannot be joined with straight members.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Union
You can also type SUNION in the command line.

2. Select the first member to join.
3. Select the second member to join.
4. Continue to select members. When you are finished, right-click or press ENTER to join the
members.
Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Edit
Steel Edit toolbar: Edit
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Local Edit
Command line: SCEDIT
Edits the properties of steel shapes and plates in the drawing. You can start this command from
the command line, the command icon, or by double-clicking the object you want to edit.

282
Steel Edit Panel

location.
the component.

yourself.
283
Steel Edit Panel

distance.

placed.
Draw Plate Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the
text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
variable.
data file header.
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.
284
Steel Edit Panel

Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when
editing an existing plate in the model.
Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners.
Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape.
Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.
Base Plate Dialog Box

Details
Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
variable.
data file header.
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material
weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value
yourself.
Plate Dimensions
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.
285
Steel Edit Panel

Hole Dimensions
On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate
without holes.
Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.
Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the
holes.
Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.
Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of
the holes.
Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.
Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.
Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from
the hole center.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.
Global Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit
Steel Edit toolbar: Global Edit
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit
Command line: SGCEDIT
Edits short annotation, long annotation, description, part number, and material for multiple
components at one time. Changes to any or all of the edit boxes are made to each selected
component. Leave the edit boxes blank for those properties you do not want to edit.
Steel Global Edit Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name. Generally, this is the member name up
to the first "X" character (for example, W10 is the short annotation name for W10X30).
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name (for example, W10X30).
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component.
Material - Specifies the material for the component.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit
.
You can also type SGCEDIT in the command line.
2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.
3. Edit the appropriate property boxes. Leave blank the properties that you do not want to
change.
4. Click OK.
286
Steel Edit Panel
Global Edit All

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit All
Steel Edit toolbar: Global Edit All
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit All
Command line: SGCEDITALL
Edits multiple components of the same member shape. After selecting multiple components or
maybe your entire drawing, you can filter the component to edit by member shape.

location.
the component.
287
Steel Edit Panel


yourself.
distance.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit All
You can also type SGCEDITALL in the command line.

2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.
3. Select the member shapes you want to edit. You can select more than one group to edit,
although you edit the groups one at a time.
4. Click OK.
The Component Edit dialog box displays.
288
Steel Edit Panel

5. Edit the member properties as needed. See Draw Steel Dialog Box for more information
about this dialog.
6. Click OK.
The software displays the number of components that were updated.
7. If you selected more than one group, the Component Edit dialog box displays the next
group.
8. Edit the member properties as needed.
9. Click OK.
Annotate Component
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Annotate Component
Command line: SCOMPANOT
Places the short or long annotations of selected steel members in the drawing.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Annotate Component
You can also type SCOMPANOT in the command line.

2. Select the component to annotate. Type Auto to have the software automatically determine
the annotation rotation and location. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
3. Select Long to place the defined long annotation.
or
Select Short to place the defined short annotation.
4. Define the annotation starting location.
5. Define the annotation rotation.
Convert Solid
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Convert Solid
Steel Edit toolbar: Convert Solid
Command line: SCONVERTSOLID
Creates the solid representation of component. When you have deleted the solid representation
and have been modeling using only centerlines, this command is used to re-create the solid
cross-section representation of the component.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Convert Solid
You can also type SCONVERTSOLID in the command line.

2. Select the components to convert. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The software creates the solids.
289
Steel Edit Panel
Layer Change
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Layer Change
Steel Edit toolbar: Layer Change
Command line: SLAYERCHANGE / SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST
Edits the existing flag for steel members and changes layers for steel solid and centerline
graphics.
The software automatically moves steel plates and base plates centerlines to whichever
layer is chosen for the corresponding solid.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Layer Change
.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
You can also type SLAYERCHANGE in the command line.

Select All to select all components in the drawing.
-orSelect Select to manually select steel members. Press ENTER or right-click when you are
finished.
Select Yes to change the solid layer of the selected components.
Select the new layer, and then click OK.
Select Yes to change the centerline layer of the selected components.
Select the new layer, and then click OK.
Select Control
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Select Control
Steel Edit toolbar: Select Control
Command line: SELECTCONTROL
Toggles whether grip points are displayed on solids. To change the length of pipe or steel, you
can grip stretch the pipe or steel centerline. However, it may be difficult to select the center line
endpoint grip for steel shapes when solid grip points are on. Turning off the solid grip points with
this toggle makes it easier to grip stretch components.
Auto Cope
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Auto Cope
Steel Edit toolbar: Auto Cope
Plant menu: Steel > Auto Cope
Command line: SAUTOCOPE
Toggles the automatic coping of members on or off. When two members are coped and this
feature is on, the system automatically reapplies the cope when one of the members is
changed. Select this command again to turn off the automatic coping feature.
290
SECTION 19
Steel BOM / DB Panel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel BOM DB Panel
Command Description
Steel BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to
any style or layout that you need. For more information, see Steel
BOM Setup (on page 292).
Command line
SBOMSETUP
Cut Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each SBOMCUT
piece of steel with a length and a tag. For more information, see
Cut Steel Bill of Material (on page 294).
Total Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one
tag for a total length of steel in each size. For more information,
see Total Steel Bill of Material (on page 296).
SBOMTOTAL
Single Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with

each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see
Single Steel Bill of Material (on page 297).
SBOMSINGLE
Export Steel BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to

an external file format that you specify. For more information, see
Export Steel Bill of Material (on page 299).
SBOMEXPORT
Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. SLIVEDB

For more information, see Setup Live Database Steel (on page
300).
Export Steel Database - Exports steel components to Microsoft
SDBFGEN
Access or Microsoft Excel. For more information, see Export Steel
(on page 301).
Import Steel Database - Imports and draws CADWorx steel
components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For
more information, see Import Steel (on page 301).
SDBFIN
Audit Steel Database - Compares the database with the drawing

displaying any differences between the two. For more information,
see Audit Steel Database (on page 302).
SDBAUDIT
Synchronize Steel Database - Checks all components in the

drawing and updates them according to the current value within
the database tables. For more information, see Synchronize Steel
Database (on page 302).
SSYNC
Export Steel Model - Exports the steel model to CAESAR II,

Robobat, or CIS/2 files. For more information, see Export Steel
Model (on page 303).
SEXPORT
Import Steel Model - Imports a CIS/2 file into the current drawing. SIMPORT
For more information, see Import Steel Model (on page 303).
291

C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected
SCG
steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on page
304).
Steel BOM Setup

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Setup
Command line: SBOMSETUP
box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user
specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different
entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.
Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.
Steel Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can include in
the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order.
Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of steel components in the BOM. For
more information, see Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 294).
292


1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup
You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line.

The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.
2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Available
list.
3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns
Selected list.
4. Click OK.


4. Click OK.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list.
Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column.
Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected
column.
Click OK.

.
2. Click Sort Order.
The Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays.
3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list.
4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM.
5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how
to A.
6. Click OK on the Steel BOM Sort Order dialog box.
7. Click OK on the Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box.
293
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box

Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list
are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth.
Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted.
This dialog box also controls the accumulation of steel components. For example, if two
members have different Short Annotation values and you do not want these to accumulate,
Short Annotation would have to be added to the BOM Columns Selected list.
BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort
the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add.
BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their
sort order from top to bottom.
Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting
from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click
Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.
Cut Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Cut
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Cut
Command line: SBOMCUT
Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of steel with a length and a tag. Identical
items are accumulated in the quantity column. For example, if you select two W14X74
components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:
BILL OF MATERIALS
MARK
QTY
LONG ANNOTATION
LENGTH
WEIGHT
W14X74
120.00
1480.00
TOTAL WEIGHT: 1480.00

The steel component could have been converted with the Existing option.
tags.
294



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line.

Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut
You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line.

2. Select the Manual placement option.
295

4. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.
5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected.
Total Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Total
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Total
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Total
Command line: SBOMTOTAL
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of steel in each size.
Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column. For example, if you select
two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:
BILL OF MATERIALS
MARK
QTY
LONG ANNOTATION
LENGTH
WEIGHT
W14X74
240.00
1480.00

The component could have been converted with the Existing option.
tags.
296



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line.

are finished.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line.

are finished.
Single Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Single
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Single
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Single
Command line: SBOMSINGLE
schedule. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the
BOM looks like this:
297

BILL OF MATERIALS
MARK
QTY
LONG ANNOTATION
LENGTH
WEIGHT
W14X74
120.00
740.00
W14X74
120.00
740.00

The component could have been converted with the Existing option.
tags.
298


1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line.

are finished.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line.

are finished.
Export Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Export
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Export
Command line: SBOMEXPORT
Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The
schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Steel BOM Setup (on page 292). CADWorx can
export the Bill of Material schedules to:
Access file (*.mdb)
Excel file (*.xls)
Text file (*.txt)
HTML file (*.htm)
When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a
single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in
Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard
selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from
text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be
totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension
Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.
299

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
You can also type SBOMEXPORT in the command line.

Specify if you want an Cut, Total, or Single BOM.
Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.
In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want.
Type the file name, and specify the folder location.
Click Save.
Setup Live Database Steel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Setup
Command line: SLIVEDB
CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the
database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a
configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that
configuration file using a live database or not.
When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that
component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the
drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then
the item is deleted from the database.
All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.
On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are
updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the
database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.
Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the
type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.
Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create
the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an
existing database.
SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database
information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide
for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the
Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.
Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in
the Schema box.
Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.
No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in
the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved
immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with
the appropriate configuration file.
No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the
database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.
300
Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or
not.
Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for
Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).
Export Steel
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Export
Command line: SDBFGEN
Exports CADWorx steel information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a
Microsoft Excel file.
Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of
the dialog display the file name and folder in use.
Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the
database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database
according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to
maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database
file at the same time.
New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
You can also type SDBFGEN in the command line.

Select the steel components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when
you are finished.
Select Access or Excel to define the file type.
Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.
Select New if you are creating a new file.
or
Click OK.
Import Steel
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Import
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Import
Command line: SDBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
This command is not available when you are using a live database.
Use the Export Steel (on page 301) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file to import.
301

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SDBFIN in the command line.

Browse to and select the file to import.
Click Open.
The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays.
Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing.
Click OK.
Audit Steel Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Audit
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Audit
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Audit
Command line: SDBAUDIT
option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Audit
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can also type SDBAUDIT in the command line.

Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing.
Click Open.
The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays.
If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays.
If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to
Synchronize Steel Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Synchronize
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Synchronize
Command line: SSYNC
are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database Steel (on
page 300) before using this command.
SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and
MATERIAL fields in the STEEL table. Changing any other column value does not have any
effect on the drawing.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize
302

You can also type SSYNC in the command line.
Export Steel Model

Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Export
Command line: SEXPORT
Exports selected CADWorx steel components to one of three data format: CIS/2, CAESAR II, or
RoboBat. The export to CIS/2 requires installing the "ST-Runtime" in [Product
Folder]\System\struntime.msi.
You can also type SEXPORT in the command line.

2. Select the steel components to export. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.
The Select Export Output File Type dialog box displays.
3. Select the file type to save in the Save as type box.
4. Specify the folder and file name, and then click Save.
If you selected CAESAR II, a prompt displays.
5. Enter the starting node number for the CAESAR II file.
6. Enter the node increment value.
Import Steel Model

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import
Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Import
Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Import
Command line: SIMPORT
Imports a CIS/2 data file and creates CADWorx steel components. The import requires that the
CADWorx steel parametric data file be available for the components that are being imported
from the CIS/2 file. This command requires installing the "ST-Runtime" from [Product
Folder]\System\struntime.msi.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import
.
You can also type SIMPORT in the command line.
2. Select the file to import.
3. Click Open.
303
CG Generator
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > C.G. Generator
Steel toolbar: C.G. Generator
Plant menu: Steel > C.G. Generator
Command line: SCG
Calculates the center of gravity (CG) of the steel members (including plates) in a drawing. You
must select the members for which to calculate the center of gravity.
To combine center of gravity reports for piping and steel components, take the weight
summations and add them together. Then take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add
them together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the
total weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator
2.
3.
4.
5.
304
You can also type SCG in the command line.

Select the members to cope. Type All in the command line to select all the members in
drawing. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
Select Yes to save the center of gravity report to a text file. Provide the file name and folder
information if you choose to save the report.
Select Yes to view the weight summation in the command area.
Select Yes to place a smaller round marker in the drawing indicating the calculated center of
gravity.
SECTION 20
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel
Command Description
HVAC Shapes - Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the
drawing. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306).
Command line
HVAC
HVAC Shapes Catalog - Places HVAC shapes and cable tray

HVACC
shapes that are defined in a data file library. For more information,
see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308).
User Shape - Places a component using a custom user shape.
For more information, see User Shape (on page 310).
HUSER
Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD

object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach
(on page 313)
HGENERIC
Edit - Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. For more information, see HCEDIT
Edit (on page 314).
GC Edit - Edits global HVAC component data. For more
information, see GC Edit (on page 315).
HGCEDIT
HVAC BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to

HBOMSETUP
any style or layout that you need. For more information, see HVAC
BOM Setup (on page 315).
Cut HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing
HBOMCUT
each piece of HVAC with a length and a tag. For more information,
see Cut HVAC Bill of Material (on page 318).
Total HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one HBOMTOTAL
tag for a total length of HVAC in each size. For more information,
see Total HVAC Bill of Material (on page 319).
Single HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with
each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see
Single HVAC Bill of Material (on page 321).
HBOMSINGLE
Data Remove - Removes CADWorx data from components. For

more information, see Data Remove (on page 322).
HDATAREMOVE
Layer Change - Changes the solid and centerline layers

associated with components. For more information, see Layer
Change (on page 322).
HLAYERCHANGE
Export HVAC - Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a

HDBFGEN
Export HVAC (on page 323).
305

Import HVAC - Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components
from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more
information, see Import HVAC (on page 324).
HDBFIN
Audit HVAC Database - Maintains the database for each

component in the drawing that has data attached. For more
information, see Audit HVAC Database (on page 324).
HDBAUDIT
Synchronize HVAC Database - Checks all components in the

HSYNC
drawing and updates them according to the current value in the
database. For more information, see Synchronize HVAC Database
(on page 325).
HVAC
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: HVAC Shapes
Plant menu: HVAC > Shapes
Command line: HVAC
Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to
modify the parameters.
Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing.
Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing.
The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape.
Dimensions - Displays a dimensioned preview of the selected shape. Type dimension values
for the drawing in the A through K boxes. All dimensions are in the current units set. Dimension
boxes that are not required are disabled.
Options
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside
dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top.
Inside Dimensions - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the Thickness value
added to all the necessary dimensions in the A through K boxes. If this option is cleared, the
dimensions of the shape do not include the Thickness value.
Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting.
Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow.
Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this
option with oval shapes.
Open bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot
use this option with oval shapes.
Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a
single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size.
Details
Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape.
Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape.
Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape.
306

There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight.
Select lines - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the

Controls parameters for modifying HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing.
Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing.
The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape.
Options
Details
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing (on page 308)

Modify an HVAC shape (on page 308)
307
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing

1. Click HVAC Shapes
. Alternatively, type HVAC on the command line, and press ENTER.
The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays.
2. Select the shape to place from the Select Shape list.
The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes.
3. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements.
4. Click Pick points.
5. Select the first point for the shape.
6. Select the end point for the shape.
Modify an HVAC shape

1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing.
The Component Edit dialog box displays the parameters associated with the shape.
2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC (on
page 306).
3. Click Apply.
The software changes the parameters of the shape.
HVAC Shapes Catalog

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes Catalog
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: HVAC Shapes Catalog
Command line: HVACC
Places HVAC shapes and cable tray shapes that are defined in a data file library. Double-click
an existing HVAC shape to modify the parameters.
Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box

Select Data File - Specifies the data file that contains the components to place. The list
contains all the data files located in the folder defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 35)
startup variable. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder.
CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.
Select Type - Specifies the shape to place. The list contains the folders defined by the
HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 35) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.INI file specifying
the shape type in that folder (Square Straight, Oval Straight, and so forth).
308

Part Name - Specifies the part name for the shape.
Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the MATERIAL= value
in the data file header.
Area - Specifies the area of the shape.
Manual - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from
the catalog.

Place an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 310)

Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 310)
309
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog

1. Click HVAC Shapes Catalog
. Alternatively, type HVACC on the command line, and
press ENTER.
The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays.
2. Select the data file to use from the Select Data file list.
The software populates the Select Type list with the available types.
3. Select the type of shape to use from the Select Type list.
The software populates the Select Member list with the available members.
4. Select the member to use from the Select Member list.
The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes.
5. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC
Shapes Catalog (on page 308).
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog

2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC
Shapes Catalog (on page 308).
3. Click Apply.
User Shape
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > User Shape
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: User Shape
Command line: HUSER
Places a component using a custom user-defined shape. You select the component to draw
based on an existing user-shape DWG file. The extrusion direction and distance is based on
points picked or a line selected in the drawing. You can edit the roll angle along with the
standard annotations.
For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.INI must be in the same folder as the user
shape drawing files. The Type.INI file must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The
folder (...\CADWorx\Plant\\HVAC\) contains the user shape drawing files.
310

Shown below are the parameters stored in a user-created .DWG file that can be used to create
a user shape. The user shape profile must be a closed polyline or an AutoCAD Region entity.
After you select the shape from the dialog box, you can pick points or select a line to determine
the extrusion length.
The default insert location for the user shape is 0,0,0. To specify a different insert location, add
an AutoCAD POINT entity to the profile .DWG to locate the insert point.
User Shapes Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing.
311


Controls parameters for modifying user-defined shapes in the drawing.
Manual Update - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the
value from the drawing.
312
Place a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 313)

Modify a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 313)
Place a user-defined HVAC shape

1. Click User Shape
. Alternatively, type HUSER on the command line, and press ENTER.
The HVAC User Shapes dialog box displays.
2. Select the folder that contains the Type.INI data file to use from the Select Directory list.
The software populates the Select Member list with the available shapes.
3. Select the shape to use from the Select Member list.
The preview and details for that shape display in the Details boxes.
4. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User
Shape (on page 310).
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape

2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User Shape
(on page 310).
3. Click Apply.
Generic Attach
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Generic Attach
Command line: HGENERIC
information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and
pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.
Generic Attach (Create) Dialog Box

Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects.
313

attached.
Generic Attach (Edit) Dialog Box

Controls parameters for modifying information on generic AutoCAD objects.
attached.
Place a generic attachment in the drawing (on page 314)

Modify a generic attachment (on page 314)

1. Click Generic Attach
. Alternatively, type HGENERIC on the command line, and press
ENTER.
The Generic Attach (Create) dialog box displays.
2. Set up the attachment parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see
3. Click Attach.
4. Select the non CADWorx object to which to attach the information.
Modify a generic attachment

1. Double-click a generic attachment in the drawing.
The Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays the parameters associated with the
attachment.
2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see Generic
Attach (on page 313).
3. Click Apply.
The software changes the parameters of the attachment.
Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Edit
Command line: HCEDIT
Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. This command displays the same dialog box that was used to
place the shape. You cannot change the object shape using this command. For more
information, see HVAC (on page 306).
314
GC Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > GC Edit
Command line: HGCEDIT
Edits global HVAC component data.
HVAC Global CEdit Dialog Box

Controls parameters for editing global HVAC component data.
Alter solid - Specifies whether the way the components are drawn can be changed.
Open Bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot
Edit HVAC components globally

1. Click GCEdit
. Alternatively, type HGCEDIT on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the objects to edit, and press ENTER.
The HVAC Global CEdit dialog box displays.
3. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see GC Edit (on
page 315).
4. Click OK.
The software applies the parameters to the selected components.
HVAC BOM Setup

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Setup
HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Setup
Command line: HBOMSETUP
315

box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide
user-specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different
entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.
Table Setup Tab

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include
in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
Columns Selected lists.
the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order.
Sort Order Setup Tab

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include
in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
Columns Selected lists.
the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order.
316



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup
. Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in
the command line, and press ENTER.
The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.
2. To add a property to the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Available list, and
then click Add.
3. To remove a property from the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Selected
list, and then click Remove.
4. Click OK.

4. Click OK.

2. Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list.
3. Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column.
4. Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected
column.
5. Click OK.

2. Select the Sort Order Setup tab.
317

3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list.
4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM.
5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how
to A.
6. Click OK.
Cut HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Cut
HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Cut
Command line: HBOMCUT
Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each HVAC component with a length and a tag.
tags.
318



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut
. Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the
3. Type the placement angle for the tag, and press ENTER.
5. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut
. Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the
are finished.
Total HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Total
HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Total
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Total
Command line: HBOMTOTAL
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of HVAC components in
each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column.
tags.
319



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total
. Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in
are finished.

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total
. Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in
are finished.
320
Single HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Single
HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Single
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Single
Command line: HBOMSINGLE
schedule.
tags.

321

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single
. Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE
in the command line, and press ENTER.
are finished.

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single
. Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE
in the command line, and press ENTER.
are finished.
Data Remove
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Data Remove
Command line: HCDATAREMOVE
Removes CADWorx data from components.
Remove CADWorx data from components

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Data Remove
. Alternatively, type
HDATAREMOVE in the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the objects from which to remove the CADWorx data, and press ENTER.
A dialog box displays asking if you are sure that you want to remove the data.
3. Click Yes.
The software removes the CADWorx data from the selected components.
Layer Change
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Layer Change
Command line: HLAYERCHANGE
Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components.
322
Change the layers associated with HVAC components

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Layer Change
. Alternatively, type
HLAYERCHANGE in the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the objects to change, and press ENTER.
3. If you want to change the solid layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from the
popup menu.
The Please select Layer dialog box displays.
4. Select the layer with which to associate the solid part of the component, and click OK.
5. If you want to change the centerline layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from
the popup menu.
The Please select Layer dialog box displays.
6. Select the layer with which to associate the centerline of the component, and click OK.
The software changes the layers.
Export HVAC
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Export
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Export
Command line: HDBFGEN
Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
Select Database Type Dialog Box
Export CADWorx HVAC data

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Export
. Alternatively, type HDBFGEN in
2. Select the HVAC components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when
you are finished.
3. Select Access or Excel to define the file type.
4. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.
5. Select New if you are creating a new file.
or
6. Click OK.
323
Import HVAC
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Import
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Import
Command line: HDBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file. This command is not available when you are using a live database.
Use the Export HVAC (on page 323) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft
Excel file to import.
Import CADWorx HVAC data

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Import
. Alternatively, type HDBFIN in the
2. Select the file to import.
3. Click Open.
The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays.
4. Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing.
5. Click OK.
Audit HVAC Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Audit
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Audit
Command line: HDBAUDIT
option to delete this component in the database or to ignore it.
Audit the HVAC database

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Audit
. Alternatively, type HDBAUDIT in the
2. Select the file to audit against the drawing.
3. Click Open.
Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database.
4. If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays.
5. If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to
324
Synchronize HVAC Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Synchronize
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize
Command line: HSYNC
are in the model but are not in the database.
SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and
MATERIAL fields in the HVAC table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect
on the drawing.
Synchronize the HVAC database

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize
. Alternatively, type HSYNC in
325
326
SECTION 21
Toolbars
In This Section
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars ............................................ 327
Aliases and Command Names ...................................................... 328
Connecting to components ............................................................ 328
Compass ........................................................................................ 328
Plane versus Isometrics view modes ............................................ 328
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling .................................................. 329
Buttweld ......................................................................................... 329
Flanges .......................................................................................... 361
Flgd/BW Valves ............................................................................. 375
Lined .............................................................................................. 389
Fiberglass ...................................................................................... 394
Sanitary .......................................................................................... 412
Victaulic.......................................................................................... 447
Threaded/Socket ........................................................................... 450
Thrd/SW Valves ............................................................................. 481
Gaskets, Etc. ................................................................................. 495
Restraints ....................................................................................... 497
Misc ................................................................................................ 498
Operators ....................................................................................... 504
Line Numbers ................................................................................ 504
UCS ............................................................................................... 505
Steel ............................................................................................... 505
Settings .......................................................................................... 507
Palettes .......................................................................................... 509
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars

Toolbars duplicate commands available on the CADWorx Plant I and CADWorx Plant II tabs.
You may find it useful to open toolbars containing frequently-used commands when screen
space for the tab is limited.
To open a Plant toolbar, click Plant > Toolbars, and select the needed toolbar. You can also
open an alternate set of toolbars from View tab > Windows panel > Toolbars > PIPEALT,
PIPEFLY, or PIPERIB.
To dock a toolbar, drag it to any edge of the window. Press CTRL to drag a toolbar without
docking it. You can then drag a toolbar off of the window space.
The AutoCAD Toolbar command opens the Customize User Interface dialog box. You
can choose any needed toolbars for AutoCAD or CADWorx Plant.
327
Toolbars
Aliases and Command Names

Ribbon, toolbar, and menu commands have a command name that you can type in the
command line.
A command alias is an abbreviation that you type at the command line instead of typing the
entire command name. Command aliases created for Plant are delivered in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\Support\Flow_alt.pgp file.
You can change alias names but should avoid conflicts with aliases already defined in the .pgp
file for AutoCAD.
Connecting to components
In connecting to components, Piping Rules effect the behavior of prompts when set to No or
Show Options. If selecting a component from a palette or toolbar, the selected component
prompts you if unable to derive information from the surrounding components due to the piping
rules. When the rules are set to Automatic, the process is simplified for connecting components
to appropriate valued objects. For instance, when inserting a flange to a pipe, if both have the
same size and specification you are not prompted and the flange inserts automatically. For more
information, see Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) or all other Piping Rules (on page
46). Prompts depend on the settings you have chosen for the piping rules. Also, you may be
prompted in certain situations based on the components of the model. Most of the components
are built to work as smart objects. They connect using the previous information of the last point
of a component. If you change sizes while working with a component, you are prompted
accordingly. In addition, you may not receive prompts based on the actions of connection to
components. Prompts depend on the actions you take, and some prompts appear only when not
connecting to a previous component.
Compass
Enables 360 degree navigation for placement of components. You can turn the compass on and
off in Setup (on page 26). You are also provided with the option to change the color. When the
compass is turned on the screen displays a circle around the components when they are pulled
into the drawing space.
Plane versus Isometrics view modes

When plotting components using Plane views, some prompts appear differently when working in
3D Solids then when plotting components in Isometric views. This is based on the directional
limitations of those views. The prompts do not differ when you are working in 2D Double Line or
2D Single Line. All commands in the following sections are based off the isometrics view for all
modes of modeling.
328
Toolbars
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling

The CADWorx option for working in 3D modeling and 2D modeling is set up in the CADWorx
Plant Setup dialog box. All commands on the toolbars work in both modes, however some
commands are ideally designed for working in 3D mode versus working in 2D mode. The
commands are grouped according to which commands are better suited for either 3D modeling
or 2D modeling. You can use the commands as needed, but in 3D modeling some of the
commands better suited for 2D have the same response as those better suited for 3D. For more
information, see Setup (on page 26) and CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box.
Buttweld
Plant menu: Toolbars > Buttweld
The commands on the Buttweld toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 329).
Command Name
Command Line
Pipe - Places a butt-welded pipe component. For more

information, see Pipe (on page 333).
PIPW
Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell (on page
333).
90LR
Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell (on page
334).
90SR
Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).
45LR
Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in 90RD

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 Reducing Ell
(on page 335).
Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Plan Tee (on page 336).
TESW
Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y TERW
plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page
337).
Plan 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 LR
Return (on page 337).
18LR
Plan 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return 18SR
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 SR
Return (on page 338).
329
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on
page 339).
CONC
Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on page
339).
ECC
Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more

information, see Cap (on page 340).
CAPW
Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page 340).
CRSW
Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing
Cross (on page 341).
CRRW
Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane. LATW
For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 341).
Miters - Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Miters (on page 342).
MPIP
Rolled Pipe - Places a free-form pipe component, such as a

hose or flexible connection. For more information, see Rolled
Pipe (on page 343).
SPIP
Adjustable Bend - Places an adjustable pipe bend. For more

information, see Adjustable Bend (on page 344).
BENT
90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end R90LR
rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more
information, see 90 LR Ell (on page 345).
90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the
end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more
information, see 90 SR Ell (on page 345).
R90SR
45 LR Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a

45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information,
see 45 LR Ell (on page 346).
R45LR
Tee - Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle

from the X-Y plane. For more information, see Tee (on page
346).
RTESW
Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y

11LR
plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page 347).
330
Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 348).
22LR
Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more

information, see Plan Wye (on page 348).
YB
Toolbars
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal H90LR

to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 LR Ell (on
page 349).
Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90
SR Ell (on page 350).
H90SR
Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y

plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Side 45 Ell (on page 350).
H45LR
Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y

plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 351).
V45LR
Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow

Reducing Ell (on page 351).
H90RD
Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the HTESW
X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 352).
Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the
X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 353).
VTESW
Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the

branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Side Reducing Tee (on page 353).
HTERW
Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the

main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert
Reducing Tee (on page 354).
VTERW
Side 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return H18LR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Side 180 LR Return (on page 354).
Vert 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 LR Return
(on page 355).
V18LR
Side 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return H18SR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Side 180 SR Return (on page 355).
Vert 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return V18SR
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 SR Return
(on page 356).
331
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch HCRSW
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross
(on page 356).
Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross
with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 357).
HCRRW
Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with VCRRW

the main branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 357).
332
Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane

with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information,
see Side Lateral (on page 357).
HLATW
Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee with the main

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert
Lateral (on page 358).
VLATW
Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on page
358).
H11LR
Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on page
359).
V11LR
Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 359).
H22LR
Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 360).
V22LR
Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye
(on page 360).
HYB
Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the
branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Vert Wye (on page 361).
VYB
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Pipe
Buttweld toolbar: Pipe
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tubing
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Pipe
Command line: PIPW
You can also now use PIPW1 for buttweld piping, PIPF1 for socket weld or threaded
piping, and PIPFL1 for flanged piping, to draw singular pipe. PIPW starts the pipe router.
Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis
Place a pipe
1. Click a pipe component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
The pipe component is drawn.
Plan 90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell
Command line: 90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
333
Toolbars
Place a 90 degree plan elbow
1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the
selection.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
The elbow component is drawn.
Plan 90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell
Command line: 90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane.

selection.
334
Toolbars
Plan 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 45 Ell
Command line: 45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a plan elbow command.

Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
Click in the direction of the corner.
Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
Plan 90 Reducing Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell
Command line: 90RD
Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. For this component, this
option switches to the reducing side.
335
Toolbars
Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command.

To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd.
Plan Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Tee
Command line: TESW
Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane.
Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
Place a plan tee

1.
2.
3.
4.
336
Click a plan tee command.

Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
Click in the direction of the main of the tee.
Click in the direction of the branch of the tee.
The tee component is drawn.
Toolbars
Plan Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee
Command line: TERW
Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Plan 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 LR Return
Command line: 18LR
Places a 180 degree long radius return in the X-Y plane.
337
Toolbars
Place a 180 degree plan return
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a 180 degree plan return component command.

Click in the direction of the bend of the return.
Click in the direction of the end of the return.
The return component is drawn.
Plan 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 SR Return
Command line: 18SR
Places a 180 degree short radius return in the X-Y plane.
Place a 180 degree plan return

1.
2.
3.
4.
338
Click a 180 degree plan return component command.

Click in the direction of the end of the return.
Toolbars
Conc Reducer
Buttweld toolbar: Conc Reducer
Victaulic toolbar: Conc Reducer
Command line: CONC
Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point.
Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.
If you are connecting to another component where the large end is the same size as the
last component, press ENTER to attach to the last component drawn.
Place a concentric reducer

1. Click a concentric reducer component command.
2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer.
The reducer component is drawn.
Ecc Reducer
Buttweld toolbar: Ecc Reducer
Victaulic toolbar: Ecc Reducer
Command line: ECC
Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.
Place an eccentric reducer

1. Click an eccentric reducer component command.
or
Select Small end, and press ENTER.
3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer.
4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side.
or
To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down.
339
Toolbars
Cap
Buttweld toolbar: Cap
Victaulic toolbar: Cap
Command line: CAPW
Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.
Place a cap
1. Click a cap component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.
The cap component is drawn.
Plan Cross
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Cross
Command line: CRSW
Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.
Place a plan cross

1. Click a four-way straight cross command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the cross.
The cross component is drawn.
340
Toolbars
Plan Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross
Command line: CRRW
Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane.
Branch - Places the reducing branch of cross tee at the start point.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the cross.
Place a plan reducing cross

1. Click a four-way plan reducing cross command.
Plan Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Lateral
Command line: LATW
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.
Branch - Places the branch of the lateral at the start point.
341
Toolbars
Place a plan lateral
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a plan lateral command.

Click in the direction of the main of the lateral.
Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral.
The lateral component is drawn.
Miters
Buttweld toolbar: Miters
Command line: MPIP
Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created
with Polyline
. A miter is placed on the pipe at each vertex of the polyline. For more
information, see PLINE in AutoCAD Help.
This command can also be used to create pipe with bends. For more information, see
CHAMFER in AutoCAD Help.
Mitered pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline

information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.
342
. For more
Toolbars
Place a mitered pipe
1. On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline
2. Draw the needed polyline.
3. Click Miters
.
4. Select the polyline.
The mitered pipe component is drawn.
Rolled Pipe
Buttweld toolbar: Rolled Pipe
Command line: SPIP
Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. The pipe is placed on
a 2D polyline created with Polyline
and edited with the Fit or Spline options of Edit
Polyline
. For more information, see PLINE and PEDIT in AutoCAD Help.
Fit Example
Spline Example
Rolled pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline

information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.
. For more
343
Toolbars
Place a rolled pipe
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline

Draw the needed polyline.
On the Modify panel, click Edit Polyline
.
Select the polyline.
Select Fit or Spline.
6. Click Rolled Pipe

.
7. Select the polyline.
Adjustable Bend
Buttweld toolbar: Adjustable Bend
Command line: BENT
Places a pipe bend based on the selected method: Enter radius, Trimmed elbow, or Select
arc.
Enter radius - Places a pipe bend by typing a radius, and then selecting the bend center, start,
and end points in a counterclockwise direction. This is the most common type of adjustable
bend.
Degree - Defines the total angle of the bend from the start point. For example, if the start
point is at 91, and the value for Degree is 180, the end point is at 271 and the total angle
of the bend is 180.
Angle - Defines the angle of the bend as the value minus the angle defined by the start
point from the positive X-axis. For example, if the start point is at 91, and the value for
Angle is 180, the end point is at 180 and the angle of the bend is 79.
Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently
required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.
Trimmed elbow - Places an elbow by selecting the center of the bend arc, the start point, and
the end point.
Short radius - Defines a short radius elbow according to the current specification.
Long radius - Defines a long radius elbow according to the current specification.
Select arc - Places a pipe bend on an arc created with an arc command. For more information,
see Draw Arcs in AutoCAD Help.
Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently
required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.
344
Toolbars
90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 90 LR Ell
Command line: R90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y
plane.
Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
This command is only available for welded fittings.

The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain
the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD
Help.
Place a 90 degree rolled elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command.

90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 90 SR Ell
Command line: R90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y
plane.

Help.
345
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command.

45 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 45 LR Ell
Command line: R45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.

Help.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click 45 LR Ell .
Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Tee
Command line: RTESW
Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.
Up - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
346
Toolbars
Place a rolled tee
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click a rolled tee command.

Select Up or Down.
Plan 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell
Command line: 11LR
Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.

347
Toolbars
Plan 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell
Command line: 22LR
Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.

Plan Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Wye
Command line: YB
Places a wye in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye.
Branch - Places the branch of the component at the start point.
348
Toolbars
Place a plan wye
1. Click a plan wye command.
3. Click in the direction of the wye.
The wye component is drawn.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
Side 90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell
Command line: H90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.
Place a side or vertical elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a side or vertical elbow component command.

Select Up or Down.
349
Toolbars
Side 90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell
Command line: H90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Side 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 45 Ell
Command line: H45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or
next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.
350

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Vert 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Vert 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 45 Ell
Command line: V45LR
next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Side 90 Reducing Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell
Command line: H90RD
Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.
351
Toolbars
Place a side reducing elbow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click a side reducing plan elbow component command.

To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select Small.
Select Up or Down.
Side Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Side Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Side Tee
Command line: HTESW
Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.
352
Click a side tee component command.

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Vert Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Tee
Command line: VTESW
Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at
the start point by default.
Place a vertical tee

1. Click a vertical tee component command.
3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee.
Side Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Tee
Command line: HTERW
Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
353
Toolbars
Vert Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee
Command line: VTERW
Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is
placed at the start point by default.

Side 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 LR Return
Command line: H18LR
Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y
plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return.
Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.
Place a 180 degree side return

1.
2.
3.
4.
354
Click a 180 degree side return component command.

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Vert 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 LR Return
Command line: V18LR
Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal
to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.
Place a 180 degree vertical return

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a 180 degree vertical return component command.

Select Up or Down.
Side 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 SR Return
Command line: H18SR
Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y
plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.
Place a 180 degree side return

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a 180 degree side return component command.

Select Up or Down.
355
Toolbars
Vert 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 SR Return
Command line: V18SR
Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also
normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.
Place a 180 degree vertical return

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a 180 degree vertical return component command.

Select Up or Down.
Side Cross
Buttweld toolbar: Side Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Side Cross
Command line: HCRSW
Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side cross

1. Click a four-way straight side cross command.
356
Toolbars
Side Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Cross
Command line: HCRRW
Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side reducing cross

1. Click a four-way side reducing cross command.
Vert Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross
Command line: VCRRW
Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the cross
is placed at the start point by default.
Branch - Places the reducing branch of the cross tee at the start point.
Place a vertical reducing cross

1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.
Side Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Side Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Side Lateral
Command line: HLATW
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.
357
Toolbars
Place a side lateral
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a side lateral component command.

Select Up or Down.
Vert Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Lateral
Command line: VLATW
Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is
Place a vertical lateral

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a vertical lateral component command.

Select Up or Down.
Side 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell
Command line: H11LR
Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or
358
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Vert 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell
Command line: V11LR

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Side 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell
Command line: H22LR
Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or
359
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Vert 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell
Command line: V22LR

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Side Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Side Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Side Wye
Command line: HYB
Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is
typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.
360
Toolbars
Place a side wye
1. Click a side wye command.
3. Click in the direction of the wye main.
Vert Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Wye
Command line: VYB
Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a vertical wye

1. Click a vertical wye command.
3. Click in the direction of the wye branches.
Flanges
Plant menu: Toolbars > Flanges
Command Name
Command Line
Weld Neck - Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Weld Neck Flange (on page 362).
FLGW
Slip On - Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. For more

information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 364).
FLGO
Blind - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more

information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).
FLGB
Socket Weld - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane.

FLGS
For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page 366).
Threaded - Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Threaded Flange (on page 367).
FLGT
Lap Joint - Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Lap Joint Flange (on page 369).
FLGL
Stub End - Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y STB

plane. For more information, see Stub End (on page 369).
361
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Long Weld Neck - Places a long weld neck component in the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Long Weld Neck (on
page 370).
LWN
Reducing Slip On - Places a reducing slip on flange in the

FLRO
X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on Flange
(on page 370).
Reducing Threaded - Places a reducing threaded flange in
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Threaded
Flange (on page 372).
FLRT
Reducing Weld Neck - Places a reducing weld neck flange in FLRW

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Weld Neck
Weld Neck Flange

Flanges toolbar: Weld Neck
Command line: FLGW
Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added
to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion
Rule (on page 47).
last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Buttweld end - Starts the flange at the buttweld end. This option appears when the previously
placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point
for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite
direction.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the butt-welded end as the start point for the
flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.
362
Place a flange on a pipe (on page 363)

Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 363)
Toolbars
Place a flange on a pipe

1. Place a pipe component.
Place a pipe (on page 333)
2. Click a flange component command.
3. Click to select a starting point at an end of the pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect
to the last point.
The flange component is drawn.
Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping
rule is set. You must also have a set of flanges for this to occur. For more information, see
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47), Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47), or Auto
Gasket (on page 183).
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 328).
Place a flange that mates with another flange

1. Place a pipe and a flange.
3. Click to select a starting point at the end of the existing flange. Alternatively, press ENTER
to connect to the last point.
The flange component is drawn with the face mating to the face of the existing flange.
rule is set. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47), or Apply
Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47).
363
Toolbars
Slip-on Flange
Flanges toolbar: Slip On
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Flange
Command line: FLGO
Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. If Auto Gasket is turned on, then a gasket is also
placed on the flange. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183).
component.
Slip on end - Starts the flange at the slip-on end. This option appears when the previously
direction.
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the slip-on end as the start point for the flange.
Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.


to the last point.
.
364
Toolbars

Blind Flange
Flanges toolbar: Blind
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Blind Flange
Lined toolbar: Lined Blind Flange
Command line: FLGB
Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane.
Place a flange
2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the
system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and
skip step 3.
If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define
the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.
3. Click to select the direction of the flange.
Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have
defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) and Default Flange
Insertion Type.
365
Toolbars
Socket Type Flange

Flanges toolbar: Socket Weld
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flange
Command line: FLGS
Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Rule (on page 47).
Socket end - Starts the flange at the Socket end.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.


to the last point.
.
366
Toolbars

Threaded Flange
Flanges toolbar: Threaded
Command line: FLGT
Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Rule (on page 47).
Thread end - Starts the flange at the threaded end.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.

367
Toolbars

to the last point.
.

368
Toolbars
Lap Joint Flange

Flanges toolbar: Lap Joint
Command line: FLGL
Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane.
Place a flange
2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the
system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and
skip step 3.
If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define
the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.
3. Click to select the direction of the flange.
Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have
defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) and Default Flange
Insertion Type.
Stub End
Flanges toolbar: Stub End
Command line: STB
Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also
be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 47).
Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the
current specification is used.
Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.
Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.
Place a stub or weld neck

1. Click a stub or weld neck component command.
2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component.
3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to
the last point.
The component is drawn.
369
Toolbars
Long Weld Neck

Flanges toolbar: Long Weld Neck
Command line: LWN
Places a long weld neck component in the X-Y plane.
Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the
current specification is used.
Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.
Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.
Place a stub or weld neck

1. Click a stub or weld neck component command.
2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component.
3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to
the last point.
Reducing Slip-on Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Slip On
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Flange
Command line: FLRO
Places a reducing slip-on flange in the X-Y plane.You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
component.
Reducing end - Starts the flange at the reducing end. This option appears when the previously
direction.
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the reducing end as the start point for the
370

Toolbars

to the last point.
.

371
Toolbars
Reducing Threaded Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Threaded
Command line: FLRT
Places a reducing threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
direction.


to the last point.
.
372
Toolbars

Reducing Weld Neck Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Weld Neck
Command line: FLRW
Places a reducing weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
direction.

373
Toolbars

to the last point.
.

374
Toolbars
Flgd/BW Valves
Plant menu: Toolbars > Flgd/BW Valves
The commands on the Flgd/BW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).
Command Name
Command Line
Gate - Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Gate Valve (on page 376).
GATF
Ball - Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Ball Valve (on page 377)
BALF
Globe - Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For GLBF
more information, see Globe Valve (on page 378).
Plug - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Plug Valve (on page 378).
PLUF
Check - Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Check Valve (on page 379).
CHKF
Butterfly - Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Butterfly Valve (on page
380).
BFYF
Diaphragm - Places a diaphragm valve and flange gasket

component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Diaphragm Valve (on page 380).
DIAF
Rotary - Places a rotary valve component in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Rotary Valve (on page 381).
ROTF
Dual Check - Places a dual check valve and flange gasket

components in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Dual
Check Valve (on page 382).
DCHF
Control - Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Control Valve (on page 382).
CNTF
3 Way Plan - Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see 3-Way Plan Valve (on page
383).
3VF
4 Way Plan - Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see 4-Way Plan Valve (on page
384).
4VF
Relief Side - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Relief Side Valve (on
page 384).
RELF
Angle Top - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. ANGF
For more information, see Angle Top Valve (on page 385).
375
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
3 Way Side - Places a three-way valve component with the

valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see 3-Way Side Valve (on page 386)
H3VF
3 Way Vertical - Places a three-way valve component with

the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
3-Way Vertical Valve (on page 386).
V3VF
4 Way Side - Places a four-way valve component with the

valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For. more
information, see 4-Way Side Valve (on page 387)
H4VF
Relief Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the

relief end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Relief Top Valve (on page 387)
HRELF
Pressure Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with

the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Pressure Top Valve (on page 388).
VRELF
Angle Side - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. HANGF
For more information, see Angle Side Valve (on page 388).
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Gate Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Gate
Command line: GATF
Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
376
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Ball Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Ball
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Ball Valve
Command line: BALF
Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Place a valve
377
Toolbars
Globe Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Globe
Command line: GLBF
Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Place a valve
Plug Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Plug
Victaulic toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve
Command line: PLUF
Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Center - Places the valve at its center.
378
Toolbars
Place a valve
Check Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Check
Sanitary toolbar: Victaulic Check Valve
Command line: CHKF
Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Place a valve
379
Toolbars
Butterfly Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Butterfly
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Butterfly Valve
Command line: BFYF
Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
Place a valve
Diaphragm Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Diaphragm
Command line: DIAF
Places a diaphragm valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
380
Toolbars
Place a valve
Rotary Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Rotary
Command line: ROTF
Places a rotary component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Rule (on page 47).
component.
Place a valve
381
Toolbars
Dual Check Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Dual Check
Command line: DCHF
Places a dual check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
Place a valve
Control Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Control
Command line: CNTF
Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Length - Specifies the length of the valve.
Center - Places the valve at its center.
382
Toolbars
Place a valve
3-Way Plan Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Plan
Command line: 3VF
Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.
Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point.
Place a 3-way plan valve

1. Click a three-way valve command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press
ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not
connecting to a component in the model.
4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve.
383
Toolbars
4-Way Plan Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Plan
Command line: 4VF
Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.

1. Click a four-way plan valve command.
ENTER to connect to the last point.
3. Click in the direction of the valve.
Relief Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Side
Command line: RELF
Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the X-Y plane.
Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve.
Pressure - Places the pressure end of the valve at the start point.
Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.
384
Toolbars
Place an angle valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click an angle or relief valve component command.

Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Click in the direction of the branch or relief end of the valve.
Angle Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Top
Command line: ANGF
Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using

1.
2.
3.
4.

385
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
3-Way Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Side
Command line: H3VF
Places a three-way valve component with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. You can
place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on
page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components
by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).
component.
Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.
Place a 3-way side valve

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a three-way side valve component command.

Click in the direction of the main of the valve.
Select Up or Down.
3-Way Vertical Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Vertical
Command line: V3VF
Places a three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. You can place
gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page
183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by
setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).
component.
386
Toolbars
Place a 3-way vertical valve
1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command.
4-Way Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Side
Command line: H4VF
Places a four-way valve component with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. You can
place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on
page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components
by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).
component.

1. Click a four-way side valve command.
Relief Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Top
Command line: HRELF
Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane.
Relief - Places the relief end at the start point.
387
Toolbars
Place an angle side valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click an angle or relief side valve component command.

Select Up or Down.
Pressure Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Pressure Top
Command line: VRELF
Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Angle Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Side
Command line: HANGF
Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
388
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Lined
Plant menu: Toolbars > Lined
The commands on the Lined toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Command Name
Command Line
Lined Pipe - Places a flanged and lined pipe component in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Pipe (on page
391).
PIPFL
Lined 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90
Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).
90FL
Lined 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45
Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).
45FL
Lined Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined tee in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page
404).
TEFL
Lined Reducing Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined

reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Reducing Tee Plan (on page 421).
TERE
Lined Concentric - Places a flanged and lined concentric

reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 405).
CNFL
Lined Eccentric - Places a flanged and lined eccentric

see Lined Eccentric Reducer (on page 392).
ECFL
Lined Wye Plan - Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Plan (on page
392).
YFL
Lined Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross CRSE
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on
page 422).
389
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Lined Reducing Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and

lined reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 423).
CRRE
Lined Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined

lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral
Plan (on page 423).
LATE
Lined Spacer - Places a lined spacer in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on page 501).
BLD
Lined Reducing Flange - Places a lined reducing flange in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on
FLRO
Lined Blind Flange - Places a lined blind flange in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).
FLGB
Command Name
390
Command Line
Lined 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined

elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).
H90FL
Lined 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined

H45FL
Lined 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined

Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 411).
V45FL
Lined Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined tee with the
Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).
HTEFL
Lined Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined tee with the main
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
Tee Vertical (on page 412).
VTEFL
Lined Reducing Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined

reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Reducing Tee Side (on page 438)
HTERE
Lined Reducing Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined

reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 438).
VTERE
Lined Wye Side - Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y
plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Lined Wye Side (on page 393).
HYFL
Toolbars
Command Name
Lined Wye Vert - Places a flanged and lined wye normal to
the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane
For more information, see Lined Wye Vert (on page 393).
Command Line
VYFL
Lined Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross HCRSE
with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Cross Side (on page 439).
Lined Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and

lined reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the
X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side
(on page 439).
HCRRE
Lined Reducing Cross Vert - Places a four-way flanged and

lined reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page
440).
VCRRE
Lined Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined

lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane. For more information, see Lateral Side (on page 440).
HLATE
Lined Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined

lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Lateral Vertical (on page 440).
VLATE
The specification for lined pipe components is delivered in the Lined.spc file in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.
The FLGS column in the flanged component data files controls placement of flanges. A
value of 1 places a flange on the first end of the component. 2 places a flange on the second
end. 3 places flanges on both ends. 4 places a flange on the branch end of a tee or wye.
Other combinations of flanges are based on adding these values. For example, if the flanges
are needed on all ends of a tee, use 1 + 2 + 4 = 7.
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Lined Pipe
Lined toolbar: Lined Pipe
Command line: PIPFL
Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Flanged end - Places the flanged end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the
pipe has a flange on one end.
Plain end - Places the plain end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe
has a flange on one end.
391
Toolbars
Length - Defines the length of the pipe. If no length is defined, the length is based on the start
and end points.
Place a pipe
2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
Lined Eccentric Reducer

Lined toolbar: Lined Eccentric
Command line: ECFL
Places a flanged and lined eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.

or
or
Lined Wye Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Plan
Command line: YFL
Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y plane.
Branch - Places the branch of the wye at the start point.
otherEnd - Places the component at the other end of the start point.
392
Toolbars
Place a plan wye
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Lined Wye Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Side
Command line: HYFL
Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane.
This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Place a side wye

Lined Wye Vert

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Vert
Command line: VYFL
Places a flanged and lined wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the
X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
393
Toolbars
Fiberglass
Plant menu: Toolbars > Fiberglass
The commands on the Fiberglass toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Command Name
Command Line
Pipe - Places a fiberglass pipe component. For more

information, see Fiberglass Pipe (on page 397).
PIPF
FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket 90S

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan
Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 397).
FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket 45S
elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 398).
394
FRP Bell Tee Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket tee

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan (on page 399).
TESS
FRP Bell Conc w/Hub - Places a threaded/socket

concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer (on
page 399).
SWGCS
FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric

threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer
(on page 400).
SWGES
FRP Bell Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket

straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan (on page 400).
CRSS
FRP Bell Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree

threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan (on page
401).
LATS
FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan - Places a coupling in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Coupling (on page 401).
CPS
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
FRP Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y

CAPS
plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Cap (on
page 402).
FRP Bush/Insert - Places a bushing in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing (on
page 402).
BUSS
Saddle in Plan - Places a soc-o-let in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Saddle in Plan (on page 402).
SOL
FRP Blind Flange - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. FLGB
For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).
FRP Flange - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. FLGS
For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page
366).
FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged
elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).
90FL
FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).
45FL
FRP Flanged Tee Plan - Places a flanged tee in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on
page 404).
TEFL
FRP Flanged Concentric - Places a flanged concentric

CNFL
see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 405).
Command Name
Command Line
FRP Bell 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket H90S

Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 405).
FRP Bell 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket H45S
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 406).
FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to V45S
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket
45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 406).
FRP Bell Tee Side - Places a straight threaded/socket tee
with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side (on
page 407).
HTESS
395
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
FRP Bell Tee Vert - Places a straight threaded/socket tee

with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert (on
page 407).
VTESS
FRP Bell Cross Side - Places a four-way straight

HCRSS
threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight
Cross Side (on page 408)
FRP Bell Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree
threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in
the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket Lateral Side (on page 408).
HLATS
FRP Bell Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree

threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral
Vert (on page 408).
VLATS
FRP Bell Full Clpg End - Places a full coupling end

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Full
Coupling End (on page 409).
VCPS
Saddle in Vertical - Places a soc-o-let with the main

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Saddle
in Vertical (on page 409).
VSOL
FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged

H90FL
FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged

H45FL
FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 411).
V45FL
FRP Flanged Tee Side - Places a flanged tee with the

Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).
HTEFL
FRP Flanged Tee Vert - Places a flanged tee with the

main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).
VTEFL
You must set the FRP.SPC default specification that is supplied with CADWorx for the icons to
work on the toolbar.
396
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Fiberglass Pipe
Fiberglass toolbar: Pipe
Command line: PIPF
Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.
Threaded
Bevel
Plain
Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Place a fiberglass pipe

2. Click to select a starting point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and
press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and
press ENTER.
4. If prompted for an end type, type the required end type on the command line, and press
ENTER.
Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan
Command line: 90S
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane.
Start - Places the start point of the component at the default.
397
Toolbars
selection.
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45S
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.
398

Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Plan
Command line: TESS
Places a straight threaded/socket tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Conc w/Hub
Command line: SWGCS
Places a threaded/socket concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.

399
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub
Command line: SWGES
Places an eccentric threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane.

or
or
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Plan
Command line: CRSS
Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan cross

400
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Plan
Command line: LATS
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Coupling
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Coupling
Command line: CPS
Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling command.
3. Click in the direction of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
401
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Cap
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Cap
Command line: CAPS
Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Place a cap
Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bush/Insert
Command line: BUSS
Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the large end at the start point of the component.
Small end - Places the small end at the start point of the component.
Place a bushing
1. Click a bushing component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.
The bushing component is drawn.
Saddle in Plan
Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Plan
Command line: SOL
Places a sock-o-let in the X-Y plane.
402
Toolbars
Place a plan sock-o-let
1. Click a sock-o-let component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the sock-o-let.
The sock-o-let component is drawn.
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Plan
Command line: 90FL
Places a 90 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.

selection.
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45FL
Places a 45 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane.
403
Toolbars
Place a plan elbow
1.
2.
3.
4.

Flanged Tee Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Plan
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Strainer
Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Plan
Command line: TEFL
Places a flanged tee or strainer in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of
the component.
Branch - places the start point at the branch of the component.
Place a plan flanged tee

1.
2.
3.
4.
404
Click a plan flanged tee command.

Toolbars
Flanged Concentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Concentric
Lined toolbar: Lined Concentric
Command line: CNFL
Places a flanged concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.

Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90S
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
405
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45S
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when
the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert
Command line: V45S

1.
2.
3.
4.
406

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Side
Command line: HTESS
Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Vert
Command line: VTESS
Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the
tee is placed at the start point by default.

407
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Side
Command line: HCRSS
Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side cross

Threaded/Socket Lateral Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Side
Command line: HLATS
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATS
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of
the lateral is placed at the start point by default.
408
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Full Coupling End

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg End
Command line: VCPS
Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.
Place a coupling end

1. Click a coupling end component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the coupling.
Saddle in Vertical
Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Vertical
Command line: VSOL
Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at
Up - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the negative Z direction.
Place a vertical soc-o-let

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a vertical soc-o-let component command.

Select Up or Down.
The soc-o-let component is drawn.
409
Toolbars
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side
Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90FL
Places a 90 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side
Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45FL
Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.
410

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert
Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Vert
Command line: V45FL
Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Flanged Tee Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Side
Victaulic toolbar: Side Strainer
Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Side
Command line: HTEFL
Places a flanged tee or strainer with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the strainer at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
411
Toolbars
Place a side flanged tee
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a side flanged tee component command.

Select Up or Down.
Flanged Tee Vertical

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Vert
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Strainer
Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Vert
Command line: VTEFL
Places a flanged tee or strainer with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the strainer
is placed at the start point by default.
Place a vertical strainer

1. Click a vertical flanged tee component command.
Sanitary
Plant menu: Toolbars > Sanitary
The commands on the Sanitary toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Command Name
Sanitary Tubing - Places a butt-welded sanitary tubing
component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).
Command Line
PIPW
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree elbow in the X-Y

90EN
plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Ell Plan (on page
419).
412
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree reducing 90RE

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90
Reducing Ell Plan (on page 420).
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Plan
(on page 420).
45EN
Sanitary Tee Plan - Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Plan (on page
421).
TESE
Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan - Places a sanitary reducing tee TERE

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee
Plan (on page 421).
Sanitary Cross Plan - Places a four-way sanitary cross in the CRSE
X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on page
422).
Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan - Places a four-way sanitary
reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Cross Reducing Plan (on page 423).
CRRE
Sanitary Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Plan (on
page 423).
LATE
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan - Places a 45 degree

sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan (on page
424).
LARE
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell
Plan (on page 424).
22EN
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
11.25 Ell Plan (on page 425).
11EN
Sanitary U-Bend Plan - Places a 180 degree u-bend in the

X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Plan
(on page 426).
UBEN
Sanitary Concentric - Places a sanitary concentric reducer

Sanitary Concentric (on page 426).
CONCE
Sanitary Eccentric - Places a sanitary eccentric reducer

Sanitary Eccentric (on page 427).
ECCE
Sanitary Stub - Places a sanitary stub coupling component in STUE

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Stub (on
page 427).
413
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Sanitary Wye Plan - Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Sanitary Wye Plan (on page 428).
YE
Sanitary Cap - Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Sanitary Cap (on page 428).
CAPE
Sanitary Nut/Coupling - Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the NUTE

X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Nut/Coupling
(on page 429).
Sanitary Gate Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component GATE
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Gate
Valve (on page 429).
Sanitary Ball Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Ball
Valve (on page 430).
BALE
Sanitary Globe Valve - Places a sanitary globe valve

Sanitary Globe Valve (on page 430).
GLBE
Sanitary Plug Valve - Places a sanitary plug valve

Sanitary Plug Valve (on page 431).
PLUE
Sanitary Check Valve - Places a sanitary check valve

Sanitary Check Valve (on page 431).
CHKE
Sanitary Butterfly Valve - Places a sanitary butterfly valve

Sanitary Butterfly Valve (on page 432).
BFYE
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan - Places a sanitary 3-way valve

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan (on page 432).
3VE
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan - Places a 90 degree sanitary

angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan (on page 433).
ANGE
Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve - Places a one-port pneumatic

actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 1
Port Valve (on page 433).
AIR1
Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve - Places a two-port pneumatic

AIR2
Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve - Places a three-port pneumatic

AIR3
414
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side - Places a 90 degree reducing H90RE

Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side (on page 435).
Sanitary 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
45 Ell Side (on page 436).
H45EN
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
45 Ell Vertical (on page 436).
V45EN
Sanitary Tee Side - Places a straight sanitary tee with the

Sanitary Tee Side (on page 437).
HTESE
Sanitary Tee Vertical - Places a straight sanitary tee with the

main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary Tee Vertical (on page 437).
VTESE
Sanitary Reducing Tee Side - Places a sanitary reducing tee HTERE

with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Reducing Tee Side (on page 438)
Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical - Places a sanitary reducing
tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 438).
VTERE
Sanitary Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary cross with

the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Cross Side (on page 439).
HCRSE
Sanitary Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary

reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on
page 439).
HCRRE
Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical - Places a four-way

VCRRE
sanitary reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page
440).
Sanitary Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in
the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For
more information, see Lateral Side (on page 440).
HLATE
Sanitary Lateral Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral VLATE

with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Lateral Vertical (on page 440).
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side - Places a 45 degree
sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in
the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Sanitary
Lateral Reducing Side (on page 441).
HLARE
415
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical -Places a 45 degree

sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing
Vertical (on page 441).
VLARE
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow

normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is
horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side (on page 442).
H22EN
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical - Places a 22.5 degree elbow

vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
22.5 Ell Vertical (on page 442).
V22EN
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary

elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run
is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side (on page 443).
H11EN
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical - Places an 11.25 degree elbow

vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
11.25 Ell Vertical (on page 443).
V11EN
Sanitary U-Bend Side - Places a 180 degree u-bend normal

to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Side (on page 444).
HUBEN
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical - Places a 180 degree u-bend

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend
VUBEN
Sanitary Wye Side - Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane

with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Sanitary Wye Side (on page 445).
HYE
Sanitary Wye Vertical - Places a sanitary wye normal to the

VYE
X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Sanitary Wye Vertical (on page 445).
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side - Places a 3-way valve
H3VE
component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side (on page 446).
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical - Places a sanitary 3-way
V3VE
valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical (on page
446).
Sanitary Angle Valve Side - Places a 90 degree sanitary
angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Sanitary Angle Valve Side
(on page 446).
416
HANGE
Toolbars
Sanitary fitting components can have many end types, such as butt-welded, flanged, ferrule,
coupling, hub, square, bull, and a simple engagement used with threaded and socket-welded
piping. The end types can also vary for each end of a fitting, as shown in the examples below.
The available end types are defined by the selected specification, and the prompts for each
command reflect the end type used. Available end types are shown below.
417
Toolbars
End types are delivered in the files End1.dwg through End17.dwg in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\Support folder.
The multi-port valves have special port controls in the data files. Listed below are all the port
types available for these valves. When all three ports are specified in the data file, all three ports
are drawn on the drawing. When only one or two ports are required, place 0 in the last port
entries and this supplies either a one or two port valve.
CADWorx end types are exported to ISOGEN as shown in the following table.
418
CADWorx End Type
ISOGEN End Type
PL (Plain)
BW (Butt weld)
FL (Flanged)
LN (Liner/Nut)
LN (Liner/Nut)
MP (Male Part)
MP (Male Part)
MP (Male Part)
MP (Male Part)
CL (Clamped)
10
CL (Clamped)
11
CL (Clamped)
Toolbars
12
CL (Clamped)
13
CL (Clamped)
14
SW (Socket Weld)
15
SC (Screwed)
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Plan
Command line: 90EN
Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point.
The end type is defined by the current specification.

selection.
419
Toolbars
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan
Command line: 90RE
Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command.

To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd.
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45EN
Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.
420

Toolbars
Sanitary Tee Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Plan
Command line: TESE
Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.
Place a plan tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Reducing Tee Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Plan
Command line: TERE
Places a reducing tee in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.
421
Toolbars
Place a plan tee
1.
2.
3.
4.

Cross Plan
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Plan
Command line: CRSE
Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.
Branch1 - Places the first branch of the cross at the start point.
Branch2 - Places the second branch of the cross at the start point.
Place a plan cross

422
Toolbars
Cross Reducing Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Plan
Command line: CRRE
Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.
Place a sanitary plan reducing cross

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan

.
Click in the direction of the cross.
Click in the direction of the branch end.
Lateral Plan
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Plan
Command line: LATE
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.
Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

423
Toolbars
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan
Command line: LARE
Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point. The end type is defined by the
current specification.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan
Command line: 22EN
Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
424
Toolbars
Place a plan elbow
1.
2.
3.
4.

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan
Command line: 11EN
Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.

425
Toolbars
Sanitary U-Bend Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Plan
Command line: UBEN
Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X-Y plane. The bend also has a branch the projects up or
down in the Z direction.
Middle - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.
Place a sanitary u-bend

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Sanitary U-Bend Plan

.
Click in the direction of the bend.
Click in the direction of the end of the bend.
Select Up or Down.
The bend component is drawn.
Sanitary Concentric
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Concentric
Command line: CONCE
Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.
Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.
426
Toolbars
Sanitary Eccentric
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Eccentric
Command line: ECCE
Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.
Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.

or
or
Sanitary Stub
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Stub
Command line: STUE
Places a sanitary stub coupling component in the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the plan end at the start point.
Face end - Places the face end at the start point.
427
Toolbars
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling component command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling.
Sanitary Wye Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Plan
Command line: YE
Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the end of the wye at the start point. The end type is defined by the current
specification.
Place a plan wye

Sanitary Cap
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cap
Command line: CAPE
Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
428
Toolbars
Place a cap
Sanitary Nut/Coupling
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Nut/Coupling
Command line: NUTE
Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the X-Y plane.
Place a coupling
Sanitary Gate Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Gate Valve
Command line: GATE
Places a sanitary gate valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Place a valve
429
Toolbars
Sanitary Ball Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Ball Valve
Command line: BALE
Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Sanitary Globe Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Globe Valve
Command line: GLBE
Places a sanitary globe valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
430
Toolbars
Sanitary Plug Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve
Command line: PLUE
Places a sanitary plug valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Sanitary Check Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Check Valve
Command line: CHKE
Places a sanitary check valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
431
Toolbars
Sanitary Butterfly Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Butterfly Valve
Command line: BFYE
Places a sanitary butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan
Command line: 3VE
Places a sanitary three-way valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point.
432
Toolbars
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Plan
Command line: ANGE
Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve in the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve
Command line: AIR1
Places a one-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the valve actuator in the positive Z direction.
433
Toolbars
Place a multi-port valve
1. Click a multi-port valve component command.
3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator.
or
To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up.
4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis.

Command line: AIR2
Places a two-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.

or

Command line: AIR3
Places a three-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.

or
434
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Sanitary 90 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90EN
Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the plan end of the elbow at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side
Command line: H90RE
Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
ENgagement end - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

435
Toolbars
5. Select Up or Down.
Sanitary 45 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45EN
Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
FErrule end - Places the ferrule end of the elbow at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical
Command line: V45EN
Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.
436
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary Tee Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Side
Command line: HTESE
Places a straight sanitary tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
FErrule End - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary Tee Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Vertical
Command line: VTESE
Places a straight sanitary tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is
437
Toolbars
Reducing Tee Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Side
Command line: HTERE
Places a reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the plan end of the tee at the start point.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Reducing Tee Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Vert
Command line: VTERE
Places a reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at
438
Toolbars
Cross Side
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Side
Command line: HCRSE
Places a four-way straight cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane.
Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.
Place a side cross

Cross Reducing Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Cross Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Side
Command line: HCRRE
Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.
Place a sanitary side reducing cross

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Sanitary Reducing Cross Side

.
Click in the direction of the cross.
Click in the direction of the <type> end of the branch.
439
Toolbars
Cross Reducing Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Vert
Command line: VCRRE
Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
ENgagement branch end point - Places the engagement branch at the start point.
Place a vertical reducing cross

1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.
Lateral Side
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Side
Command line: HLATE
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
coupLing End - Places the coupling end of the lateral at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Lateral Vertical
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATE
Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is
440
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side
Command line: HLARE
Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane.
coupLing end - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical
Command line: VLARE
Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center
of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
441
Toolbars
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side
Command line: H22EN
Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical
Command line: V22EN
FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by
the current specification.

1.
2.
3.
4.
442

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side
Command line: H11EN
Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
FErrule End - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical
Command line: V11EN
FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by
443
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary U-Bend Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Side
Command line: HUBEN
Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.
<Type> End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical

Select Up or Down.
Click in the direction of the branch.
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Vertical
Command line: VUBEN
Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y
plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.
<Type> End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the
444
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical

Select Up or Down.
Click in the direction of the branch.
Sanitary Wye Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Side
Command line: HYE
Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Place a side wye

Sanitary Wye Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Vertical
Command line: VYE
Places a sanitary wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane.
This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.

445
Toolbars
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side
Command line: H3VE
Places a three-way valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
component.
ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical
Command line: V3VE
Places a sanitary three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center
of the valve is placed at the start point by default.
FErrule branch end point - Places the ferrule end of the valve at the start point.

Sanitary Angle Valve Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Side
Command line: HANGE
Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point.
446
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Victaulic
Plant menu: Toolbars > Victaulic
The commands on the Victaulic toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Command Name
Command Line
Pipe - Places a victaulic pipe component. For more

information, see Pipe (on page 333).
PIPW
Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell
(on page 333).
90LR
Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell
(on page 334).
90SR
Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).
45LR
Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow 90RD

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90
Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow H90RD
Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page
347).
11LR
Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page
348).
22LR
Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more TESW
information, see Plan Tee (on page 336).
Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the
X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee
(on page 337).
TERW
447
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page
340).
CRSW
Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing
Cross (on page 341).
CCRW
Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more

information, see Plan Wye (on page 348).
YB
Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 341).
LATW
Plan Strainer - Places a strainer in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).
TEFL
Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in CONC

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer
(on page 339)
Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on
page 339).
ECC
Victaulic Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Cap (on page 340).
CAPW
Victaulic Coupling - Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.

For more information, see Coupling (on page 401).
CPS
Victaulic Flange - Places a flange in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 364).
FLGO
Victaulic Butterfly Valve - Places a butterfly valve

Butterfly Valve (on page 380).
BFYF
Victaulic Check Valve - Places a check valve component

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Check Valve
(on page 379).
CHKF
Victaulic Ball Valve - Places a ball valve component in the BALF

X-Y plane. For more information, see Ball Valve (on page
377).
Victaulic Plug Valve - Places a plug valve component in
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plug Valve (on
page 378).
448
PLUF
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow

H90LR
LR Ell (on page 349).
Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow
H90SR
SR Ell (on page 350)
Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y
H45LR
plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).
Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y
V45LR
plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 351).
Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to
H11LR
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on
page 358).
Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to
V11LR
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on
page 359).
Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the
X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on
page 359).
H22LR
Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the

V22LR
X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page
360).
Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on
page 352).
HTESW
Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the VTESW
X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page
353).
Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with
the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Side Reducing Tee (on page 353).
HTERW
Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with

the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Vert Reducing Tee (on page 354).
VTERW
Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the

Side Cross (on page 356).
HCRSW
Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross HCCRW

with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 357).
449
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross

with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 357).
VCRRW
Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the

branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Side Wye (on page 360).
HYB
Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the
branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Wye (on page 361).
VYB
Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane

with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more
information, see Side Lateral (on page 357).
HLATW
Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral with the main

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert
Lateral (on page 358).
VLATW
Side Strainer - Places a strainer with the branch normal to HTEFL

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side
(on page 411).
Vert Strainer - Places a strainer with the main normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee
VTEFL
You must use one of the Victaulic default specifications that are supplied with CADWorx for the
icons to work on the toolbar.
This toolbar provides components manufactured by Victaulic Corporation. The Victaulic
specifications and data files have been provided by Victaulic and can be used to draw
components supplied by this company. The specifications supplied are for AWWA, IPS, 304,
316, and PFCS type components.
Threaded/Socket
Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Fittings
The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket
weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded
and Socket
Weld
commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between these two
modes.
The commands on the Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW Pipe - Places a threaded/socket pipe component. For PIPF

more information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 455).
450
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Nipple - Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane. For more

information, see Nipple (on page 456).
NIP
Tube - Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. For more

information, see Tube (on page 457).
TUBE
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90
Ell Plan (on page 457).
90S/90T
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree

threaded/socket street elbow in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan (on page 458).
90SS/90ST
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45
Ell Plan (on page 459).
45S/45T
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree

threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan (on page 459).
90RS/90RT
Thrd/SW Tee Plan - Places a threaded/socket straight tee in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Plan
(on page 460).
TESS/TEST
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket

reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan (on page 460).
TERS/TERT
Thrd/SW Conc Swage - Places a concentric reducer swage in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Conc
Swage (on page 461).
SWGC
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage - Places an eccentric reducer swage in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ecc Swage
(on page 461).
SWGE
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub - Places a concentric reducer with

threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub (on page 462).
SWGCT
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric reducer with

threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub (on page 462).
SWGET
Thrd/SW Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cap (on page 463).
CAPS/CAPT
Thrd/SW Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket

straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Cross Plan (on page 463).
CRSS/CRST
Thrd/SW Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket

lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Lateral Plan (on page 464).
LATS/LATT
451
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded/socket plug in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on page 464).
PLGT
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert - Places a threaded/socket bushing in

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
(on page 464).
BUSS/BUST
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket full

coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Full Clpg Plan (on page 465).
CPS/CPT
Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket half

coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Half Clpg Plan (on page 465).
HCPS/HCPT
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket

reducing coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan (on page 465).
CPRS/CPRT
Weld in Plan - Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Weldolet Weld in Plan (on page 466).
WOL
Thrd in Plan - Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Threadolet Thread in Plan (on page
466).
TOL
SW in Plan - Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For

more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan (on page
466).
SOL
EOL-Weld in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane

on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in
Plan (on page 467).
EOLW
EOL-Thrd in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane

on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in
Plan (on page 467).
EOLT
EOL-SW in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane

on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket
Weld in Plan (on page 467).
EOLS
LOL-Weld in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLW

plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Plan (on
page 468).
LOL-Thrd in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLT
plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in Plan (on
page 468).
LOL- SW in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan
(on page 468).
452
LOLS
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Weld in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The

branch end of the fitting is plain. For more information, see
Nipolet Weld in Plan (on page 469).
NOLP
Thrd in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The

branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more information, see
Nipolet Thread in Plan (on page 469).
NOLT
Thrd/SW Union - Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Union (on page
469).
UNS/UNT
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side (on page 470).
H90S/H90T
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side - Places a 90 degree

threaded/socket street elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side (on page
470).
H90SS/H90ST
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side (on page 471).
H45S/H45T
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert (on page 471).
V45S/V45T
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side - Places a 90 degree

H90RS/H90RT
threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side (on page 472).
Thrd/SW Tee Side - Places a threaded/socket straight tee
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Tee Side (on page 472).
HTESS/HTEST
Thrd/SW Tee Vert - Places a threaded/socket straight tee with

the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Tee Vert (on page 473).
VTESS/VTEST
Thrd/SW Tee Red Side - Places a straight threaded/socket

HTERS/HTERT
reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Side (on page 473).
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert - Places a threaded/socket reducing
straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert (on page 474).
VTERS/VTERT
453
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW Cross Side - Places a four-way straight

HRCSS/HCRST
threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Thrd/SW Cross Side (on page 474).
Thrd/SW Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket
HLATS/HLATT
lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Side (on page 474).
Thrd/SW Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket
lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Vert (on page 475).
VLATS/VLATT
Thrd/SW Full Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket full

coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Thrd/SW Full Clpg End (on page 475).
VCPS/VCPT
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket half

coupling component end normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Half Clpg End (on page 476).
VHCPS/VHCPT
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket

reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End (on page 476).
VCPRS/VCPRT
Weld in Vertical - Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Weldolet Weld in Vertical (on
page 476).
VWOL
Thrd in Vertical - Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Threadolet Thread in Vertical
(on page 477).
VTOL
SW in Vertical - Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in
VSO:
EOL-Weld in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y

plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet
Weld in Side (on page 477).
HEOLW
EOL-Weld in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLW

Weld in Vertical (on page 478).
EOL-Thrd in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y
Thread in Side (on page 478).
HEOLT
EOL-Thrd in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLT

Thread in Vertical (on page 478).
EOL-SW in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y
Socket Weld in Side (on page 479).
454
HEOLS
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
EOL-SW in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y

Socket Weld in Vertical (on page 479).
VEOLS
LOL-Weld in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Side
(on page 479).
HLOLW
LOL-Thrd in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in
Side (on page 480).
HLOLT
LOL- SW in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the HLOLS

X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in
Side (on page 480).
Weld in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y
plane. The branch end of the fitting is plain. For more
information, see Nipolet Weld in Vertical (on page 480).
VNOLP
Thrd in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y

plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more
information, see Nipolet Thread in Vertical (on page 481).
VNOLP
The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with
additional commands available.
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Thrd/SW Pipe
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe
Command line: PIPF
If the drawing environment is set to threaded, the piping component has threaded ends. If
the drawing environment is set to a socket weld, the piping component has plain ends.
Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears
when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 25).
Bevel - Used when working with welded components.
Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when
the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel
(on page 25).
455
Toolbars
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Place a threaded/socket pipe

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a pipe component command.

Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
If you receive a prompt for end types, type the option on the command line and press
ENTER.
Nipple
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Nipple
Command line: NIP
Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane.
Length - Defines the length of the fitting component.
Close - Reads the close distance as specified in the data file.
Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears
when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 25).
Bevel - Used when working with welded components.
Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when
the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel
(on page 25).
Place a nipple
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Nipple
. Alternatively, type NIP on the command line and then press ENTER.
Click to select a starting point.
Click to select an ending point.
Specify the end option for the start of the component.
Specify the end option for the end of the component.
The end options default depends on which options you have set.
The pipe nipple is drawn.
456
Toolbars
Tube
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Tube
Command line: TUBE
Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. Different radii can be placed at each vertex of the
polyline, or you can define a common radius for all corners.
Use the Router
command on the RT Panel (on page 189) for useful 3D polyline
routing capabilities.
Tubing uses the pipe component entry within the CADWorx Plant specifications. Pipe and tubing
can be used concurrently. Tubing can occupy a range of 1/8 1/2, whereas regular pipe can
occupy 3/4 and above. Tubing can be set up as an optional component, or the specification can
be set up to only handle tubing.
After tubing is placed in the drawing, other components can be inserted into it. Like normal
piping, tubing also automatically breaks. Even after a component is inserted, the tubing remains
as one piece. When edited with CEDIT, the tubing attached to a single polyline also acts as one
piece.
Grouping is controlled by the PICKSTYLE environmental variable, which must be turned
on for the tubing to act as one piece. Alternatively, you can use the CADWorx GROUPTOG
command to turn the AutoCAD grouping control on or off. For more information, see Group
On/Off (on page 150).
Enter corner radius - Defines the radius to be used at each vertex.
Manual - Places individual radii at each corner of the selected polyline. The software pauses at
each vertex so that the radius can be defined. A rubber-banded line back to the actual vertex is
shown in the drawing.
Tubing is exported to a live database, and appears in the CADWorx Bill of Material as one
piece.
Tubing is exported to the CADWorx ISOGEN isometric generator and appears in the
ISOGEN material list.
Tubing is not exported to CAESAR II.
Place tubing
1. Click Tube
. Alternatively, type TUBE on the command line and then press ENTER.
2. Type the required radius.
3. Select the 2D or 3D polyline.
The tubing is attached.
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan
Command line: 90/S90T
Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point.
457
Toolbars

selection.
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan
Command line: 90SS/90ST
Places a 90 degree street elbow in the X-Y plane.
Female - Places the female end of the elbow first.
Male - Places the male end of the elbow first.
Female end direction - Specifies the direction of the female end of the elbow.
Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.
Place a 90 degree street plan elbow

1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan
then press ENTER.
2.
3.
4.
5.
. Alternatively, type 90SS on the command line and
If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type 90ST on the command line.
To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.
Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
Click in the direction of the male end of the elbow.
If the male end is placed first, the system prompts you for placement of the female
end.
458
Toolbars
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45S/45T
Place a plan elbow

1.
2.
3.
4.

Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan
Command line: 90RS/90RT
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.

1. Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command.
2. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd.
459
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Tee Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Plan
Command line: TESS/TEST
Places a threaded/socket straight tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan
Command line: TESS/TERT
Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane.
460
Toolbars
Place a plan tee
1.
2.
3.
4.

Thrd/SW Conc Swage

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc Swage
Command line: SWGC
Places a concentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point
Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage.
Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage.
Place a concentric reducer swage

1. Click Thrd/SW Conc Swage
. Alternatively, type SWGC on the command line and then
press ENTER.
4. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.
Type the required alpha description.
5. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc Swage
Command line: SWGE
Places an eccentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane.
461
Toolbars
Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage.
Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage.
Place an eccentric reducer swage

1. Click Thrd/SW Ecc Swage
. Alternatively, type SWGE on the command line and then
press ENTER.
3. Click in the direction of the small end of reducer.
or
5. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.
Type the required alpha description.
6. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub
Command line: SWGCT
Places a concentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane.

Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub
Command line: SWGET
Places an eccentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane.
462
Toolbars
or
or
Thrd/SW Cap
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cap
Command line: CAPS/CAPT
Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Place a cap
Thrd/SW Cross Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Plan
Command line: CRSS/CRST
Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan cross

463
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Lateral Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Plan
Command line: LATS/LATT
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Thrd/SW Plug
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug
Command line: PLGT
Places a plug in the X-Y plane.
Cap end - Places the cap end of the component at the start point.
Place a plug
1. Click a plug component command.
3. Click to select the end point.
The plug component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
Command line: BUSS/BUST
Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.
464
Toolbars
Place a bushing
1. Click a bushing component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.
The bushing component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan
Command line: CPS/CPT
Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline.
Place a coupling
Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan
Command line: HCPS/HCPT
Places a half coupling in the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the start point at the plan end.
Place a coupling
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan
Command line: CPRS/CPRT
Places a reducing coupling in the X-Y plane.
Large - Places the large end at the start point.
Middle - Places the start point of the component at the centerline.
Small - Places the small end at the start point.
465
Toolbars
Place a coupling
Weldolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan
Command line: WOL
Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a plan fitting

1. Click a plan fitting component command.
3. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting.
The fitting component is drawn.
Threadolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan
Command line: TOL
Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Plan
Command line: SOL
Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.

466
Toolbars
Elbowlet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Plan
Command line: EOLW
Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a plan elbowlet fitting

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a plan elbowlet command.

Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting.
Click in the direction of the butt weld end of the fitting.
Elbowlet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Plan
Command line: EOLT
Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is threaded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Plan
Command line: EOLS
Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is socket
welded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

467
Toolbars
Latrolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Plan
Command line: LOLW
Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a plan latrolet fitting

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a plan latrolet command.

Click in the direction of the main end of the fitting.
Latrolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Plan
Command line: LOLT
Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Plan
Command line: LOLS
Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.

1.
2.
3.
4.
468

Toolbars
Nipolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan
Command line: NOLP
Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.

Nipolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan
Command line: NOLT
Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Thrd/SW Union
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Union
Command line: UNT
Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the union.

469
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90S/H90T
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Corner - Places the start point at the corner of the elbow.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe 90 Street Ell Side
Command line: H90S/H90ST
Places a 90 degree street elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Male - Starts the elbow at the male end point of the selected component.
Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.
Place a 90 degree side street elbow

1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan
then press ENTER.
2.
3.
4.
5.
470
. Alternatively, type H90SS on the command line and
If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type H90ST on the command line.
To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.
Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45S/H45T
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when
the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert
Command line: V45S/V45T

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
471
Toolbars
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side
Command line: H90RS/H90RT
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select Up or Down.
Thrd/SW Tee Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Side
Command line: HTESS/HTEST
Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.
472

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Tee Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Vert
Command line: VTESS/VTEST
Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at

Thrd/SW Tee Red Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Side
Command line: HTERS/HTERT
Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
473
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert
Command line: VTERS/VTERT
Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is

Thrd/SW Cross Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Side
Command line: HCRSS/HCRST
Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side cross

Thrd/SW Lateral Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Side
Command line: HLATS/HLATT
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane.
474
Toolbars
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Thrd/SW Lateral Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATS/VLATT
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of
the lateral is placed at the start point by default.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Thrd/SW Full Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg End
Command line: VCPS/VCPT
Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.

475
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg End
Command line: VHCPS/VHCPT
Places a half coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.

Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End
Command line: VCPRS/VCPRT
Places a reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.

Weldolet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical
Command line: VWOL
Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a vertical fitting

1. Click a vertical fitting component command.
476
Toolbars
Threadolet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical
Command line: VTOL
Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Vertical
Command line: VSOL
Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.

Elbowlet Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Side
Command line: HEOLW
Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is
butt welded.
Place a side elbowlet fitting

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a side elbowlet component command.

Select Up or Down.
477
Toolbars
Elbowlet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Vert
Command line: VEOLW
Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting
is butt welded.
Place a vertical elbowlet fitting

3. Click in the direction of the buttweld end of the fitting.
Elbowlet Thread in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Side
Command line: HEOLT
threaded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Elbowlet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Vert
Command line: VEOLT
is threaded.

478
Toolbars
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Side
Command line: HEOLS
socket welded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Vert
Command line: VEOLS
is socket welded.

Latrolet Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Side
Command line: HLOLW
Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt
welded.
Place a side latrolet fitting

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a side latrolet component command.

Select Up or Down.
479
Toolbars
Latrolet Thread in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Side
Command line: HLOLT
Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Latrolet Socket Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Side
Command line: HLOLS
Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket
welded.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Nipolet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical
Command line: VNOLP
Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.
480
Toolbars
Nipolet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical
Command line: VNOLP
Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Thrd/SW Valves
Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Valves
The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket
weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded
and Socket
Weld
commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between the two
modes.
The commands on the Thrd/SW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW Gate - Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in GATS/GATT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gate (on
page 484).
Thrd/SW Ball - Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ball (on
page 484).
BALS/BALT
Thrd/SW Globe - Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve GLBS/GLBT

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Globe (on
page 485).
481
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in PLUS/PLUT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on
page 485).
Thrd/SW Check - Places a threaded or socket weld check
valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Check (on page 486).
CHKS/CHKT
Thrd/SW Needle - Places a threaded or socket weld needle

Needle (on page 486).
NEDS/NEDT
Thrd/SW Diaphragm - Places a threaded or socket weld

diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Diaphragm (on page 487).
DIAS/DIAT
Thrd/SW Rotary - Places a threaded or socket weld rotary

Rotary (on page 487).
ROTS/ROTT
Thrd/SW Dual Check - Places a threaded or socket weld dual

check valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Dual Check (on page 488).
DCHS/DCHT
Thrd/SW Control - Places a threaded or socket weld control

Control (on page 488).
CNTS/CNTT
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld

three-way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan (on page 489).
3VS/3VT
Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld

four-way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan (on page 489).
4VS/4VT
Thrd/SW Relief Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90

degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the
X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Relief Top (on
page 494).
RELS/RELT
Thrd/SW Angle Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90

ANGS/ANGT
degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Angle Top (on page 490).
Thrd/SW Gage - Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gage (on
page 491).
GAGS/GAGT
X-Body Gate BW - Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate BW
(on page 491).
EGAB
X-Body Gate Thrd - Places a threaded X-body style gate valve EGAT
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate Thrd
(on page 492).
482
Toolbars
Command Name
X-Body Gate SW - Places a socket weld X-body style gate
valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate
SW (on page 492).
Command Line
EGAS
Command Name
Command Line
Thrd/SW 3 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld

H3VS/H3VT
three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Side (on page 493).
Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical - Places a threaded or socket weld
three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical (on page 493).
V3VS/V3VT
Thrd/SW 4 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld

four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 4 Way Side (on
page 494).
H4VS/H4VT
Thrd/SW Relief Side - Places a threaded or socket weld 90

degree relief valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Relief Side (on page 490).
HRELS/HRELT
Thrd/SW Pressure Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90

degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Pressure
Top.
VRELS/VRELT
Thrd/SW Angle Side - Places a threaded or socket weld angle HANGS/HANGT

Angle Side (on page 495).
483
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Thrd/SW Gate
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gate
Command line: GATS/GATT
Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Ball
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Ball
Command line: BALS/BALT
Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
484
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Globe
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Globe
Command line: GLBS/GLBT
Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Plug
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug
Command line: PLUS/PLUT
Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
485
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Check
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Check
Command line: CHKS/CHKT
Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Needle
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Needle
Command line: NEDS/NEDT
Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
486
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Diaphragm
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Diaphragm
Command line: DIAS/DIAT
Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Rotary
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Rotary
Command line: ROTS/ROTT
Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
487
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Dual Check

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Dual Check
Command line: DCHS/DCHT
Places a threaded or socket weld dual check valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Control
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Control
Command line: CNTS/CNTT
Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Place a valve
488
Toolbars
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan
Command line: 3VS/3VT
Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current
specification.

Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan
Command line: 4VS/4VT
Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve in the X-Y plane.
component.

1. Click a four-way plan valve command.
ENTER to connect to the last point.
489
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Relief Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Side
Command line: RELS/RELT
Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree relief valve in the X-Y plane.
Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.
Place a relief side valve

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click a relief valve component command.

Click in the direction of the relief end of the valve.
Thrd/SW Angle Top

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle
Command line: ANGS/ANGT
Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane.
Place an angle top valve

1.
2.
3.
4.
490
Click an angle valve component command.

Click in the direction of the branch end of the valve.
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Gage
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gage
Command line: GAGS/GAGT
Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane
component.
To pick the outlet locations of the gage valve, use the MIDpoint of OSnap command and
then pick the sides on the outlet end.
Because there is no way to accurately locate the outlets in 3D, first draw the component in
2D and then use the CONVERTSOLID command to convert the valve component to 3D
solids.
Place a valve
X-Body Gate BW
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate BW
Command line: EGAB
Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
491
Toolbars
X-Body Gate Thrd

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: X-Body Gate Thrd
Command line: EGAT
Places a threaded X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
X-Body Gate SW
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate SW
Command line: EGAS
Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
492
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Thrd/SW 3 Way Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Side
Command line: H3VS/H3VT
Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y
plane.
component.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical
Command line: V3VS/V3VT
Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
component.

493
Toolbars
Thrd/SW 4 Way Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Side
Command line: H4VS/H4VT
Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y
plane.
component.

1. Click a four-way side valve command.
Thrd/SW Relief Top

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Top
Command line: HRELS/HRELT
Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to
the X-Y plane.
Relief - Places the start point at the relief end.
Place a relief top valve

1.
2.
3.
4.
494
Click a relief valve component command.

Select Up or Down.
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Angle Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle Side
Command line: HANGS/HANGT
Places a threaded or socket weld angle valve in the X-Y plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Up or Down.
Gaskets, Etc.
Plant menu: Toolbars > Gaskets, Etc.
Command Name
Command Line
Tick Mark - Creates a dimension tick mark. For more

information, see Tick Mark (on page 201).
TICK
Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected

location. For more information, see Standard (on page 187).
STDBOLT
Non Standard - Places non standard stud bolts at the

NONSTDBOLT
selected location. For more information, see Non Standard (on
page 187).
Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each AUTOBOLT
gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 184).
Gasket - Places a gasket. For more information, see Gasket
(on page 496).
GAS
Weld Gap - Creates weld gaps For more information, see

Weld Gap (on page 497).
WELD
495
Toolbars
Gasket
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Gasket
Command line: GAS
Places a gasket. The gasket is composed of two different entities. First is an inserted block that
is located at the insert point. Another inserted block is placed on the other side of the gasket.
The GASR contains Xdata information for Bill of Materials extraction. GASL is a plain insert
without information. When you use mode conversion to convert components to another mode in
a Z-plane position, the GASL insert is destroyed. When you convert the single GASR insert in
the proper X and Y planes, both sides of the gasket are created again.
The shape of the gasket allows for other uses, as explained below.
The half circle on the outer portion of both inserts allow for easy picking for dimensioning. For
example, when dimensioning, select Osnap, CENter of, and pick the center of circle which is the
exact corner of the face of flange). You should find that it is relatively easy to select the center of
the circle from a zoomed out view.
For placing a flange face against the gasket, you can select Osnap, ENDpoint of, and select the
side of the gasket to place the flange perfectly in position. This provides a method of placing the
flange when the last point option is no longer available.
This routine is also used for ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column
indicating the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column and adds this ring
number to the bill of materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges
(under compression) are used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring.
Insert a gasket
1. Click Gasket
.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to
select the last point of the previously-placed component.
3. Click in the required direction.
The software inserts a gasket at the selected location.
The same procedure can be used to place ring type joints. The data files for rings have
an extra column, which indicates the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional
column, and adds this ring number to the Bill of Materials description. The distance between the
faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) is used in this file instead of the actual depth of
the ring.
You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47) in Piping Rules under Setup
.
496
Toolbars
Weld Gap
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Weld Gap
Command line: WELD
Creates weld gaps for detailed pipe fabrication. Weld gaps are controlled by the currently
defined specification and are placed according to size and/or schedule.
last point - Places the weld gap at the last point of the previously-created component.
Each specification has data files that provide different thicknesses.
Define a weld gap

1. Click Weld Gap
.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to
select the last point of the previously-placed component.
3. Click in the required direction.
The software creates a weld gap.
Use Osnap > Insert and select any portion of the weld gap symbol to start a new pipe or
component from the weld gap.
You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the
Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 47) in Piping Rules under Setup .
Restraints
Plant menu: > Toolbars > Restraints
The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.
Command Name
Command Line
Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For

more information, see Translational (on page 223).
TRANSLATIONAL
Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more

information, see Anchor (on page 224).
ANCHOR
Spring Hanger - Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For

more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 224).
SPRING
Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more

information, see Rotational (on page 225).
ROTATIONAL
Snubber - Creates a Snubber-type restraint. For more

information, see Snubber (on page 226).
SNUBBER
Guide - Creates a Guide-type restraint. For more information, GUIDE

see Guide (on page 226).
The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is
important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can
position a rotational restraint at any vector.
497
Toolbars
Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that
appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are
delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be
re-drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the
restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.
The CAESARTolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process
encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is
sloped.
All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides
to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on
page 64) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID,
SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these
SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to
the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.
You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.
Misc
Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc
Use the Threaded
and Socket Weld
commands on the Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 25) to switch between these two modes for SW/Thrd Plan and SW/Thrd Side.
The commands on the Misc toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Command Name
Command Line
Flanged Plan - Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y

STRF
plane. For more information, see Flanged Plan (on page 500).
SW/Thrd Plan - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer
SW/Thrd Plan (on page 500).
STRT
Create - Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape

components. For more information, see User Shapes (on
page 153).
USERCREATE
User Shape 1 - Places user created shape 1 in the X-Y plane. USE1
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).
498
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Bleed Ring - Places a bleed ring in the drawing in the X-Y

plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on
page 501).
BLD
Spec Bld Side - Places a blind spectacle in the drawing

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle
Blind Side (on page 501).
SPCT
Reinforcing Pad - Inserts information indicating a

REINFPAD
reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad
(on page 222).
Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts information indicating a
reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing
Saddle (on page 222).
REINFSAD
Expansion Joint - Places an expansion joint in the drawing in EXPF

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on
page 502).
Rigid Element - Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing.
For more information, see Rigid Element (on page 502).
ELEMENT

GENERIC
Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the

drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page 108).
STOPSIGN
Command Name
Command Line
Flanged Side - Places a flanged pipe component normal to

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Side (on
page 503).
HSTRF
SW/Thrd Side - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer

component normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see SW/Thrd Side (on page 503).
HSTRT
Spec Bld Vert - Places a blind spectacle with the main normal VSPCT
to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind
The arrow in the lower right corner of the button indicates a flyout for more options.
499
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Flanged Plan
Misc toolbar: Flanged Plan
Command line: STRF
Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.
Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.
Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.
Place a plan flange pipe

1. Click Flanged Plan
. Alternatively, type STRF, and press ENTER.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a main end direction.
4. Select branch direction.
The flanged plan pipe is placed.
SW/Thrd Plan
Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Plan
Command line: STRT
Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Place the start point of the component at the other end.
Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.
Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.
500
Toolbars
Place a side socket weld threaded pipe
1. Click SW/Thrd Plan
. Alternatively, type STRT, and press ENTER.
3. Select a main end direction.
4. Select branch direction.
The plan socket weld/threaded pipe is placed.
Bleed Ring or Spacer

Misc toolbar: Bleed Ring
Lined toolbar: Lined Spacer
Command line: BLD
Places a bleed ring or spacer in the X-Y plane.
Length - Specifies the length of the bleed ring.
Place a bleed ring

1. Click Bleed Ring
. Alternatively, type BLD, and press ENTER.
The bleed ring is placed.
Spectacle Blind Side

Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Side
Command line: SPCT
Places a blind spectacle normal to the X-Y plane.
Open - Places the start point at the closed end.
Close - Places the start point at the closed end.
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.
Place a side blind spectacle

1. Click Spec Bld Side
. Alternatively, type SPCT, and press ENTER.
2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
The side blind spectacle is placed.
501
Toolbars
Reinforcing Saddle
Miscellaneous toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle
Command line: REINFSAD
Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement
saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that
is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
For more information, see Insert a reinforcement saddle (on page 223).
Expansion Joint
Misc toolbar: Expansion Joint
Command line: EXPF
Places an expansion joint in the X-Y plane.
Length - Specifies the length of the expansion joint.
Place an expansion joint

1. Click Expansion Joint
. Alternatively, type EXPF, and press ENTER.
The expansion joint is placed.
Rigid Element
Misc toolbar: Rigid Element
Command line: ELEMENT
Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing.
Used with CAESAR II (pipe stress analysis software) when a rigid component is required. This is
convenient when using a rigid from the base of a pump to the pump discharge piping, or placing
a rigid as a structural member that might be supporting the pipe.
When using the CAESAR II bi-directional link or importing a stress input file, rigids can be
automatically placed. These rigids are used by the bi-directional link and should not be modified
in any manner. They can be moved with a piping system, but they need to remain in their
relative location. They are often used when the length of a CAESAR II component does not
match the components contained within CADWorx.
These elements are represented with a polyline that has pointed ends. Specify where rigid
elements display from the LayerByLineNumber (on page 35) configuration setting.
Place a rigid element

1. Click Rigid Element
. Alternatively, type ELEMENT, and press ENTER.
2. Select a start point.
3. Select a second point.
The rigid element is placed.
502
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Flanged Side
Misc toolbar: Flanged Side
Command line: HSTRF
Places a pipe component normal to the X-Y plane.
Down - Places the branch direction in the negative the Z direction.
Place a side flange pipe

1. Click Flanged Side
. Alternatively, type HSTRF, and press ENTER.
The side flanged pipe is placed.
SW/Thrd Side
Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Side
Command line: HSTRT
Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe

1. Click SW/Thrd Side
. Alternatively, type HSTRT, and press ENTER.
The socket weld threaded pipe is placed.
503
Toolbars
Spectacle Blind Vertical

Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Vert
Command line: VSPCT
Places a vertical blind spectacle side in the X-Y plane.
Open - Places the start point at the closed end.
Close - Places the start point at the closed end.
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.
Place a vertical blind spectacle

1. Click Spec Bld Vert . Alternatively, type VSPCT, and press ENTER.
2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the start point.
The blind spectacle is drawn.
Operators
Plant menu: Toolbars > Operators
Command Name
Command Line
Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn in

the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on
page 151).
TOPWORKSADD
Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or deletes

top works already associated with a valve. For more
information, see Top Works Change (on page 151).
TOPWORKSCHANGE
Line Numbers
Plant menu: Toolbars > Line Numbers
Command Name
Command Line
Line Number Setup - Modifies any line number configuration. NUMBERSETUP

For more information, see Setup (on page 124).
504
Line Number Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers

to existing components. For more information, see Assign (on
page 127).
NUMBERASSIGN
Line Number Annotate - Labels components with existing

line numbers. For more information, see Annotate (on page
128).
NUMBERANNOTATE
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Line Number By - Sets the line number from one of three

sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a selected
component. For more information, see Set (on page 125).
NUMBERSET
Line Number Count - Sets the present line number count

value. For more information, see Count (on page 126).
NUMBERCOUNT
Line Number Increment - Increases the line number count

value. For more information, see Increment (on page 127).
NUMBER+
Line Number Decrement - Decreases the line number count

value. For more information, see Decrement (on page 127).
NUMBER-
UCS
Plant menu: Toolbars > UCS
Command Name
Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat
position. For more information, see Flat (on page 229).
Command Line
VIEWFLAT
North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north VIEWNORTH
position. For more information, see North (on page 230).
South - Places the current user coordinate system in the
south position. For more information, see South (on page
231).
VIEWSOUTH
East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east

position. For more information, see East (on page 232).
VIEWEAST
West - Places the current user coordinate system in the west

position. For more information, see West (on page 231).
VIEWWEST
Next - Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS

UCSNEXT
positions. For more information, see UCS Next (on page 230).
UCS Object - Orients the UCS according to an object you
select. For more information, see UCS Object (on page 232).
UCS
Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates

the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see
Compass (on page 230).
COMPASS
Steel
Plant menu: Toolbars > Steel
Command Name
Wide Flange - Places a wide flange shape. For more
information, see Wide Flange Shapes (on page 236).
Command Line
WSHAPE
505
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Channel - Places a channel shape. For more information, see CSHAPE

Channel Shapes (on page 237).
Angle - Places an angle shape. For more information, see
Angle Shapes (on page 238).
LSHAPE
Double Angle - Places a double angle shape. For more

information, see Angle Double Shape (on page 247).
2LSHAPE
Tee - Places a tee shape. For more information, see Tee

TSHAPE
Flat Bar - Places a flat bar shape. For more information, see
Flat Bar Shapes (on page 242).
FBSHAPE
Round Bar - Places a round bar shape. For more information, RBSHAPE
see Round Bar Shapes (on page 243).
506
Structural Pipe - Places a pipe shape. For more information,

see Pipe Shapes (on page 240).
PSHAPE
Structural Tubing - Places a rectangular tube shape. For

more information, see Tube Shapes (on page 241).
TSSHAPE
Z Shape - Places a zee shape. For more information, see Z

ZSHAPE
Channel Lip - Places a channel shape with a lip. For more

information, see Channel Shape with Lip (on page 244).
CLIPSHAPE
Angle Lip - Places an angle shape with a lip. For more

information, see Angle Shape with Lip (on page 245).
LLIPSHAPE
Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information,

see Plate (on page 250).
SPLATE
Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the end of

a member. For more information, see Base Plate (on page
252).
SBPLATE
Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more

information, see Cope (on page 280).
SCOPE
Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more

information, see Cut (on page 281).
SCUT
Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For

more information, see Miter (on page 280).
SMITER
Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union

(on page 282).
SUNION
Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information,

see Edit (on page 282).
SCEDIT
Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting an

existing component in the model. For more information, see
Set Size by Component (on page 257).
COMP2STEEL
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected

steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on
page 304).
SCG
Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of

members. For more information, see Auto Cope (on page
290).
SAUTOCOPE
Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use SFRAME
to build structural steel models. For more information, see
Steel - Frame Creation (on page 268).
Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the
drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 271).
SLADDER
Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, see

Stair (on page 275).
SSTAIR
Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more

information, see Handrail (on page 273).
SHRAIL
Settings
Plant menu: Toolbars > Settings
Command Name
Command Line
Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current

drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).
SETUP
Specification - Specifies a drawing specification file. For

more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page
43).
SETSPEC
Main Size - Specifies main and reduction sizes. For more

SETSIZE
Size - Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a

component. For more information, see Size (on page 56).
COMP2SIZE
Spec - Specifies the current specification by selecting a

component. For more information, see Spec (on page 56).
COMP2SPEC
Size-Spec - Specifies the main size, reduction size, and

specification by selecting a component. For more information,
see Size-Spec (on page 57).
COMP2SIZESPEC
Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a

COMP2LINE
component that you select. For more information, see Line (on
page 129).
All - Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and COMP2ALL
line number by selecting a component with the needed values.
For more information, see All (on page 57).
507
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more

information, see Settings (on page 73).
CURRENT
2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D

double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 70) and 2D Double Line (on page 71).
CONVERTDOUBLE
2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single

line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page
70) and 2D Single Line (on page 71).
CONVERTSINGLE
3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. CONVERTSOLID

For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 3D
Solids (on page 71).
Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to
isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on
page 70) and Convert Isometric (on page 71).
CONVERTISO
Threaded - Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based

components. For more information, see Threaded (on page
73).
Socket Weld - Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for

hub-based components. For more information, see Socket
Weld (on page 73).
Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. CEDIT

For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62).
Xref Component Edit - Views sizes or information within the
component.XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on
page 73)
XCEDIT
Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components.

For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68).
GCEDIT
Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For

more information, see Auto Connect (on page 150).
CONNECTOG
Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more

information, see Zoom Lock (on page 181).
ZOOMLOCK
Optional Items - Places a component when the component

type in the specification has an optional component. For more
information, see Optional Items (on page 55).
SPECOPTION
Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline

of the component with the accompanying graphics. For more
information, see Group On/Off (on page 150).
GROUPTOG
Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off.

For more information, Select Control (on page 290).
SELECTCONTROL
Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings
508
Toolbars
Palettes
Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc
Command Name
Spec View - Filters the available components based on the
size and specification settings. For more information, see
Spec View Palette (on page 76).
Command Line
SPECVIEW
Line View -Isolates components based on their line number or LINEVIEW

their specification. For more information, see Line View
Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add,
modify and remove insulation configurations that can be
applied to CADWorx components. For more information, see
Insulation View Palette (on page 88).
INSULATIONVIEW
Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D CLASHVIEW

solids in the current drawing as well as any attached XREF
drawings. For more information, see Clash View Palette (on
page 97).
Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all pipe PIPESUPPORTREPORT
supports found in the selection or in the entire model. For
more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page 93).
Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of modeling
issues. For more information, see Discontinuity View Palette
(on page 92).
DISCONTINUITYVIEW
P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a PIDVIEW
project database. For more information, see P&ID View
509
Toolbars
510
APPENDIX A
Specification and Data Files

CADWorx Plant specification files (.spc) are delivered in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.
You can relocate these files to other local or network folders:
Change the location of the Spec folder by modifying the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39)
variable stored in the current configuration settings.
Editing Component Data Files

CADWorx Plant uses a component data text file to determine the correct dimensions of
components. When you select a component, the software checks the current specification,
retrieves data from the correct data file, and draws the component.
Use the Spec Editor
to create new data files for components and the needed component
sizes. The data file structure that is required for each component is provided in the DataFile.tbl
file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. This file is used to generate template data. For
more information, see the Spec Editor documentation delivered with CADWorx.
511
Specification and Data Files
512
APPENDIX B
AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant

In This Appendix
Modifying a User Profile ................................................................. 513
Creating a Base Profile .................................................................. 514
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant
Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database .......... 516
514
Modifying a User Profile

You can run CADWorx Plant from any network or local folder by manually creating or modifying
a user profile and modifying the search paths in the profile.
CADWorx runs within AutoCAD by using the AutoCAD user profile command line switch, /P. A
user profile shortcut is created when Plant is installed. For example, if AutoCAD is installed in
the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD folder, a shortcut is created for CADWorx Plant. The
value of Target on the Shortcut tab of the Properties dialog box for the shortcut is:
"C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD\acad.exe" /P "Profile Name"
Manually create a profile by modifying the support file search paths and the template file
location.
1. In Plant, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box appears.
2. On the Files tab, expand Support File Search Path in the Search paths, file names, and
file locations list.
The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.
The acad.rx file is in the support folder. AutoCAD uses acad.rx to load the Plant menus,
toolbars, and panels.
3. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.
4. Manually create the new support folder and copy the acad.rx file to this folder.
5. On the Files tab, expand Template Settings > Drawing Template File Location.
513

The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.
6. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.
7. Click OK.
To set up a profile for another user login on the same computer, run Start > All
Programs > CADWorx > Plant > Setup Profile - Plant.
Creating a Base Profile

To create a base profile, you can copy the AutoCAD icon or CADWorx icon, and specify a
profile. This profile is based on the default AutoCAD profile.
1. Make a copy of the Plant shortcut on the desktop.
2. Right-click the shortcut and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
3. On the Shortcut tab, replace the value after /P in Target with the new profile name. For
example:
"C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD - English\acad.exe" /P UserBase
You can use any name that is not used on the Profile tab of the Options dialog box
(Tools > Options) in AutoCAD. Use quotes around the profile name if it contains spaces.
4. Click OK.
5. Double- click the shortcut to start the software.
AutoCAD creates a new profile based on the software defaults.
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with

CADWorx Plant
You can run CADWorx Plant and the standalone version of CADWorx Equipment
simultaneously within the same AutoCAD session. This is necessary when equipment created
with Equipment needs to be modified while in the Plant drawing session.
1. In Plant, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. On the Files tab, expand the Support File Search Path item.
514

3. Click Add, and browse to the CADWorx Equipment support directory. An example is shown
in the figure below.
4. Close CADWorx Plant.

5. Start Windows Explorer and browse to the CADWorx Plant support directory (for example,
C:\CADWorx Version\ Plant\Support).
6. Locate the file acad.rx file, and open it using a text editor.
7. Type CADWorxEquipment.arx into this file below the entry for CADWorxPlant.arx.
If CADWorxEquipment.arx is above CADWorxPlant.arx, CADWorx Plant tool tips do

not function.
515

8. Start CADWorx Plant.
CADWorx Equipment starts simultaneously.
9. If the Equipment menu does not load, run the LOADMENUEQUIP command.
Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live

Database
This following AutoCAD commands are monitored by CADWorx for live external database
synchronization. When any of the commands are used, CADWorx automatically updates a live
external database.
Erase and Undo Commands

These commands remove and restore graphic entities and mark rows in the database. If a
CADWorx component is deleted from the drawing, the row from the database is deleted when
the drawing file is closed.
ERASE
U
UNDO
REDO
MREDO
OOPS
BLOCK
-WBLOCK
EXPLODE
CUTCLIP
GROUP
Copy Commands
These commands add new graphic entities to the model.
COPY
BREAK
ARRAY
GRIP_COPY
GRIP_MIRROR
EXPLODE
MIRROR
PASTECLIP
PASTEORIG
DROPGEOM
Move Commands
These commands move the graphic entities in the model.
MOVE
GRIP_STRETCH
STRETCH
DROPGEOM
516
Index
2
2D Double Line 71
2D Panel 179
2D Representation 179
2D Representation Hidden 180
2D Single Line 71
3
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling 329
3D Solids 71
3-Way Plan Valve 383
3-Way Side Valve 386
3-Way Vertical Valve 386
4
45 LR Ell 346
4-Way Plan Valve 384
4-Way Side Valve 387
9
90 LR Ell 345
90 SR Ell 345
A
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars 327
Add a user shape to a specification 171
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing 308
Add or remove properties from BOM 133,
293, 317
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe 176
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension
176
Adjustable Bend 344
Aliases and Command Names 328
All 57
AlphaSizeControl 30
Anchor 224
Angle Double Shape 247
Angle Shape with Lip 245
Angle Shapes 238
Angle Side Valve 388
Angle Top Valve 385
Annotate 128
Annotate Component 289
Apply Auto Coupling Rule 49
Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule 48

Apply Bolt Insertion Rule 47
Apply Branch Table Rule 48
Apply Change Data Rule 51
Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box 51
Apply End Type Rule 47
Apply Flange Insertion Rule 48
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule 47
Apply Line Number Rule 50
Apply Pipe End Prep Rule 49
Apply Pipe Healing Rule 48
Apply Pipe Length Rule 47
Apply Size Rule 46
Apply Specification Rule 46
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View
Palette) 90
Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule 48
Apply Weld Insertion Rule 47
Arrow 210
Assembly View Palette 99
Assign 127
Assign line numbers 128
Audit HVAC Database 324
Audit Pipe Database 145
Audit Steel Database 302
Audit the HVAC database 324
AuditDataOnStartup 30
Auto Connect 150
Auto Cope 290
Auto Gasket 183
Auto Route 189
Auto Weld 185
AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant 513
AutoDimensionBox 31
Automatic 184, 196
B
Ball Valve 377
Base Plate 252
Bill of Material Setup 132
Bleed Ring or Spacer 501
Blind Flange 365
Bolt 183
BoltRoundControl 33
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box
134
BomBoltControl 31
BomScheduleDirection 32
BomScheduleSpacing 32
517
Index
BomTagGridFactor 32
BomTagOptimize 32
BomTagRadiusFactor 32
BomTagSpacingFactor 32
Box 180
Butterfly Valve 380
Buttweld 329
Buttweld LR 192
Buttweld SR 193
Buttweld Valves 375
C
C.G. Generator 147
CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match
Specifications Dialog Box 52
CADWorxMaterial 33
CAESARMaterial 33
CAESARMemory 33
CAESARTolerance 33
CAESARVersion 34
Cap 340
Center Line 49
CG Generator 304
Change 199
Change Layer 218
Change Size 57
Change Specification 60
Change text alignment in columns 133,
293, 317
134, 293, 317
Change the column order 133, 293, 317
Change the Elevation 199
Change the layer associated with an object
218
Change the layers associated with HVAC
components 323
Change the size automatically 58
Change the size manually 58
Change the size of a model with branch
connections automatically 60
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes
automatically 59
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes
manually 59
Change the specification automatically 61
Change the specification manually 61
Change the specification of a model with
branches automatically 61
Channel Shape with Lip 244
Channel Shapes 237
Check Valve 379
Clash View Palette 97
518
Compass 230, 328

Component 199
Conc Reducer 339
Configuration Layers 44
Configuration Settings 28
Connecting to components 328
Continue Routing 191
Control Valve 382
Conventions 15
Convert a component to a different mode
71
Convert Existing 72
Convert from project data 72
Convert Isometric 71
Convert Legacy Drawing 51
Convert Solid 289
Convert to 3D enhanced 72
Coordinates 200
Cope 280
Count 126
Count weld gaps automatically 186
Coupling 401
Create a 2D representation 180
Create a 2D representation with hidden
lines 180
Create a 2D single line user shape 170
Create a 2D user shape 168
Create a 3D user shape 167
Create a new frame configuration 269
Create a user shape file 157
Create a user shape from a block 165
Create a user shape from a polyline 164
Create a user shape from points 162
Create an assembly 100
Creating a Base Profile 514
Cross Plan 422
Cross Reducing Plan 423
Cross Reducing Side 439
Cross Reducing Vertical 440
Cross Side 439
Cut 281
Cut BOM using Automatic placement 135,
295, 319
Cut BOM using Manual placement 136,
295, 319
Cut HVAC Bill of Material 318
Cut members by line 281
Cut members by three-point plane 281
Cut Pipe Bill of Material 134
Cut Steel Bill of Material 294
CWexplode 72
Index
D
Data Remove 322
DataBaseCodesISOGEN 34
Decrement 127
Define a weld gap 497
Delete a layer 219
Delete an assembly from the Assembly
Manager 101
Delete Bill of Material 141
Delete Layer 218
Detail 207
Diaphragm Valve 380
Dim Adjustment 175
Dimension Panel 195
DimensionsExcludedSlope 34
DimensionsExistingISOGEN 34
Discontinuity View Palette 92
Display only the layer associated with an
object 220
Dots 215
Draw non-pipe components 77
Draw pipe components 77
Drawing Prototype 30
Dual Check Valve 382
E
East 232
Ecc Reducer 339
Edit 181, 282, 314
Edit a frame configuration 270
Edit an assembly 100
Edit an assembly path 101
Edit an existing user shape 158
Edit by redefining connection points 159
Edit HVAC components globally 315
Editing Component Data Files 511
Editor 57
Elbow Centerline 175
ElbowCenterLine 34
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan 467
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side 479
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical 479
Elbowlet Thread in Plan 467
Elbowlet Thread in Side 478
Elbowlet Thread in Vertical 478
Elbowlet Weld in Plan 467
Elbowlet Weld in Side 477
Elbowlet Weld in Vertical 478
Elevation 200, 209
End Type Information 121
Expansion Joint 502
Export CADWorx HVAC data 323
Export HVAC 323

Export Pipe 143
Export Pipe Bill of Material 139
Export Steel 301
Export Steel Bill of Material 299
Export Steel Model 303
Extract batch ISOGEN files 106
Extract ISOGEN files 105
Extract piping component files 112
F
Fiberglass 394
Fiberglass Pipe 397
Find Legacy Components Dialog Box 54
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) 80
FittingWidth 35
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan 403
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side 410
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert 411
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan 403
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side 410
Flanged Concentric Reducer 405
Flanged Plan 500
Flanged Side 503
Flanged Tee Plan 404
Flanged Tee Side 411
Flanged Tee Vertical 412
Flanges 361
Flat 229
Flat Bar Shapes 242
Flgd/BW Valves 375
Frame Annotation 270
Frame Creation 268
Full Coupling End 409
G
Gasket 496
Gaskets, Etc. 495
Gate Valve 376
GC Edit 315
Generate a CAESAR II input file 152
Generic Attach 173, 313
Generic Attachment 257
Global Edit 68, 286
Global Edit All 287
Globe Valve 378
Graphics / Pipe Ends 203
Group On/Off 150
Guide 226
519
Index
H
Handrail 273
Height 202
Horizontal 196
Horizontal with Tail 198
HVAC 306
HVAC BOM Setup 315
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel 305
HVAC Shapes Catalog 308
HVACLibraryDirectory 35
I
Import CADWorx HVAC data 324
Import HVAC 324
Import Pipe 145
Import Pipe Bill of Material 141
Import Steel 301
Import Steel Model 303
Increment 127
Insert a drawing into the project 97
Insert a gasket 496
Insert a pipe support 83
Insert a reinforcement pad 222
Insert a reinforcement saddle 223
Insert an assembly into the drawing 101
Insert an elbow support 84
Insert multiple pipe supports 84
Insert Tag 142
Instrument 214
Insulation View Palette 88
ISO 211
ISO Flag 175
ISO Text 202
ISOGEN Batch 106
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box 64
ISOGEN Export Options 159
ISOGEN Information 113
ISOGEN Out 104
ISOGEN Panel 103
ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure
113
ISOGEN Start Point 108
ISOGEN Supplemental 107
ISOGENDefaultStyle 35
Isolate Layer 220
L
Label components with line numbers 128
Ladder 271
LanguageFile 35
Lap Joint Flange 369
520
Lateral Plan 423

Lateral Side 440
Lateral Vertical 440
Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan 468
Latrolet Socket Weld in Side 480
Latrolet Thread in Plan 468
Latrolet Thread in Side 480
Latrolet Weld in Plan 468
Latrolet Weld in Side 479
Layer Change 290, 322
Layer Off 219
Layer On 219
LayerByLineNumber 35
Layers Dialog Box 99
Layers Panel 217
LibraryDirectory 37
Line 129
Line Isolate 129
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View
Palette) 79
Line Numbering System Dialog Box 124
Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup
Dialog Box 78
Line Numbers 504
Line View Palette 79
Lined 389
Lined Eccentric Reducer 392
Lined Pipe 391
Lined Wye Plan 392
Lined Wye Side 393
Lined Wye Vert 393
LineNumberSystem 37
Link components 96
LNum Panel 123
Local Edit 62
Loft 260
Long Weld Neck 370
M
Match an object's layer 220
Match Layer 219
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View
Palette) 94
Material List Definition 113
Misc 213, 498
Misc Panel 149
Miter 280
Miters 342
Mode Convert 70
Modeling in 2D 349, 386, 393, 405, 435,
470, 493, 503
Modeling in 3D 333, 376, 391, 397, 419,
455, 484, 500
Index
Modify a component 63
Modify a generic attachment 314
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape 313
Modify an HVAC shape 308
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog
310
Modify multiple components 69
Modifying a User Profile 513
MVSetup 24
N
Nipolet Thread in Plan 469
Nipolet Thread in Vertical 481
Nipolet Weld in Plan 469
Nipolet Weld in Vertical 480
Nipple 456
Non Standard 187
North 230
O
Obsolete Commands 20
Offset Tap 108
Online Help 21
Operators 504
Optional Component Dialog Box 55
Optional Items 55
Options Dialog Box 98
P
P&ID View Palette 94
Palette Panel 75
Palettes 509
PCF In 112
PCF Out 112
Pipe 333
Pipe BOM / DB Panel 131
Pipe Shapes 240
Pipe Support Report 93
PipeDescriptionCat 38
PipeSupportDirectory 38
PipeSupportSetting 38
Piping Rules 46
Place a 180 degree plan return 338
Place a 180 degree side return 354, 355
Place a 180 degree vertical return 355,
356
Place a 3-way plan valve 383, 433, 489
Place a 3-way side valve 386, 446, 493
Place a 3-way vertical valve 387, 446, 493
Place a 45 degree rolled elbow 346
Place a 4-way plan valve 384, 489
Place a 4-way side valve 387, 494

Place a 90 degree plan elbow 334, 398,
403, 419, 458
336, 420, 459
Place a 90 degree rolled elbow 345, 346
Place a 90 degree side street elbow 470
Place a 90 degree street plan elbow 458
Place a base plate 254
Place a base plate with holes 254
Place a bleed ring 501
Place a bushing 402, 465
Place a cap 340, 402, 429, 463
Place a concentric reducer 339, 399, 405,
427, 462
Place a concentric reducer swage 461
Place a coupling 401, 428, 429, 465, 466
Place a coupling end 409, 475, 476
Place a detail graphic 207
Place a fiberglass pipe 397
Place a flange 365, 369
Place a flange on a pipe 363, 364, 366,
368, 371, 372, 374
Place a flange that mates with another
flange 363, 365, 367, 368, 371, 373,
374
Place a frame in the drawing 270
Place a gasket automatically 183
Place a gasket manually 184
173, 314
Place a guide 226
Place a ladder interactively 272
Place a ladder using key-ins 273
Place a ladder with a cage 273
Place a miscellaneous graphic 214
Place a mitered pipe 343
Place a multi-port valve 434
Place a nipple 456
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the
drawing 172
Place a pipe 333, 392
Place a plan cross 340, 400, 422, 463
Place a plan elbow 335, 347, 348, 398,
404, 420, 425, 459
Place a plan elbowlet fitting 467
Place a plan fitting 466, 469
Place a plan flange pipe 500
Place a plan flanged tee 404
Place a plan graphic 208
Place a plan lateral 342, 401, 423, 424,
464
Place a plan latrolet fitting 468
521
Index
Place a plan reducing cross 341
Place a plan soc-o-let 403
Place a plan tee 336, 337, 399, 421, 422,
460, 461
Place a plan wye 349, 393, 428
Place a plug 464
Place a relief side valve 490
Place a relief top valve 494
Place a rigid element 502
Place a rolled pipe 344
Place a rolled tee 347
Place a rotational restraint 225
Place a sanitary plan reducing cross 423
444, 445
Place a sanitary side reducing cross 439
Place a sanitary u-bend 426
Place a section graphic 206
Place a side blind spectacle 501
Place a side cross 356, 408, 439, 474
Place a side elbowlet fitting 477, 478, 479
Place a side flange pipe 503
Place a side flanged tee 412
Place a side lateral 358, 408, 440, 441,
475
Place a side latrolet fitting 479, 480
Place a side or vertical elbow 349, 350,
351, 359, 360, 405, 406, 410, 411, 435,
436, 437, 442, 443, 444, 470, 471
Place a side reducing cross 357
Place a side reducing elbow 352, 435, 472
Place a side socket weld threaded pipe
501
Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe
503
Place a side tee 352, 353, 407, 437, 438,
472, 473
Place a side wye 361, 393, 445
Place a snubber 226
Place a spring hanger 225
Place a stub or weld neck 369, 370
Place a symmetrical user shape in the
drawing 172
Place a tap 113
Place a threaded/socket pipe 456
Place a translational restraint 223
Place a user-defined HVAC shape 313
Place a valve 377, 378, 379, 380, 381,
382, 383, 429, 430, 431, 432, 484, 485,
486, 487, 488, 491, 492
Place a vertical blind spectacle 504
Place a vertical elbowlet fitting 478, 479
Place a vertical fitting 476, 477, 481
522
Place a vertical lateral 358, 409, 441, 475

Place a vertical reducing cross 357, 440
Place a vertical soc-o-let 409
Place a vertical strainer 412
Place a vertical tee 353, 354, 407, 438,
439, 473, 474
Place a vertical wye 361, 394, 445
Place a weld dot graphic 216
Place a weld symbol graphic 211
Place an anchor 224
Place an angle side valve 388, 389, 447,
495
Place an angle top valve 490
Place an angle valve 385, 433
Place an arrow head graphic 210
Place an eccentric reducer 339, 392, 400,
427, 463
Place an eccentric reducer swage 462
Place an elevation graphic 209
Place an expansion joint 502
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog
310
Place an instrument graphic 215
Place an isometric symbol graphic 213
Place an offset tap 111
Place automatic dimensions 196
Place component annotation 200
Place component elevation annotation 200
Place coordinates 201
Place hand rail by points 274
Place hand rail by polyline 275
Place horizontal dimensions 196
Place horizontal tailed dimensions 198
Place nonstandard stud bolts 187
Place plate by closed polyline 251
Place plate by curves 252
Place plate by points 251
Place rotated dimensions 198
Place standard stud bolts 187
Place stud bolts automatically 184
Place stud bolts manually 184
Place tick marks 202
Place tubing 457
Place vertical dimensions 197
Place vertical tailed dimensions 199
Place weld gaps automatically 185
Place weld gaps manually 186
Plan 208
Plan 11.25 Ell 347
Plan 180 LR Return 337
Plan 180 SR Return 338
Plan 22.5 Ell 348
Plan 45 Ell 335
Index
Plan 90 LR Ell 333
Plan 90 Reducing Ell 335
Plan 90 SR Ell 334
Plan Cross 340
Plan Lateral 341
Plan Reducing Cross 341
Plan Reducing Tee 337
Plan Tee 336
Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow
397
Plan Wye 348
Plane versus Isometrics view modes 328
Plate 250
Plug Valve 378
Point and Shoot UCS 227
Preface 15
Pressure Top Valve 388
Previous 220
R
Read a CAESAR II input file 175
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer
Off command 219
Reducing Slip-on Flange 370
Reducing Tee Plan 421
Reducing Tee Side 438
Reducing Tee Vertical 438
Reducing Threaded Flange 372
Reducing Weld Neck Flange 373
Reinforcing Pad 222
Reinforcing Saddle 222, 502
Relief Side Valve 384
Relief Top Valve 387
Remove CADWorx data from components
322
Restore XDATA 31
Restraints 497
Restraints Panel 221
Rigid Element 502
Rolled Pipe 343
Rotary Valve 381
Rotated 198
Rotational 225
Round Bar Shapes 243
Router 191
Router commands 192
RT Panel 189
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV
Fabricator with CADWorx Plant 514
Saddle in Vertical 409

Sanitary 412
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan 425
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side 443
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical 443
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan 424
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side 442
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical 442
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan 432
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side 446
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical 446
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan 420
Sanitary 45 Ell Side 436
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical 436
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan 419
Sanitary 90 Ell Side 435
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan 420
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side 435
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan 433
Sanitary Angle Valve Side 446
Sanitary Ball Valve 430
Sanitary Butterfly Valve 432
Sanitary Cap 428
Sanitary Check Valve 431
Sanitary Concentric 426
Sanitary Eccentric 427
Sanitary Gate Valve 429
Sanitary Globe Valve 430
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan 424
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side 441
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical 441
Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve 433
Sanitary Nut/Coupling 429
Sanitary Plug Valve 431
Sanitary Stub 427
Sanitary Tee Plan 421
Sanitary Tee Side 437
Sanitary Tee Vertical 437
Sanitary U-Bend Plan 426
Sanitary U-Bend Side 444
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical 444
Sanitary Wye Plan 428
Sanitary Wye Side 445
Sanitary Wye Vertical 445
SaveLastProfileUsed 39
Section 206
Select Control 290
Select Item Dialog Box 144
Set 125, 197
Set Layer 218
Saddle in Plan 402
523
Index
Set line numbers based on a component
126
Set line numbers based on a P&ID project
126
Set line numbers based on the current
drawing 126
Set Size by Component 257
Set Specification & Size Dialog Box 43
Set Specification and Size 43
Set the active layer 218
Set the current line number to that of a
component 129
Set the Elevation 197
Set the line count value 127
Settings 73, 507
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View
Palette) 89
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)
78
Setup 23, 26, 124
Setup Live Database 142
Setup Live Database Steel 300
Setup Size/Spec Panel 25
Shapes 233
Show Removed XDATA 30
Side 11.25 Ell 358
Side 180 LR Return 354
Side 180 SR Return 355
Side 22.5 Ell 359
Side 45 Ell 350
Side 90 LR Ell 349
Side 90 Reducing Ell 351
Side 90 SR Ell 350
Side Cross 356
Side Lateral 357
Side Reducing Cross 357
Side Reducing Tee 353
Side Tee 352
Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow
405
Side Wye 360
139, 299, 322
Single BOM using Manual placement 139,
299, 322
Single HVAC Bill of Material 321
Single Line Steel 261
Single Pipe Bill of Material 138
Single Steel Bill of Material 297
SingleLineWidth 39
Size 56
Size-Spec 57
SKEY Information 114
524
Slip-on Flange 364

Snubber 226
Socket Type Flange 366
Socket Weld 73, 194
Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan 466
Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical 477
South 231
Spec 56
Spec Editor 77
Spec View Palette 76
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View
Palette) 76
Special Monitored Commands Used With a
Live Database 516
Specification and Data Files 511
Specification and Size 55
SpecificationDefaultProject 39
SpecificationDirectory 39
Specify the weld dot size for a single line
pipe 151
SpecSizeOverride 39
Spectacle Blind 501
Spectacle Blind Vertical 504
Spring Hanger 224
Stair 275
Standard 187
Start a new route 190
Startup Defaults 23
Startup Variables 28
Steel 505
Steel Bolts 255
Steel BOM / DB Panel 291
Steel BOM Setup 292
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation
Dialog Box 294
Steel Draw Panel 249
Steel Edit Panel 279
Steel Shapes Panel 233
SteelCopeBoltDistance 39
SteelCopeWeldDistance 40
SteelLibraryDirectory 40
SteelNeutralAxis 40
SteelPartNumberFile 40
SteelRoundControl 40
SteelRoundUnit 41
SteelToolTipSetting 41
Stop Sign 108
Stub End 369
Support Directory 23
Support Modeler Palette 81
Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) 84
SW/Thrd Plan 500
SW/Thrd Side 503
Index
Synchronize HVAC Database 325
Synchronize Pipe Database 146
Synchronize Steel Database 302
Synchronize the HVAC database 325
SyncOnStartUp 41
System In 174
System Out 152
System Prompts 204
System Visibility 177
SystemMeasure 41
T
Tag Location 141
Tag Toggle Bill of Material 141
Tap 112
Technical Support 16
Tee 346
Tee Shapes 239
TemplateDatabaseFile 41
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan 489
Thrd/SW 3 Way Side 493
Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical 493
Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan 489
Thrd/SW 4 Way Side 494
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan 459
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side 471
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert 471
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan 457
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side 470
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan 459
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side 472
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan 458
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side 470
Thrd/SW Angle Side 495
Thrd/SW Angle Top 490
Thrd/SW Ball 484
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert 464
Thrd/SW Cap 463
Thrd/SW Check 486
Thrd/SW Conc Swage 461
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub 462
Thrd/SW Control 488
Thrd/SW Cross Plan 463
Thrd/SW Cross Side 474
Thrd/SW Diaphragm 487
Thrd/SW Dual Check 488
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage 461
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub 462
Thrd/SW Full Clpg End 475
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan 465
Thrd/SW Gage 491
Thrd/SW Gate 484
Thrd/SW Globe 485
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End 476

Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan 465
Thrd/SW Lateral Plan 464
Thrd/SW Lateral Side 474
Thrd/SW Lateral Vert 475
Thrd/SW Needle 486
Thrd/SW Pipe 455
Thrd/SW Plug 464, 485
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End 476
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan 465
Thrd/SW Relief Side 490
Thrd/SW Relief Top 494
Thrd/SW Rotary 487
Thrd/SW Tee Plan 460
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan 460
Thrd/SW Tee Red Side 473
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert 474
Thrd/SW Tee Side 472
Thrd/SW Tee Vert 473
Thrd/SW Union 469
Thrd/SW Valves 481
Threaded 73, 193
Threaded Flange 367
Threaded/Socket 450
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan
398
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side
406
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert
406
Threaded/Socket Cap 402
Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer 399
Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer 400
Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing 402
Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan 401
Threaded/Socket Lateral Side 408
Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert 408
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan 400
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side 408
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan 399
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side 407
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert 407
Threadolet Thread in Plan 466
Threadolet Thread in Vertical 477
Tick Mark 201
Toolbars 327
ToolTipSetting 41
Top Works Add 151
Top Works Change 151
TopWorksSetting 42
137, 297, 320
525
Index
Total BOM using Manual placement 137,
297, 320
Total HVAC Bill of Material 319
Total Pipe Bill of Material 136
Total Steel Bill of Material 296
Translational 223
Tube 457
Tube Shapes 241
Turn off a layer 219
Turn off the zoom lock 182
Turn on all layers 220
Turn on the zoom lock 182
Weldolet Weld in Plan 466

Weldolet Weld in Vertical 476
West 231
What's New in Plant 18
Wide Flange Shapes 236
UCS 505
UCS Next 230
UCS Object 232
UCS Panel 227
Union 282
Un-Isolate Layer 220
Unlink components 96
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View
Palette) 96
UseObjectsFromXrefs 42
User Shape 258, 310
User Shapes 153
X
X-Body Gate BW 491
X-Body Gate SW 492
X-Body Gate Thrd 492
XREF Edit 73
Z Shapes 246
Zoom Factors 182
Zoom Lock 181
V
Vert 11.25 Ell 359
Vert 180 LR Return 355
Vert 180 SR Return 356
Vert 22.5 Ell 360
Vert 45 Ell 351
Vert Lateral 358
Vert Reducing Cross 357
Vert Reducing Tee 354
Vert Tee 353
Vert Wye 361
Vertical 197
Vertical with Tail 198
Victaulic 447
View Clip 227
W
Weld 211
Weld Gap 497
Weld Neck Flange 362
Weld Size 151
Weld Total 186
WeldDotSize 42
WeldGapToDB 42
526

CADWorx Plant User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CADWorx Plant User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CADWorx

Plant User's Guide

Version 2013 R2 (13.2)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

The CADWorx installation folder on your computer, for example,

The AutoCAD installation folder on your computer, for example,

The CD-ROM drive on your computer. Substitute your CD-ROM

Items that need to be typed in or appear at the AutoCAD

User responses to command prompts.

CADWorx and AutoCAD commands.

Command line options.

AutoCAD system variables or keywords.

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

Plant, P&ID, fieldPipe, or Steel

Run the CADWORXABOUT command. A dialog

Version information is displayed at the AutoCAD

Click Help > About to display a dialog box that contains

Additional Files Required by Intergraph CAS

CADWorx Plant (Piping, Steel, HVAC)

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

CADWorx Plant (component data file

If the model consists of several line numbers,

Email information about the part's dimension from the

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files, any

If the model consists of several line numbers,

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

CADWorx Equipment to PV Elite

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and PV

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and PV

CADWorx P&ID or CADWorx IP

Email the complete P&ID project, which includes

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

If the model consists of many components, indicate

Email the datasheets MDB file and any datasheet file

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

If the project has many P&ID drawing files, indicate

If emailing MDB / XLS files, use a compression

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and

Run the CADWorx GETALLSPECDATAFILES

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and the

What's New in Plant

You can now convert CADWorx legacy drawings using

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

You can now review drawings for legacy components using

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide